Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide (S3D)

Isometric Drawing Options
Reference Guide
Version 2016 (11.0)

November 2016
Copyright
Copyright © 2016 Intergraph® Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
Portions of the user interface copyright 2012-2013 Telerik AD.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.
Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and
for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 2

Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.
Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b. To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporation’s Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, I-Sketch, I-Configure, SmartSketch, Isogen, SpoolGen, Sapphire, and Intergraph
Smart are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are registered trademarks of Hexagon AB or its subsidiaries. Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. DotNetMagic is a trademark of Crownwood Software. All rights reserved. MicroStation is a
registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Contents
Preface ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
Documentation Comments.................................................................................................................. 11
What's New in Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide .............................................................. 11
Isogen Configuration for Smart 3D ........................................................................................................ 13
Drawing Manager .................................................................................................................................... 15

Drawing Generation ............................................................................................................................ 16
Overview....................................................................................................................................... 17
Units ............................................................................................................................................. 21
Drawing Splitting........................................................................................................................... 23
Weights ........................................................................................................................................ 28
Centre of Gravity .......................................................................................................................... 29
Tolerances .................................................................................................................................... 31
Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................... 33
Dates ............................................................................................................................................ 35
Centreline Lengths ....................................................................................................................... 36
Actions.......................................................................................................................................... 36
Drawing File ........................................................................................................................................ 37
Sheet Size .................................................................................................................................... 37
Drawing Area Size ........................................................................................................................ 38
Output File .................................................................................................................................... 40
Pre and Post Processors .................................................................................................................... 43
Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 43
Input Files ........................................................................................................................................... 45
Summary ...................................................................................................................................... 45
Pipeline Attributes......................................................................................................................... 47
Header Attributes.......................................................................................................................... 48
Heat Treatment............................................................................................................................. 49
Reports ............................................................................................................................................... 50
Report Types ................................................................................................................................ 50
File Formatting.............................................................................................................................. 50
Output Rules................................................................................................................................. 59
POD Attributes.............................................................................................................................. 63
Pipeline Attributes......................................................................................................................... 64
Component Attributes ................................................................................................................... 66
Material Attributes......................................................................................................................... 72
Weld Attributes ............................................................................................................................. 74
Spool Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 75
Miscellaneous Attributes ............................................................................................................... 76
Alternative Texts ........................................................................................................................... 81
Drawing Area ........................................................................................................................................... 82

Piping Components ............................................................................................................................. 84

Contents
Pipe .............................................................................................................................................. 85
Valves........................................................................................................................................... 87
Instruments ................................................................................................................................... 88
Supports ....................................................................................................................................... 89
Bends ........................................................................................................................................... 92
Elbows .......................................................................................................................................... 94
Flanges......................................................................................................................................... 96
Gaskets ........................................................................................................................................ 97
Multi-Port ...................................................................................................................................... 98
Alternative Texts ........................................................................................................................... 99
Piping Features ................................................................................................................................. 115
Branches .................................................................................................................................... 115
Taps ........................................................................................................................................... 122
Nozzles....................................................................................................................................... 128
Alternative Texts ......................................................................................................................... 129
Cable Tray Components ................................................................................................................... 133
Cable Tray .................................................................................................................................. 133
Supports ..................................................................................................................................... 134
Bends ......................................................................................................................................... 137
Elbows ........................................................................................................................................ 139
Multi-Port .................................................................................................................................... 141
Cable Tray Features ......................................................................................................................... 142
Branches .................................................................................................................................... 142
Taps ........................................................................................................................................... 146
Duct Components ............................................................................................................................. 151
Duct ............................................................................................................................................ 151
Valves......................................................................................................................................... 153
Instruments ................................................................................................................................. 154
Supports ..................................................................................................................................... 155
Bends ......................................................................................................................................... 158
Elbows ........................................................................................................................................ 159
Gaskets ...................................................................................................................................... 161
Multi-Port .................................................................................................................................... 162
Duct Features ................................................................................................................................... 163
Branches .................................................................................................................................... 163
Taps ........................................................................................................................................... 167
Nozzles....................................................................................................................................... 172
Enclosures ........................................................................................................................................ 173
Part Numbers ............................................................................................................................. 173
Component Attributes ................................................................................................................. 178
Component Tags ........................................................................................................................ 179
Weld Numbers ............................................................................................................................ 182
Spool Identifiers .......................................................................................................................... 185
Cut Pieces .................................................................................................................................. 188
Joints and Assemblies ................................................................................................................ 190
Messages ................................................................................................................................... 194
Graphics............................................................................................................................................ 196
Definitions ................................................................................................................................... 196
Layers......................................................................................................................................... 203
Scale .......................................................................................................................................... 204
Additional .................................................................................................................................... 205

Contents
Grouping ..................................................................................................................................... 206

Content ............................................................................................................................................. 207
North Arrow ................................................................................................................................ 207
Continuations.............................................................................................................................. 208
Nominal Sizes............................................................................................................................. 211
Insulation and Tracing ................................................................................................................ 214
Spec Breaks ............................................................................................................................... 215
Flow Arrows ................................................................................................................................ 216
Ghost Gap .................................................................................................................................. 217
Detail Sketches ................................................................................................................................. 229
Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 229
Local Sketches ........................................................................................................................... 236
Revision Clouds ................................................................................................................................ 239
Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 239
Identifiers .................................................................................................................................... 242
Text ................................................................................................................................................... 243
Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 243
Static Fonts................................................................................................................................. 245
Dynamic Fonts............................................................................................................................ 246
Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................ 255

Dimension Style ................................................................................................................................ 256
Standard Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 257
Overall Dimensions .................................................................................................................... 258
Standouts ................................................................................................................................... 260
Dimension Location .................................................................................................................... 263
Dual Units ................................................................................................................................... 264
Additional Allowance .................................................................................................................. 265
Suppress Branch Dimensions .................................................................................................... 266
Vertical Dimensions .................................................................................................................... 268
Piping Components and Features..................................................................................................... 270
Valves and Instruments .............................................................................................................. 271
Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves ............................................................................................................ 272
Supports ..................................................................................................................................... 273
Set on Tees and Tapped Branches in Pipe ................................................................................ 276
Tap Branches ............................................................................................................................. 278
Tap Headers ............................................................................................................................... 280
Teed Bends and Elbows ............................................................................................................. 281
Pulled (Pipe) Bends .................................................................................................................... 281
Gaskets ...................................................................................................................................... 282
Welds ......................................................................................................................................... 284
Penetration Plates ...................................................................................................................... 286
Jacketed Pipe ............................................................................................................................. 287
Curved Pipe ................................................................................................................................ 288
Cable Tray Components and Features ............................................................................................. 289
Supports ..................................................................................................................................... 290
Set on Tees and Tapped Branches ............................................................................................ 293

Contents
Tap Branches ............................................................................................................................. 294

Tap Headers ............................................................................................................................... 296
Pulled Bends .............................................................................................................................. 297
Duct Components and Features ....................................................................................................... 298
Valves and Instruments .............................................................................................................. 299
Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves ............................................................................................................ 300
Supports ..................................................................................................................................... 301
Set on Tees and Tapped Branches in Duct ................................................................................ 304
Tap Branches ............................................................................................................................. 306
Tap Headers ............................................................................................................................... 308
Teed Bends and Elbows ............................................................................................................. 309
Pulled Bends .............................................................................................................................. 310
Gaskets ...................................................................................................................................... 311
Coordinates....................................................................................................................................... 313
Display........................................................................................................................................ 313
Bends and Branches .................................................................................................................. 317
Supports ..................................................................................................................................... 318
Heat Tracing ............................................................................................................................... 319
Display Format .................................................................................................................................. 320
Metric Coordinates ..................................................................................................................... 320
Metric Dimensions ...................................................................................................................... 321
Imperial Dimensions and Coordinates ........................................................................................ 322
Angles ........................................................................................................................................ 323
Skews and Falls ................................................................................................................................ 328
Style ........................................................................................................................................... 328
Dimensions ................................................................................................................................. 331
Hatching ..................................................................................................................................... 333
Falls and Slopes ......................................................................................................................... 335
Callouts ...................................................................................................................................... 337
Tolerances .................................................................................................................................. 339
Reference Dimensions ...................................................................................................................... 342
Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 342
Reference Planes ............................................................................................................................. 348
Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 349
Drawing Border ..................................................................................................................................... 354

Attribute Display ................................................................................................................................ 355
Definitions ................................................................................................................................... 355
Table Display .................................................................................................................................... 357
Attribute Table ............................................................................................................................ 357
Symbol Table.............................................................................................................................. 360
Title Texts for Fixed Material List ...................................................................................................... 366
Title Texts ................................................................................................................................... 366

Contents
Materials ................................................................................................................................................. 367

Drawing Material List ........................................................................................................................ 368
Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 369
User Defined............................................................................................................................... 379
User Defined Columns ............................................................................................................... 391
User Defined Remarks ............................................................................................................... 392
User Defined Spool Table .......................................................................................................... 394
Variable ...................................................................................................................................... 399
Variable Columns ....................................................................................................................... 403
Fixed........................................................................................................................................... 405
Material Group Transfers ............................................................................................................ 409
SKEYS Defined as Instruments .................................................................................................. 410
Part Numbers .................................................................................................................................... 423
Format ........................................................................................................................................ 423
Enclosure.................................................................................................................................... 425
Traceability Table ....................................................................................................................... 427
Traceability Columns .................................................................................................................. 429
Accumulation .................................................................................................................................... 430
Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 430
Text ................................................................................................................................................... 434
Alternative Text ........................................................................................................................... 434
Reports ............................................................................................................................................. 445
Spools .................................................................................................................................................... 446

Settings ............................................................................................................................................. 447
Spool Breaks .............................................................................................................................. 447
Spool Identifiers .......................................................................................................................... 447
Enclosures .................................................................................................................................. 448
Flat Spools ........................................................................................................................................ 451
Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 451
Attributes ........................................................................................................................................... 455
Data Files ................................................................................................................................... 455
Enclosures .................................................................................................................................. 456
Reports ............................................................................................................................................. 457
Cut Pieces .............................................................................................................................................. 458

Cut Length Calculations .................................................................................................................... 459
Weld Allowances ........................................................................................................................ 459
Branches .................................................................................................................................... 461
Drawing Cut List................................................................................................................................ 462
Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 462
Identifiers .................................................................................................................................... 464
User-Defined .............................................................................................................................. 465
User-Defined Columns ............................................................................................................... 469
Fixed........................................................................................................................................... 470
Reports ............................................................................................................................................. 478

Contents
Welds and Joints ................................................................................................................................... 479

Generation and Display .................................................................................................................... 480
Controls ...................................................................................................................................... 480
Component Specific ................................................................................................................... 481
Identifier Table ............................................................................................................................ 482
Numbering ........................................................................................................................................ 483
Controls ...................................................................................................................................... 483
Sequences.................................................................................................................................. 485
Prefixes ...................................................................................................................................... 488
Rarely Used ................................................................................................................................ 491
Enclosures ........................................................................................................................................ 492
Controls ...................................................................................................................................... 492
Enclosures .................................................................................................................................. 496
Drawing Weld List ............................................................................................................................. 501
Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 501
User Defined............................................................................................................................... 503
User Defined Columns ............................................................................................................... 506
Variable ...................................................................................................................................... 507
Variable Columns ....................................................................................................................... 508
Fixed........................................................................................................................................... 509
Calculations ...................................................................................................................................... 521
Costing ....................................................................................................................................... 521
Joints and Bolted Assemblies ........................................................................................................... 522
Bolted Assemblies ...................................................................................................................... 522
User Defined Joints .................................................................................................................... 528
Reports ............................................................................................................................................. 534
Smart 3D................................................................................................................................................. 535

Drawing Creation .............................................................................................................................. 536
Overview..................................................................................................................................... 536
Symbol Map................................................................................................................................ 541
Units of Measure ........................................................................................................................ 543
Content ............................................................................................................................................. 544
General ....................................................................................................................................... 545
Components ............................................................................................................................... 548
Material List ................................................................................................................................ 552
Reference Dimensions ............................................................................................................... 553
Dotted Symbology ...................................................................................................................... 556
Detail Sketches........................................................................................................................... 558
Label Mapping .................................................................................................................................. 561
General ....................................................................................................................................... 561
Attributes .................................................................................................................................... 563
Notes .......................................................................................................................................... 565
Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 568
User Defined Item Codes and Descriptions ................................................................................ 570
Numbering .................................................................................................................................. 575

Contents
Post Isogen ....................................................................................................................................... 577

Pipeline List ................................................................................................................................ 577
Drawing Frame ........................................................................................................................... 580
Enterprise Data........................................................................................................................... 581
Appendix: Record Identification Numbers .......................................................................................... 582
Index ....................................................................................................................................................... 585

Preface
This document is a reference guide for configuring isometric drawing options. The purpose of
this document is to describe the settings for each of the options that the software supports for
isometric drawing generation and report output.
Intergraph® gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as you need for
non-commercial use at your company. You cannot reprint this document for resale or
redistribution outside your company.
Documentation Comments
We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at:
PPMdoc@intergraph.com.
Documentation updates for supported software versions are available from Intergraph Smart
Support (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com).
What's New in Isometric Drawing Options Reference

Guide
The following changes have been made to the isometric drawing options supported by the
software.
Version 2016
 This is a new document. Previously, the supporting documentation for the Smart 3D-specific
and Isogen isometric drawing options were delivered as an appendix in the Piping Isometric
Drawings User's Guide.
 You can now configure settings specific to cable tray and HVAC isometric drawings.
In this version of the software, cable tray and HVAC isometric drawing
options are limited to beta access. As such, isometric options specific to cable tray and
HVAC drawings are not visible in Isogen Configuration by default. To turn on cable tray
and HVAC options so that you have access to the full array of isometric drawing settings
provided by the software, please contact Intergraph Support
(http://www.intergraph.com/support).
 Added information about using pipeline data text attributes to dynamically name Isogen
output files. For more information, see Dynamic File Naming in Reports (on page 49).
 A new options group, Grouping, has been added to Drawing Area > Graphics. For more
information, see Grouping (on page 206). (P2 AL:10443)
 The Group graphics by UCI option allows you to control how graphics are grouped in the
output CAD file. For more information, see Grouping (on page 206). (P2 AL:10443)
 A new group of options, Enable, Enclosure, and Height, enable you to control the display
of revision identifier information on the isometric drawing. For more information, see
Identifiers (on page 241). (P2 AL:10836)

Preface
 Isogen Configuration supports horizontal positioning of the dimension standout. For more
information, see Preferred Standout Dimension in Standouts (on page 259). (P2 AL:11970)
 The Welds and Joints category has been re-organized to improve its overall layout. For
more information, see Welds and Joints (on page 479). (P2 AL:14803)
 You can show multiple revision clouds on the isometric drawing. For more information, see
Revisions Highlighted in Settings (on page 239). (P2 AL:15644)
 The number of user-definable Alternative Text (AText) strings that the software supports has
been expanded. For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 559). (P2 CP:74293)
 Isogen Configuration supports a new file path macro, $SYMBOLSHARE$. This macro
enables you to reference the SharedContent folder when specifying any path within an
isometric drawing style. Previous versions of the software required you to specify a
hard-coded path to reference any file located in the SharedContent folder. (P2 CP:105056)
 Drawing Sheet has been added as an OidType, enabling you to pull properties directly
from the Drawing Sheet object. For more information, see Drawing Frame in Attributes (on
page 562). (P2 CP:123112)
 The software supports user-specified reference dimension placement locations on a piping
isometric drawing. As part of this new functionality, the Placement property has been
renamed as Automatic Placement, and a new setting, Off, has been added. For more
information, see Automatic Placement and User Defined Placement in Column References.
(P3 CP:176166)
 The software supports output of a double-banked material list on the isometric drawing.
Previous versions of the software supported offsetting the material list section only along the
Y (or vertical) direction of the drawing using Section2 Y Offset and Section3 Y Offset. Now
you can also offset the material list section along the X (or horizontal) direction of the
drawing using Section2 X Offset and Section3 X Offset. You can set this option using
Materials > Drawing Material List > User Defined. For more information, see Section2 X
Offset and Section3 X Offset in User Defined. (P3 CP:250733)

SECTION 1
Isogen Configuration for Smart 3D

Isogen Configuration provides a single, streamlined interface for setting isometric drawing
style properties. The Isogen Configuration environment provides easy access to Isogen's
substantial array of controls and files and enables you to configure projects quickly and
efficiently. Any modifications that you make can then be saved to the drawing style file for future
use. To access Isogen Configuration, right-click an Isogen Isometric component or package in
the Management Console, and then select Edit Options on the shortcut menu.
The groups of options that are available for each style group is based on the type of isometric
drawing style that is active, such as pipeline, HVAC, or cable tray. The following example shows
how the content of the Content style group changes depending on the active isometric drawing
style: Iso_Piping (1) Iso_HVAC (2) or Iso_CableTray (3).
In this version of the software, cable tray and HVAC isometric drawing options
are limited to beta access. As such, isometric options specific to cable tray and HVAC drawings
are not visible in Isogen Configuration by default. To turn on cable tray and HVAC options so
that you have access to the full array of isometric drawing settings provided by the software,
please contact Intergraph Support (http://www.intergraph.com/support).

Isogen Configuration for Smart 3D
When you select a cable tray or HVAC isometric drawing style in the Management Console
and open Isogen Configuration, the software may also restrict the drawing properties that are
available for editing. The next example shows how the software populates the group of
Components options, depending on which isometric drawing style that is active: Piping (1) or
HVAC (2).

SECTION 2
Drawing Manager
Sets property values for system controls, including pre- and post-processors and the names of
the input files that Isogen uses during drawing generation. You can also define properties that
control the content and appearance of the extracted drawing.
The Drawing Manager category includes the style groups listed below. Every style group is
further broken down into options groups, with each options group containing a collection of
associated isometric drawing properties.
 Drawing Generation organizes options that control the format of the data that is output on
the isometric drawing, such as units format, deviations, and calculations. For more
information, see Drawing Generation (on page 15).
 Drawing File organizes options groups that define the backing sheet, such as the paper
size, margins, template file location, and folder location of the output file. For more
information, see Drawing File (on page 36).
 Pre and Post Processors organizes options groups that control how pre- and
post-processor applications run and interact with Personal Isogen. For more information, see
Pre and Post Processors (on page 42).
 Input Files organizes options groups that define the names and locations of the input data
files that Isogen uses. Options are also available for setting the
PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION section of the Data Definition (DDF) file,
heat treatment, and NDE testing data. For more information, see Input Files (on page 44).
 Reports organizes options groups that define Isogen output and report files. For more
information, see Reports (on page 49).

Drawing Manager
Drawing Generation
Controls the format of the data that is output on the isometric drawing, such as the units format,
deviations, and calculations.
The Drawing Generation style group contains the options groups listed below.
The style groups listed below are not applicable for all isometric drawing types.
Available style groups depend on the type of isometric drawing style that is currently active:
Pipeline, Cable Tray, or HVAC.
 Overview sets properties related to the drawing style and backing sheet used during
drawing generation. You can also define materials, weld, and cut list output. For more
information, see Overview (on page 16).
 Units sets properties that control the format of the units used for bolts and dimensions. For
more information, see Units (on page 20).
 Drawing Splitting sets properties related to split control. For more information, see Drawing
Splitting (on page 22).
 Weights sets properties that control the output and format of weight data. For more
information, see Weights (on page 27).
 Centre of Gravity sets properties that control center-of-gravity calculations. For more
information, see Centre of Gravity (on page 29).
 Tolerances sets properties that control dimensional and angular deviations. For more
information, see Tolerances (on page 30).
 Dates sets properties that control the output of the date on isometric drawings and related
files. For more information, see Dates (on page 34).
 Centreline Lengths sets properties that control how Isogen determines the lengths of
bends and elbows. For more information, see Centreline Lengths (on page 35).
 Actions sets properties that control behavior of PCFGEN and IDFGEN. For more
information, see Actions (on page 36).

Drawing Manager
Overview
Specifies the drawing style and type of backing sheet used when the isometric drawing is
generated. Properties also allow you to define the output of the materials, weld, and cut list on
the drawing.
Isometric Type
Sets the type of isometric drawing that Isogen produces.
Available settings depend on the type of isometric drawing style that is currently
active: Pipeline, Cabletray, or HVAC.
 Combined produces drawings that contain Fabrication, Erection, and Offshore
information.
 Erection/Offshore produces Erection/Offshore type isometric drawings.
 Fabrication Only produces Fabrication only isometric drawings.
 Flat Spool (Flat) produces individual flat spool isometric drawings where maximum legs
are flat.
 Flat Spool (Parallel) produces individual flat spool isometric drawings where maximum
legs are parallel
 Spool produces individual spool isometric drawings with As-Built orientation.
 Material List Only suppresses the generation of isometric drawings.
 Combined Material produces a combined material list only, without pipeline, cable tray,
or duct graphics (the type of graphics that the software suppresses depends on the
active isometric drawing style).
 Erection Material produces an Erection material list only, without pipeline, cable tray, or
duct graphics (the type of graphics that the software suppresses depends on the active
isometric drawing style).
 Fabrication Material produces a Fabrication material list only, without pipeline, cable
tray, or duct graphics (the type of graphics that the software suppresses depends on the
active isometric drawing style).
 Spool Material produces a Spool material list only, without spool graphics.
Defines:
Option Switch - 21, Pos 1-2
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.IsometricType
North Direction
Controls the viewing direction (isometric orientation), or the direction that the north arrow
points on the isometric drawing. Acceptable orientation options are: Top Left, Top Right,
Bottom Left, or Bottom Right.
Defines:
Option Switch - 42, Pos1
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.NorthDirection

Drawing Manager
Rotation Angle
Controls the rotation of the isometric drawing in a clockwise direction by a user-specified
number of degrees.
Type 0 to orient isometric drawings in the horizontal plane using the North Direction
setting. This is the default setting.
Alternatively, type the number of degrees by which to orient the isometric drawing in the
horizontal plane in a clockwise direction. This user-specified value overwrites the North
Direction setting.
Where pipelines or components are oriented in a non-primary, or skewed,
direction, the subsequent isometric drawing output can be congested and difficult to read.
The ability to orient pipelines or components in the horizontal plane so that the majority of
sections are rotated to a primary direction can simplify isometric drawing output. The
example below shows pipe oriented in a southeasterly direction:
The next example shows the same pipe rotated 45º so that it is now in a southerly direction:
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DrawingRotationAngle
Drawing
Controls isometric drawing generation. Select the check box to generate the drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Visible

Drawing Manager
Drawing Frame
Controls plotting of the standard Isogen drawing frame. Select the check box to plot the
standard Isogen drawing frame.
Defines:
Option Switch - 18
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.Visible
Material List
Controls the display of the material list on the isometric drawing.
Select the check box to plot the material list. To turn off all material list types, except the
material control file and cut list, clear the check box. The software controls the output of
these two files separately.
Defines:
Option Switch - 23, Pos 1
I-Configure - MaterialList.Visible
Weld List
Turns on and off the display of the weld, or operations, summary on the isometric drawing.
Select the check box to plot the weld list.
This property is not available for cable tray or HVAC isometric drawings.
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.Visible
Cut List
Turns on and off the display of the cut piece list and cut piece identifiers. The cut list is a
report on the cut pieces that Isogen has determined to be in the pipeline. Select the check
box to show the cut piece list and numbers on the isometric drawing.
The Active List setting controls whether the cut list report is fixed or
user-defined.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.Visible
First Sheet Number

Allows the first sheet to start at an alternative number instead of starting with drawing
number 1.
Type 0 to start first sheet at drawing number 1, or type a value to start the first sheet at x+1,
where x is the user-specified value.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.StartDrawingNumber

Drawing Manager
Output Format
Controls the 2D CAD file format that Isogen creates. This property is not available for Cable
Tray or HVAC isometric drawings. Select one of the supported formats:
 AutoCAD DXF (DXF)
 MicroStation (DGN)
 Smart DWG (DWG)
 Smart DGN (DGN)
 Smart DGN v8 .DGN)
 SmartSketch (IGR)
 Shape2d (SHA)
 POD2
 POD3
 Isogen
 Postscript
 With Smart DGN v8 output, template backing sheets are suffixed with .dg8.
 To use .dg8 templates:
 Rename the .DGN v5 template backing sheets to .dg5.
 Rename the .dg8 templates to .dgn.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.OutputFormat
Display 1 of 1 on Single Sheet

Allows a single drawing to be identified as Drg 1 of 1 on single-sheet isometric drawings. To
output Drg 1 of 1 on isometrics consisting of a one drawing, select the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.Drg1of1OnSingleIsos

Drawing Manager
Units
Controls the format of the units used for bolts and dimensions.
Only those properties that are available for the type of isometric style that is currently
active (pipeline, cable tray, or HVAC) will display on the Options panel.
Pipe and Fittings

Specifies the unit format that Isogen uses for dimensions.
 Metric / MM Bores uses millimeter lengths and millimeter pipe bores.
 Metric / Inch Bores uses millimeter lengths and inch pipe bores.
 Imperial / Inch Bores uses inch lengths and inch pipe bores.
You can specify the changeover point from where lengths are reported in inches
only, to feet and inches.
 Imperial / MM Bores uses inch pipe bores with lengths in feet and inches.
The combination MM bore, FT-IN dimensions is invalid.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Control.Units

Drawing Manager
Parts
Specifies the unit format that Isogen uses for dimensions.
 Imperial uses for inch lengths and widths.
 Metric uses millimeter lengths and widths.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Control.Units
Bolt Length
Controls the units that Isogen uses for bolt lengths.
 As Drawing uses the setting defined by the Drawing Manager > Drawing Generation
> Units > Pipes and Fittings settings.
 INCH uses inch diameters.
 MM uses millimeter diameters.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.BoltLengthUnits
Bolt Diameter
Controls the units that Isogen uses for bolt diameters.
 As Drawing uses the Drawing Manager > Drawing Generation > Units > Pipes and
Fittings setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.BoltDiameterUnits

Drawing Manager
Drawing Splitting
Provides options related to split control.
The properties that display for this options group depend on the type of active
isometric drawing style: pipeline, cable tray, or HVAC. Some properties are specific to piping
isometric drawings, while others are specific to cable tray or HVAC isometric drawings.
Automatic Drawing Splitting

Invokes automatic splitting of drawings. This property has a slightly different behavior
depending on the active isometric drawing style (pipeline, cable tray, or HVAC).
For Pipeline isometrics:
Select the checkbox to calculate the volume of pipeline graphics that Isogen can
satisfactorily display on the selected drawing size, and generate the required number of
isometrics to contain the complete pipeline. To use the Number of Drawings setting to
specify a fixed number of drawings, clear the check box. Clearing the Automatic Drawing
Split check box allows you to directly dictate how many isometric drawings Isogen produces
for the pipeline.
 Unless you also select Ignore User Split Points, Isogen ignores the Automatic
Drawing Splitting setting if manually-added pipeline split points are present in the
pipeline data file.
 Because Isogen applies the setting to all the pipelines in a run, we recommend that you
only set the number of drawings in special cases, such as for single pipeline runs.
For Cabletray and HVAC isometrics:
Select the check box to calculate the volume of isometric graphics that Isogen can
satisfactorily display on the selected sheet size, and generate the required number of sheets
to contain the data. To use the Number of Sheets setting to specify a fixed number of
drawings, clear the check box. Clearing the Automatic Drawing Split check box allows you
to directly dictate how many isometric drawings Isogen produces for the pipeline.
For all isometric drawing types, if you need to use the Material Part
Number property, we recommend that you do not set Automatic Drawing Split to force
single sheet isometric drawings.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.AutoDrawingSplit
Ignore User Split Points

Controls how Isogen interacts with user-specified drawing split points.
Select the check box to ignore user-specified drawing split points present in the input data.
To process the user-specified drawing split points, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.IgnoredUserSplitPoints

Drawing Manager
Number of Drawings
Specifies the number of drawing sheets required for split control.
For automatic control of drawing numbers, type 0. To specify the number of drawings, type a
value in the range 1-99.
 Unless you select Ignore User Split Points, Isogen ignores the Number of Drawings
setting if manually placed pipeline split points are present in the pipeline data file.
 Number of Drawings dictates how many drawing sheets are extracted for a pipeline.
Because this setting applies to all the pipelines in a run, you should use this property
only for special cases for single pipe runs.
 To use Number of Drawings, you must clear the Automatic Drawing Splitting check
box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.NoOfDrawing
Number of Sheets
Specifies the number of drawing sheets required for split control.
For automatic control of sheet numbers, type 0. To specify the number of sheets, type a
value in the range 1-99.
 To use Number of Sheets, you must clear the Automatic Drawing Splitting check
box.
 This property is not available for piping isometric drawings.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.NoOfDrawing

Drawing Manager
Show Continuation at Split Points

Controls the location of drawing continuation messages at drawing split points on the
isometric drawing.
 True outputs a drawing continuation message that points to the drawing split point. If
Show Coordinates at Split Points is also set to True, coordinate data is displayed (1).
However, if Show Coordinates at Split Points is set to False, Isogen displays the
drawing continuation message but suppresses the display of coordinate data (2).
 False suppresses the output of coordinate data and outputs a drawing continuation
message that points to the end of continuation components (1). Requires that Show
Coordinates at Split Points also be set to False. If Show Coordinates at Split Points
is set to True, Isogen displays a full set of coordinates and a drawing continuation
message that points to the drawing split point (2).
 Show Continuation at Split Points works in conjunction with Show Coordinates at

Split Points.
 Setting AText -209 and -276 to blank suppresses the isometric output of the Show
Continuation at Split Points and Show Coordinates at Split Points settings.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowContAtSplitPoint
Show Coordinates at Split Points

Controls the display of connection coordinates at split points and ISO TEXT on the isometric
drawing.
 True displays a full set of connection coordinates in both drawings when a user-defined
split point is used.
 False suppresses the display. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowCoordAtSplitPts

Drawing Manager
Drawing Splitting in Pipe

Controls the actions taken by the software whenever the Isogen automatic pipeline split
facility selects a split point that is located in a straight length of pipe.
 Normal uses the default for pipeline splitting to function as normal when the split point
occurs along a section of pipe. The relevant split point information is passed back to the
3D design system using the isometric repeatability file, if it is being used.
 Reject writes the warning message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, to the message file
if a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe. No plots are produced and no
information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.
 Message writes the warning message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, to the message
file if a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe. Plots are produced with the
message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT plotted at the top of each affected drawing.
No information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipelineSplittingInTube
Drawing Splitting (%)

Controls the amount of drawing data that triggers a drawing split. The specified setting is a
scale factor expressed as a percentage. Setting a value less than 100 causes less of the
pipeline to appear on each drawing before automatic splitting occurs, resulting in a less
crowded drawing.
This property is intended only for modest modifications of the drawing
whitespace.
Specify a value in the range 90-110. If a particular value does not work, gradually adjust the
value and re-extract the drawing to check the results.
Defines:
Option Switch - 38
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipelineSplitting
Overflow Sheet Numbering

Controls the numbering of overflow drawing sheets.
 Next Identifier specifies that the second isometric drawing has the next sheet number
in the sequence.
 Alpha suffix specifies that the second isometric drawing has the same sheet number
as the first one, with a character suffix, for example, A, B, and so forth.
Overflow Sheet Numbering applies only when you set Material List Overflow
to Continuation Sheet to produce a second sheet that displays the material list
continuation.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.OverflowDrawingID

Drawing Manager
Material List Splitting

Controls the plotting of the material list when a pipeline splits onto two or more drawings.
The settings below are applicable only to piping isometric drawings.
 Per Drawing plots the material list per isometric drawing.
 Per Pipeline plots the material list per pipeline.
For cable tray or HVAC drawings, Material List Splitting controls the plotting of the material
list when an isometric drawing splits onto two or more sheets.
 Per Sheet plots the material list for each sheet separately.
 Combined plots the material list for all sheets together.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.MaterialListSplitting

Drawing Manager
Weights
Controls the output and format of weight data on the isometric drawing.
Output
Controls how Isogen displays component weights on the isometric drawing.
 None outputs no weight information. Applies to all outputs, including such things as
material lists, weight output on the drawing frame, and material control files. This is the
default setting.
 kgs inputs and outputs all weights in kilograms (Kgs).
 lbs inputs and outputs all weights in pounds (Lbs.)
Linear Denominator specifies the units Isogen uses for the linear weight
denominator, regardless of the units used for weights.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.WeightOutput
Linear Denominator
Specifies the units used for the linear weight denominator, regardless of the units used for
weights.
 None uses the default units for linear denominator. For example, use LBS/FT when
weight is in pounds (Lbs.), and KGS/M when weight is in kilograms (Kgs.).
 m outputs the linear denominator in meters.
 ft outputs the linear denominator in feet.
Use the Output setting to specify the weight unit.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.LinearWeightDenominator
Support Additional Material

Controls inclusion of the weight of additional material associated with supports for
center-of-gravity calculations.
 Include includes the weight of additional materials.
 Ignore excludes the weight of additional materials.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.SupportAdditionsWeight

Drawing Manager
Centre of Gravity
Controls center-of-gravity and weight calculations. This options group is available only for piping
isometric drawings.
Enabled
Controls whether center-of-gravity and weight calculations are performed.
Select the check box to perform the center-of-gravity and weight calculations that are set by
Dry Pipe Calculations, Wet Pipe Calculations, Show Insulation Weight, and Show Wet
Weight. To suppress all center-of-gravity and weight calculations, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.CentreOfGravity.Enabled
Dry Pipe Calculations

Controls which center-of-gravity calculations are performed for dry (empty) pipe. Calculated
values can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities, or output in a
Weight/Center of Gravity summary report.
 Not Required performs no center-of-gravity calculations for dry pipe.
 Calc C of G calculates center-of-gravity for dry pipe.
 Calc C of G with Insulation calculates center-of-gravity for insulated dry pipe.
 Calc C of G with and without Insulation calculates center-of-gravity for dry pipe and
insulated dry pipe.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.CentreOfGravity.ForDryPipe
Wet Pipe Calculations

Controls which center-of-gravity calculations are performed for wet (full) pipe. Calculated
values can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities or output in a
Weight/Center of Gravity summary report.
 Not Required performs no center-of-gravity for wet pipe
 Calc C of G calculates center-of-gravity for wet pipe.
 Calc C of G with Insulation calculates center-of-gravity for insulated wet pipe.
 Calc C of G with and without Insulation calculates center-of-gravity for wet pipe and
insulated wet pipe.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.CentreOfGravity.ForWetPipe

Drawing Manager
Per Pipeline
Controls whether the center-of-gravity and weight calculations are per pipeline or per
drawing/spool.
Select the check box to calculate center-of-gravity and weight per pipeline. To calculate
center-of-gravity and weight per drawing/spool, clear the check box.
You must also select Enabled.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.CentreOfGravity.PerPipeline
Show Insulation Weight

Controls whether insulation weight is calculated. Insulation weight can then be output on the
drawing using text positioning facilities or output to a Weight/CofG summary report.
Select the check box to calculate insulation weight. To suppress the calculation of insulation
weight, clear the check box.
Show Wet Weight

Controls whether wet (full) weight is calculated. Wet weight can then be output on the
drawing using text positioning facilities or in a Weight/CofG summary report.
Select the check box to calculate wet weight. To suppress calculation of wet weight, clear
the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - Supplementary.CentreOfGravity.ShowWetWeight
I-Configure - 82, Pos 2

Drawing Manager
Tolerances
Sets properties for controlling deviations (dimensional and angular), remainders from dimension
calculations, and tolerances.
Difference Limit
Controls how Isogen interprets and acts up small dimensional deviations detected in the
input data file. These deviations can lead to small, unwanted skews being generated on the
isometric drawing. You can use Difference Limit to define a dimensional cut-off value,
whereby Isogen ignores any offset coordinate numerically below this value.
Set to the required dimensional tolerance in millimeters or inches. For example, you can
type 1.0 mm or 0.04 inch. When set to 0, no dimensional offset tolerance is set.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.MinOffset
Angle Limit
Controls how Isogen interprets and acts upon small angular deviations detected in the input
data. These deviations can lead to small, unwanted skews being generated on the isometric
drawing. You can define an angular cut-off value with this property so that any skew that has
an angular deviation below this value is ignored by Isogen and not treated as a skew.
To specify a user-defined angle tolerance, type a value in the range 1-10, such as 0.5 for
0.5-degrees. Type 0 for no angular offset tolerance. This is the default setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - 115
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.MinAngleOffset
PCF Connection Tolerance

Controls the tolerance used when connecting components in IDFGEN.
Set a value in millimeters.
To avoid problems when this property is set as a single value, no tolerance is set
in Option Switch 116, Positions 4-6. IDFGEN continues to use positions 1-3 to determine the
connection tolerance.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.IdfgenConnectionTolerance

Drawing Manager
Add Round Off

Controls the Dimension Round-Off Carry-Over function, which is used to control how
remainders are handled when dimensions are calculated and output on the isometric. At
branch locations or components, this permits the remainder part of a dimension to be
carried over and added to the next dimension, or discarded.
 Normal rounds off dimensions to + or - 1 mm, or 1/16th-inch, and carry over any
reminder to the next dimension.
 Branch Intersect rounds off dimensions to + or - 1 mm or 1/16th-inch with no
carry-over of the remainder beyond a branch intersection.
 Current Component rounds off dimensions to + or - 1 mm or 1/16th-inch with no
carry-over of the remainder beyond current component.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.AddRoundOff
Mitre Weld Text Tolerance

Controls the suppression of mitre weld angle messages on the isometric drawing. When
Isogen encounters a mitre weld in a pipeline, the system outputs a message on the
isometric drawing that indicates the angle together with a standard alternative text.
Set Mitre Weld Text Tolerance to 0 to report all mitre weld angular changes on the
drawing. To suppress change message output, type an angular value in degrees. Isogen
does not report angular changes on the isometric drawing that fall below this value. The
maximum user-specified angular value must be less than 10°.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.MitreWeldAngle

Drawing Manager
Diagnostics
Sets properties related to the type and level of information output in diagnostic type messages.
Diagnostic Level
Controls the amount of information written to the message file.
 Low writes Isogen program version and plot file generation messages to the message
file.
 Medium writes plot and module run messages to the message file.
 High writes plot, module run, and ISOPLOT messages to the message file.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DiagnosticLevel
Set Pipeline Disconnected

Specifies an IDFGEN-generated diagnostic. Select the check box to set the pipeline to
disconnected when an increased tolerance is used to connect the pipeline.
A message is always output if the pipeline does not connect using increased
tolerance.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.SetPipeLineDisconnected
Set Disconnected
Specifies an IDFGEN-generated diagnostic. Select the check box to set the data to
disconnected when an increased tolerance is used to connect components.
 A message is always output if the pipeline does not connect using increased tolerance.
 This property is not available for piping isometric drawings.
Defines:

Drawing Manager
Show Disconnection Message

drawing.
Defines:
Version Information
Defines:
Test Only
Allows test isometrics to be produced for proving isometric output or to resolve drawing
production issues.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TestIso

Drawing Manager
Dates
Controls the output of the date on the drawing and in drawing-related files.
Date Format
Controls the format of the date that is output on the isometric drawing and in the Summary
files.
 None displays no date.
 British displays the date in British format (dd/mm/yy)
 European displays the date in European format (dd/mm/yy).
 American displays the date in American format (mm/dd/yy).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DateFormat
Date Source
Determines the source used to output the date.
 Data File uses the date contained in the pipeline data file.
 System uses the system clock date.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DateSource
Four Digit Year

Controls whether the year portion of the date is output as two or four digits.
Select the check box to output a four-digit year, such as 2009. To output a two-digit year,
such as 09, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.FourDigitYear

Drawing Manager
Centreline Lengths
Calculation Method
Controls how Isogen determines the length of bends and elbows. This property is available
only for piping isometric drawings.
 Calculate the distance around curve of Bends/Elbows calculates the centerline
length using the distance around the radius.
 Calculate the distance to intersection of Bends/Elbows calculates the centerline
length using the distance from the end point to the intersection point.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.CentrelineLengths
Actions
Controls the behavior of PCFGEN and IDFGEN.
Compute Nozzle Axis

Controls how Isogen determines the length of bends and elbows. This property is available
only for piping isometric drawings.
 Calculate the distance around curve of Bends/Elbows calculates the centerline
length using the distance around the radius.
 Calculate the distance to intersection of Bends/Elbows calculates the centerline
length using the distance from the end point to the intersection point.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.CentrelineLengths
If No Item Code
Controls IDFGEN's output of components present in the Piping Component File (PCF) that
have no item code specified.
 Default sets components with no item code to Not On Material List.
 Generate Blank Item Code assigns a blank item code and description and output to
the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.ComponentsWithNoItemCodesInPCF

Drawing Manager
Drawing File
Defines the backing sheet, such as the paper size, margins, template file location, and folder
location of the output file.
The Drawing File style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Sheet Size controls properties that set standard and non-standard paper sizes. For more
information, see Sheet Size (on page 37).
 Drawing Area Size sets properties that control settings for the drawing frame. For more
information, see Drawing Area Size (on page 37).
 Output File sets properties that define isometric drawing output. For more information, see
Output File (on page 39).
Sheet Size
Sets standard and non-standard paper sizes.
Size
Specifies a standard paper size for the isometric drawing. You can select from European
sizes (A0, A1, A2, A3, A4), ANSI sizes (A, B, C, D, E), or Custom.
If you set Size to Custom, then you must also set Custom Height and Custom
Width.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DrawingSize
Custom Height
Sets the height of a non-standard paper size. You must use Custom Height and Custom
Width together. Set both properties to zero or to a suitable value.
For PostScript output, set the paper size using Size
Defines:
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.CustomHeight
Custom Width
Sets the width of a non-standard paper size. You must use Custom Height and Custom
Width together. Set both properties to zero or to a suitable value.
Defines:
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.CustomWidth

Drawing Manager
Drawing Area Size

Sets options for the drawing frame.
Left Margin
Specifies the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of the
drawing frame on the left side of the drawing.
Type 0 for no reserved area, or type the required distance.
Defines:
Option Switch - 10
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.LeftMargin
Top Margin
drawing frame at the top of the drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - 12
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.RightMargin
Right Margin
in the sequence.
continuation.
Defines:
Bottom Margin
drawing frame at the bottom of the drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - 13
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.BottomMargin

Drawing Manager
Reserved Area Drawing

Specifies the distance between the bottom of the drawing area and the outer line of the
drawing frame.
Defines:
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.ReservedAreaDrawing
Reserved Area Top

Specifies the reserved area along the top of the isometric drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.ReservedAreaTop
Reserved Area Mat List

Specifies the distance between the bottom of the material list and the outer line of the
drawing frame.
Defines:
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.ReservedAreaMatList

Drawing Manager
Output File
Defines settings related to isometric drawing output.
Path
Specifies the folder into which drawings are written. Type the full path location for the
required folder. Alternatively, click Browse and navigate to the required file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PlotFilePath
Overwrite
Overwrites and deletes any plot files existing with the same name.
Select the check box to allocate the plot file name using the selected sequence method after
deleting previously generated files. To allocate the next available plot file and generate the
name using the selected sequence method, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.OverwritePlotFile
Append Standard Extension

Adds the file format extension to the name of the backing sheet.
Select the check box to append the plot file output format extension to the I01 type filename
extension on all generated plot files that do not use a user-specified plot file prefix. If you
select Append Standard Extension, you must also select Use I01 Style.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.AppendStandardExts
Use I01 Style

drawing frame at the top of the drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - 12
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.RightMargin

Drawing Manager
Drawings Per File

Controls how and where isometric drawings are output.
 All on same sheet outputs isometric drawings generated during a run to a single plot
file or to a series of plot files, depending upon the File Length setting
 One per file generates an individual plot file for each isometric drawing.
 One per sheet plots each isometric drawing on a separate sheet within a single plot file
per pipeline or per system.
 All in same file plots each isometric drawing on a separate sheet within a single plot file
regardless of the number of individual pipelines in the input file.
The One per sheet and All in the same file settings are valid only for
SmartSketch (.igr) and Shape 2D (.sha) file formats.
Defines:
Option Switch - 31, Pos1
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DrawingsPerFile
Page Length
Controls the number of lines per page on any printed output (reports) generated by Isogen.
Type the required number of lines to be output per page, or type 0 to use the default value
of 55 lines per page.
Defines:
Option Switch - 63
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PrintedOutputPageLen
Postscript Size
Specifies the Postscript plotter size. Select one of the European or ANSI sizes listed below:
European Sizes:
 A0 - 841 x 1189 mm
 A1 - 594 x 841 mm
 A2 - 420 x 594 mm
 A3 - 297 x 420 mm
 A4 - 210 x 297mm

Drawing Manager
ANSI Sizes
 A - 8.5" x 11"
 B - 11" x 17"
 C - 17" x 22"
 D - 22" x 34"
 E - 34" x 44"
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PostScriptSize
File Length
Controls the physical length of the plot file that is generated by Isogen. Setting File Length
is required only when you set Drawings Per File to One per file, and the required plot file
length is different than the default value of 3275mm.
Type the required value for the plot file length in millimeters. The maximum length is limited
to 3350mm. To use the default value (3275mm) for the plot file length, type 0.
Defines:
Option Switch - 1
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PlotFileLength

Drawing Manager
Pre and Post Processors

Controls how pre- and post-processor applications run and interact with Personal Isogen.
The Pre and Post Processors style group contains the options group listed below.
 Settings sets properties that control how pre- and post-processor applications run and
interact with Personal Isogen. For more information, see Settings (on page 43).
Settings
Sets properties that control how pre- and post-processor applications run and interact with
Personal Isogen.
Pre-processor
Specifies the external application to run before Isogen begins processing the input Isogen
data file (IDF) or piping component file (PCF). As such, this file can be used to modify the
IDF or the PCF.
Type the full path location and filename of the required file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.StartProgram
Pre-processor Timeout
Specifies the external application to run before Isogen begins processing the input Isogen
data file (IDF) or piping component file (PCF). As such, this file can be used to modify the
IDF or the PCF.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.StartProgram
POD-processor
Specifies the full path location and filename of the external application to run before Isogen
output is translated to the final drawing output. Specifying the external application allows you
to complete some minor editing of the drawing output.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.PodGraphicsProgram

Drawing Manager
POD-processor Timeout
Specifies the number of seconds that elapse before the external application specified by the
POD-Processor setting is terminated and Isogen begins processing.
Type the required value (integer). The default time is 60 seconds.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.PodGraphicsTimeout
Post-processor
Specifies external application to run after all Isogen processes have finished. You can use
the post-processing file to perform such tasks as checking in the output drawings to a
drawing control system.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.EndProgram
Stop on Error
Controls whether Isogen runs if the pre-processor application experiences an error and fails.
Select the check box to suppress running Isogen if the pre-processor application fails. To
run Isogen even if the pre-processor application fails, clear the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms.StopOnError

Drawing Manager
Input Files
Organizes a collection of properties that define the names and locations of the input data files
Isogen uses. Includes properties for setting the
PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION section of the Data Definition (DDF) file,
heat treatment, and NDE testing data.
The Input Files style group contains the options groups listed below.
Not all of the options groups listed below are available for all isometric drawing types.
The groups that display depend on the type of isometric drawing style that is currently active:
 Summary sets properties that lists the names and locations of the input data files Isogen
uses. For more information, see Summary (on page 45).
 Pipeline Attributes defines properties that set options in the
PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION section of the Data Definition (DDF) file.
For more information, see Pipeline Attributes (on page 46).
 Header Attributes set options in the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION
section of the Data Definition (DDF) file. This style group is specific to cable tray and HVAC
isometric drawings. For more information, see Header Attributes (on page 48).
 Heat Treatment sets properties that set options for heat treatment and NDE testing data.
For more information, see Heat Treatment (on page 48).
Summary
Lists the names and locations of the input data files Isogen uses. For example, Isogen can
calculate weights of components if a data file containing weight information is available. You can
also edit the contents of the input file.
Input Files
Open the grid, and then define the attributes listed below as needed.
 Type specifies the type of input file. Available file types are listed below:
File Type Description
ASCII-SYMBOLS ASCII version of the Isogen symbol file.
BENDING-DATABASE-FILE Bending, cutting and hole information file.
BINARY-SYMBOLS Binary version of the Isogen symbol file.
BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE Bolting information file.
Contains detailed information related to individual

COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE components.
Defines the content and structure of other files that form

FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE part of the Component Information facilities.

Drawing Manager
File Type Description
Contains weights of insulation on a bore / unit length

INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE basis for each Insulation specification.
PROJECT-MATERIAL-DATA System specified.
PROJECT-MATERIAL-MANAGER System specified.
PROJECT-PIPELINE System specified.
REMARKS Remarks data file.
OPTION-SWITCH-LONG
DRAWING-DEFINITION
POSITIONED-TEXT
User alternative control files.
ALTERNATIVE-TEXT
MATERIAL-LIST-DEFINITION
WELDING-DEFINITION
TITLE-BLOCK
SPECIAL-INSTRUMENTS
Contains the specific gravity values for pipeline fluid or

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY gas contents.
 Path defines the full path location and file name of the input file. Click Browse to
navigate to the required file. For a Smart 3D Global Workshare configuration, use the
$SYMBOLSHARE$ macro and type the path that is relative to the SharedContent
folder.
 Content opens a free-form text box in which you can edit the contents of the text file.
Click Browse to open the text editor. Edit the data as needed, and then click OK to
save your changes. To close the text editor without saving your changes, click Cancel.
 For more information about Isogen file types, see Appendix: Isogen Files.
 The value that displays on the Input Files icon is a count of how many data files have
been defined. The example below indicates the three data files are currently defined.

Drawing Manager
Pipeline Attributes
Sets options in the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION section of the Data
Definition (DDF) file.
Enabled
Controls whether the pipeline attributes file is created. To create the file, select the check
box. Clear the check box to suppress creation of the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.PipeLineAtts.Enabled
Path
Specifies the full path location and filename of the pipeline attributes file. Type the full path
location and filename of the file. Alternatively, click Browse and navigate to the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.PipeLineAtts.Path
Data
Defines the data required for the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION in the
Data Definition (DDF) file.
Open the free-form text box, type your data, and then click . The software updates
the active style and displays the text under the Data property label.
The data that you enter is written to the DDF when Enabled is also selected.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.PipeLineAtts.Text

Drawing Manager
Header Attributes
Sets options in the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION section of the Data
Definition (DDF) file.
These options are specific only to cable tray and HVAC isometric drawings and do
not apply to pipeline isometrics.
Enabled
Controls whether the drawing attributes file is created. To create the file, select the check
box. Clear the check box to suppress creation of the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.PipeLineAtts.Enabled
Path
Specifies the full path location and filename of the drawing attributes file. Type the full path
location and filename of the file. Alternatively, click Browse and navigate to the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.PipeLineAtts.Path
Data
Defines the data required for the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION in the
Data Definition (DDF) file.
the active style and displays the text under the Data property label.
The data that you enter is written to the DDF when Enabled is also selected.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.PipeLineAtts.Text

Drawing Manager
Heat Treatment
Sets options for heat treatment and NDE testing data.This options group is available only for
piping isometric drawings.
Enabled
Controls the creation of the heat treatment/NDE file. To create the file, select the checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.HeatTreatment.Enabled
Path
Specifies the name and location of the heat treatment/NDE file. Type the full path location
and filename of the file. Alternatively, click Browse and navigate to the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.HeatTreatment.Path
Data
Defines the data required for heat treatment/NDE testing.
Open the free-form text box, type your data, and then click . The software displays
the text under the Data property label.
The data that you type data written to the DDF when Enabled is selected.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.HeatTreatment.Text

Drawing Manager
Reports
Controls the format and content of the report files generated by Isogen. There are many different
reports that Isogen can output when generating an isometric drawing. Some of the most
common Isogen reports are the material control file, the cut list summary file, the spool
information file, and the weld summary file.
You configure output reports using the Report Definition panel. For more information about the
Report Definition view, see the Isogen Configuration User's Guide. You can access this
document using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Report Types
Lists the reports that Isogen can output during isometric drawing generation process.
To select a report, double-click the report name. Alternatively, click Add Attribute . The
Report Definition window opens and displays the options listed below so that you can
configure the report as needed. For detailed information about configuring reports, see Specify
the report output location and Define the report layout in the Isogen Configuration User's Guide,
available with the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
File Formatting
Provides a collection of properties that define the report file format. File formatting properties
that are available for each report type are listed under Common Properties. Report-specific
properties are listed under the respective report type heading.
Common File Format Properties

Format
Defines format of the output file.
 Delimited outputs a delimited file uses the character specified by the Delimiter setting.
 Fixed outputs a fixed format file.
Delimiter
Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited. Acceptable
characters are listed below:
 Blank
 Comma ( , )
 Semi-colon ( ; )
 Colon ( : )

Drawing Manager
Bending File
Report Creation
Defines whether the file is opened in appended mode or overwrite mode.
 Append to report appends the file.
 Overwrite report overwrites the file.
Content
Determines the information included in the bending report.
 Standard includes pipe fabrication information, including details of each cut piece. List
the length, diameter, end preparation, material part number, and other related details to
assist manufacturing. Also output angle and radius details, and give distances to and
between bends.
 Full includes the same pipe fabrication information as with Standard and also include
details to enable profiling the shaped ends of pipe and cutting holes for tees, olets, and
crosses.
Cut list
Report Creation
User Defined
Specifies whether the software uses the user-specified properties to control the data that is
output to the cut list summary file or uses the standard cut list file. Select the check box to
use the user-specifies properties. To create a standard cut list summary file, clear the check
box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.SummaryFile.UserDefined
Material control
User Defined
Specifies whether the software creates a standard material control file or uses the
user-specified properties to control the data that is output to file. Select the check box to
create the material file using the user-defined properties. To create a standard material
control file, clear the check box.
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the
MLD file.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SummaryFile.UserDefined

Drawing Manager
Report Creation
Individual Entries
Controls whether individual entries are output to the material control file when material
accumulation is used on the material list. This allows components with different attributes to
be listed correctly but avoids non-accumulation of materials that can often create overflow
drawings. Select the check box to output individual entries to the material control file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.SummaryFile.IndividualEntries
Include Bolts
Specifies whether bolts are included in the summary file. Select the check box to include
bolts in the material control file. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SummaryFile.IncludeBolts
Header Output
Controls the output of material headings.
 Pipeline outputs headings for each pipeline.
 Drawing outputs headings for each drawing.
 Single outputs a single output of the headings.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SummaryFile.MaterialHeadings
Unique Delimiter
Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited. Acceptable
characters are listed below:
 Blank
 Comma ( , )
 Semi-colon ( ; )
 Colon ( : )
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.SummaryFile.UniqueDelimiter

Drawing Manager
Neutral report
Report Creation
 Overwrite report overwrites the file. This is the default setting.
Output Cut Pieces
Controls whether output components are grouped by cut piece. Select the check box to
output components to the report file by cut piece. This is the default setting. To suppress this
grouping so that each component has its own entry in the report file, clear the check box.
An example is the component grouping Pipe-Pulled Bend-Pipe. Because these
three components form a single cut piece, only one entry is written to the Neutral report file if
Output Cut Pieces is selected. If Output Cut Pieces is not selected, three entries are
written to the report file: one for each component.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.OutputCutPieces
Group By
Specifies how components are grouped in the Neutral report file.
 Pipeline groups component output on a per pipeline basis.
 Sheet groups component output on a per sheet basis.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.GroupBy
Record Length
Defines the length of each record. This property is available only when Format is set to
Fixed. Type a number in range 1-9999 that specifies the number of characters to pad or
truncate. If you type 0, trailing white space is trimmed from each record.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.RecordLength
Printed material list

Count
Displays the number of attributes to be output in the printed material list summary file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.PrintedMaterialList.Count

Drawing Manager
Repeatability return
Reorder Bypass
Controls by-pass component re-ordering. Select the checkbox to re-order components at
by-pass closure points.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.ByPass
Component Information
Controls if and how component information is written to the repeatability return file.
 Off suppresses writing component information to the repeatability return file.
 With Numeric writes numeric component information to the file
 With Alphabetic writes full alphanumeric component information to the file (4 character
maximum).
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.ComponentInfo
Content
Controls the type of repeatability return file output.
 Standard outputs only of only successfully processed pipelines. This is the default
setting for a standard repeatability return file type (FOR052).
 Original outputs the original repeat information.
 Revised outputs the original repeat information and new records for spool information.
 Original ASCII outputs an ASCII version of the original repeat information.
 Revised ASCII outputs an ASCII version of the original repeat information.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.Content
Part Numbers
Controls whether material list part number information is written to the repeatability return
file. Select the checkbox to write material list part number information to the repeatability
return file.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.MatList

Drawing Manager
Split Points
Controls whether split points are written to the repeatability return file. Select the checkbox
to write split point information.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.SplitPoints
Spool Identifier
Controls whether spool identifier information is written to the repeatability return file.
 Off suppresses writing any spool identifier information to the file.
 Numeric writes spool identifier to the file.
 Alphabetic writes full alphanumeric spool identifier information to the file (4 character
maximum).
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementarty.RepeatFile.SpoolID
Start Point
Controls whether the start point for data extraction is written to the repeatability return file.
Select the checkbox to write the data extraction start point.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.StartPoint
Weld Numbers
Controls whether weld number information is written to the repeatability return file. Select
the checkbox to write the information to the file.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.RepeatFile.WeldNos
Site assembly
Report Creation
Spool information
Report Creation

Drawing Manager
Traceability
Unique Part Number
Controls whether unique part numbers are used. Also defines the type of suffix used for
unique part numbers.
 Alpha - Use an alphabetic suffix.
 Numeric - Use a numeric suffix.
 Off - Turn off all unique part number facilities.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniquePartNumber
Part Number Suffix
Controls sequencing of the identifier suffix used for part numbering on the isometric drawing.
 Continuous generates unique part number suffixes as a continuous sequence across
all output drawings. For example, 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.7 to 6.11 on Drg 2 of 2.
 Per Drawing generates part number suffixes with a new sequence for each drawing.
For example, 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.1 to 6.5 on Drg 2 of 2.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.IdentifierSuffix
Show
Controls whether the unique part numbers table is plotted. To plot the table, select the
checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.PlotUniquePtNoTable
Continuous Down
Controls the direction of the unique part numbers table. Select the checkbox to set the table
direction so that it is down. To set the table direction so it is down, clear the checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.ContinuousDown
Start X
Defines the starting X position of the list in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.StartX

Drawing Manager
Start Y
Defines the starting Y position of the list in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.StartY
Vertical Spacing
Sets the vertical spacing between each horizontal line in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.VerticalSpacing
Text Height
Sets the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.TextHeight
Maximum Entries
Controls the maximum number of entries before an overflow drawing is created if you have
selected the Overflow checkbox.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.MaxEntries
Overflow
Controls whether an overflow drawing is created when the Maximum Entries setting is
exceeded. Select the checkbox to create an overflow drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.TableOverflow
Layer
Sets the drawing layer for the unique part number table. Type the required value in the
range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.DrawingLayer

Drawing Manager
Unique Bolt Numbers

Controls the output of unique part numbers on bolts.
 Yes outputs unique part numbers on bolts.
 No suppresses the output.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniqueNosBolts
Unique Gasket Numbers
Controls output of unique part numbers on gaskets.
 Yes outputs unique part numbers on gaskets.
 No suppresses the output.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniqueNosGaskets
Weight / Centre of gravity summary

Report Creation
Weld summary
Report Creation

Drawing Manager
Output Rules
Controls what is output to the Neutral report file.
Output Rules only displays in the Reports panel when the Neutral report tab is
active in the Report Definition panel.
Default
Controls the output of components in the report file.
 Include outputs all components to the report file. This is the default setting.
 Exclude suppresses the output of all components.
 This property implies all components. However, you can use the individual component
type setting to override Default. The table below illustrates the relationship between the
Default setting and the settings of the individual component types.
Property Setting Report File Output
Default Include Output all components
Default Include
Output all components except bolts.
Bolts Exclude
Default Exclude
Suppress output of all components except flanges.
Flanges Include
 Penetration plates and pseudo-components, such as set-on tees and taps, are not
output to the Neutral report file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Default
Bolts
Controls the output of bolt components in the Neutral report file.
 Include outputs bolt components to the report file. This is the default setting.
 Exclude suppresses the output of bolt components.
 Inherit uses the setting defined in Default.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Bolts

Drawing Manager
Fittings
Controls the output of fitting in the Neutral report file.
 Include outputs fittings to the report file. This is the default setting.
 Exclude suppresses the output of fittings.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Fittings
Flanges
Controls the output of flange components in the Neutral report file.
 Include outputs flange components to the report file. This is the default setting.
 Exclude suppresses the output of flange components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Flange
Gaskets
Controls the output of gasket components in the Neutral report file.
 Include outputs gasket components to the report file. This is the default setting.
 Exclude suppresses the output of gasket components.
Defines:
Option Switch -N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Gasket
Instruments
Controls the output of instrument components in the report file.
 Include outputs instrument components to the report file. This is the default setting.
 Exclude suppresses the output of instrument components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Instrument

Drawing Manager
Miscellaneous
Controls the output of miscellaneous components in the Neutral report file.
 Include outputs miscellaneous components to the report file. This is the default setting.
 Exclude suppresses the output of miscellaneous components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Miscellaneous
Pipe
Controls the output of pipe components in the Neutral report file.
 Include outputs pipe components to the report file. This is the default setting.
 Exclude suppresses the output of pipe components.
Defines:
Option Switch -N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Pipe
Supports
Controls the output of support components in the Neutral report file.
 Include outputs support components to the report file. This is the default setting.
 Exclude suppresses the output of support components.
Defines:
Option Switch -N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Support
Valves
Controls the output of valve components in the Neutral report file.
 Include outputs valve components to the report file. This is the default setting.
 Exclude suppresses the output of valve components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.NeutralFile.Output.Valve

Drawing Manager
Welds
Controls the accumulation of welds.
 Normal accumulates welds normally.
 None suppresses the accumulation of welds but lists each one separately in the
material list.
 Suppress suppresses the accumulation of welds in the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.WeldAccumulation

Drawing Manager
POD Attributes
Lists the attributes available for piping object data (POD) files. To add an attribute to a report,
double-click its name in the list, or click Add Attribute . Use the options in the Report
Definition panel to define the attribute for the Neutral file report. For more information, see
Define the report layout.
POD Attributes only displays in the Reports panel when the Neutral report tab is
active in the Report Definition panel.
Attribute Name Description
Major-Revision Document revision (Major).
Minor-Revision Document revision (Minor)
Name Name of the piping object data (POD) file.
Direction on the drawing that represents North defined as top

North-Arrow
left, top right, bottom left, or bottom right.
Primary-Spec Primary specification for the POD file.
Revision-Scheme Document revision scheme.
System-Isometric-
Name of the drawing generated from a system POD.
Reference

Drawing Manager
Pipeline Attributes
Lists the attributes available for the pipeline.
Double-click an attribute name to add it to the Report Layout area. Alternatively, click Add
Attribute . Then use the options in the Report Definition panel to configure the report as
needed. For more information, see Define the report layout.
Not all of the pipeline attributes listed in the table below are permissible for all
report types. As such, the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel
determines which pipeline attributes appear in the attributes list.
To make a report active, select the report type tab in the Report Definition panel.
-7 Record identifier for spool prefix/number.
User-specified general purpose pipeline attribute that can be

ATTRIBUTE0 to
ATTRIBUTE199 output in reports or plotted on drawings. Up to 200 attributes
can be defined and can be used for any purpose.
BATCH Section of the plant or project.
Section of the plant or project. Batch and Area can be used

Batch/Area
interchangeably.
User-specified string used to identify/track/control each

Client-Drawing-Identifier individual drawing without using the usual pipeline reference
or sheet number identification. Typically, this attribute is
output on spool isometric drawings.
Date Date associated with the pipeline.
DRG Sheet number of the isometric drawing.
Insulation Specification Default insulation specification.
Default piping specification for the components in the

Jacket-Spec
pipeline that form part of the jacket.
User-specified specification references that can hold

Misc-Spec1 to
additional, arbitrary data. Up to 5 miscellaneous
Misc-Spec5
specification references can be defined.
Name User-specified identifier for the pipeline.
Nominal Class Pipeline design class.
Nominal-Rating Pressure rating of the pipeline.

Drawing Manager
Painting Specification Default painting specification.
Piping Specification Primary specification to which the pipeline belongs.
Pipeline Reference Line reference or ID of the pipeline.
Pipeline Temp Pipeline operating temperature.
Pipeline-Type Type of pipeline construction.
Pipeline-Drawing- User-specified text string used to identify/track/control each

Sequence individual drawing without using the pipeline reference.
Project Identifier Project number or name.
Revision Number Revision identifier for the pipeline.
Specific-Gravity Specific gravity of the pipeline contents.
Spool-Naming-Rule Text string that specifies the spool prefix, type of identifier
(alpha or numeric), and the length of the spool identifier.
Spool-Prefix String used when creating spool identifiers.
Support-Weld-Prefix-
Erection Prefix used to identify erection pipe support welds.
Fabrication Prefix used to identify fabrication pipe support welds.
Offshore Prefix used to identify offshore pipe support welds.
Tracing Specification Default tracing specification reference.
Weld-Prefix-Erection Prefix used to identify all erection welds.
Weld-Prefix- Fabrication Prefix used to identify all fabrication welds.
String that Isogen uses to override the default weld number

Weld-Prefix-General
prefix for the pipeline.
Weld-Prefix-Offshore Prefix used to identify all offshore welds.

Drawing Manager
Component Attributes
Lists the attributes available to all components.
Not all of the component attributes listed below are permissible for all report
types. As such, the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel determines
which component attributes appear in the attributes list.
Value of the angle in hundredths of degrees for elbow, bend,

Angle
tee, cross, bend-teed, and elbow-teed type components.
Assembly-ID Bolt assembly identifier.
Indicator for whether the software automatically assigns and

Auto Generated
creates bolt sets.
Bend-Radius Allowable radius of a standard pulled bend.
Bend-Radius-Multiplier NPD multiplier used to define the bend radius.
Bolt-Dia Units of dimensions (in or mm) used for bolt diameter.
Bolt-Item-Code Unique identifier for the bolt component.
Bolt-Item-Description Material description for bolts with the same item code.
Bolt-Length Units of dimensions (in or mm) used for bolt length.
Bottom of pipe elevation. Overrides the standard elevation

BOP-Elevation
output for tees, crosses, and elbows.
Characteristic Bore Commonly written description of the bore, such as 25x25mm.
COMPONENT-Attribute1
User-specified component attribute. Up to 100 attributes can be
to
COMPONENT-Attribute100 defined and can be used for any purpose.
Associates a text remark with a component. The remark

information appears on the material list in two areas:
Component-Remark-
A cross-reference number against the component.
Number
In list of remarks output at the bottom of the material list with a
cross-reference against each remark.

Drawing Manager
Coords-X X coordinate.
Coords-Y Y coordinate.
Coords-Z Z coordinate.
Co-ords-On Internal piping object data (POD) file field.
Explicitly defined value used by Isogen to calculate weld

Cost-Factor
diameter totals.
Value for the required cut piece length of the pipe or bend.
Cut-Piece-Length
Overrides Isogen's normal cut piece length calculation.
Dial-Face-Direction Direction of face on instrument dials and balloons.
Equipment Centre Point Coordinate at the X position related to the center or intersection
X of the component.
Equipment Centre Point Coordinate at the Y position related to the center or intersection
Y of the component.
Equipment Centre Point Coordinate at the Z position related to the center or intersection
Z of the component.
Equipment Non Primary

Direction of the equipment.
Orientation
Equipment Shape Shape of the equipment to be output.
Equipment Shape 2 Shape to be plotted at the exit end of a piece of equipment.
Size of the rectangular-shaped equipment (cross-section at the

Equipment Size X
X position).

Equipment Size Y
Y position).

Equipment Size Z
Z position).
External UCI System-generated unique component identifier.
Trigger that indicates the flange is to be left loose for fitting at

Flange-Left-Loose
site.

Drawing Manager
Negative cutting allowance for flange types with SKEYs such

Flange-Cut-Minus as FLRC, FLRE, FLSO, and FOSO. Allowance is used when
calculating cut pipe length.
Positive cutting allowance for flange types with SKEYs such as

Flange-Cut-Plus FLFL or FLSJ. Allowance is used when calculating cut pipe
length.
Flat-Direction Direction of flat side of eccentric reducer.
Concise summary of the properties for the currently select

FlyText
object.
Design class for special transition gasket used on fixed length

Gasket-Class
type line pipe.
Gasket-Rating Pressure rating for special transition gasket used on fixed

length type line pipe.
Gearbox Gearbox orientation direction.
Indicator for whether the pipe is ignored. That is, the

Ignored Tube component is neither considered in the computation of system
dimensions nor is it displayed on the isometric drawing.
Insulation Trigger that indicates the component is or is not insulated.
Insulation Insulation specification. Indicates a specification change on the

Specification plotted isometric.
Item Code Unique material identifier for the component.
Item-Description Material description for components with the same item code.
Item-Group Component group.
Length Leg length.
Indicator for whether the component is part of a jacketed

Jacket
system.
Jacket-Spec Jacket specification reference.
Indicator for how the pipe or component is handled on the

Material-List
material list on the generated drawing (include or exclude).

Drawing Manager
Misc-Spec1 to Alternative user-defined specification. Indicates a specification

Misc-Spec5 change on the plotted isometric.
Name or Tag User-defined identifier for a component.
Nozzle Coordinates X Coordinate at the X position of the nozzle.
Nozzle Coordinates Y Coordinate at the Y position of the nozzle.
Nozzle Coordinates Z Coordinate at the Z position of the nozzle.
Nozzle Diameter Units of dimensions used for the nozzle.
Nozzle Direction Direction of the nozzle.
Nozzle End Prep End preparation for the nozzle.
Nozzle Non Primary

Direction of the nozzle.
Direction
Nozzle Position Relative position of the nozzle in relation to the equipment.
Orifice Tap Direction Direction of tapping connection on orifice plate.
Painting specification reference. Indicates a specification

Painting Specification
change on the plotted isometric.
Alternative part number used by Isogen instead of its

Part Number
automatically generated one.
Piping Specification Primary specification to which the component belongs.
Plant String that identifies a specific area of the plant.
Plant-Area Plant Area identification number.
Plate-Direction Orientation of the penetration plate.
Plate-Thickness Thickness of the penetration plate.
Port-Reference1 to
Port reference number for a multi-port component.
Port-Reference10
Quantity Number of items to be associated.
Revision Pipeline revision at which the component was introduced.

Drawing Manager
Rotation-Angle Angle of rotation in degrees clockwise.
Sequence Number Internal POD field.
SHEET Sheet number.
Size1 Size of the main pipe.
Size1 Units Units of dimension for the size of the main pipe.
Size2 Size of the branch pipe.
Size2 Units Units of dimension for the size of the branch pipe.
Size3 Size of the tertiary bore.
Size3 Units Units of dimension for the tertiary bore.
Slip-Plate-Tail-
Direction of tail on slip plate, slip ring, or spectacle blind.
Direction
Spindle-Direction Direction of spindle (operator) on a valve.
Trigger to indicate that a component is part of a special status,

Status
such as ON HOLD or EXISTING, section on a pipeline.
Support-Direction Direction of user-defined support symbol.
Indicator for whether the component displays in the material

Suppress-Item-Code
list.
Tap-Point Internal POD field.
Attribute in the welding definition file (WDF) to extract the data

Thickness/Rating value from the THICKNESS-RATING attribute on a WELD
record.
Tracing Trigger that indicates whether a component is traced.
Alternative tracing specification. Indicates a specification

Tracing Specification
change on the plotted isometric.
Unique-Component- Unique database identifier generated by the host system for

Identifier each component.
Basic wastage factor applied when the software calculates pipe

Waste
lengths.

Drawing Manager
Weight on fabricated tees and crosses with unequal branch

Weight1 / Weight2 bores. Weight1 is for BRANCH1 pipe, and Weight2 is for
BRANCH2 pipe.
Weld-Attribute1 to User-specified weld attribute. Up to 100 attributes can be

Weld-Attribute100 defined and used for any purpose.
Weld-Gap Space between male welded ends of a welded joint.
System-generated number for welds that do not have weld

Weld Number
numbers defined in the input data file (PCF or IDF).
Associates a text remark with a particular weld. The remark

information appears on the isometric drawing two areas:
A cross-reference number against the weld identifier in the
Weld-Remark-Number
weld box.
In a list of remarks that is output at the bottom of the material
list with a cross-reference number against each remark.
Weld-Spec Weld specification reference.
Text identifier on a weld, as distinct from the weld SKEY or

Weld-Type
from implied end type.
Denotes from which ends of the pipe have any associated field
Welding-Allowance
fit weld (FFW) allowances taken.
Window-Direction Direction of window on sight glass.

Drawing Manager
Material Attributes
Lists the material attributes available for the pipeline.
Not all of the material attributes listed below are permissible for all report types.
As such, the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel determines which
pipeline attributes appear in the attributes list.
-80 to User-specified material attribute. Corresponds to the IDF record

-89 number.
-1400 to User-specified additional material/item attribute. Corresponds to

-1489 the IDF record number.
Bolt-Dia Units of dimensions (in or mm) used for bolt diameter.
Bolt-Length Units of dimensions (in or mm) used for bolt length.
CharacteristicBore Commonly written description of the bore, such as 25x25mm.
ComponentType Type of component.
ConfigurationAsString Human-readable string of the material configuration.
Item description. The Description can include information such

Descriptions
as component type, material, or geometric standard.
Geometric-Standard Industry standard, such as DIN or ANSI.
Group Component group, such as pipe, flange, valve, and so forth.
Item-Group Collection of related components.
Identifier for the component that uniquely defines its bore and
Item Code
dimension.
MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to User-specified material attribute. Up to 100 attributes can be

MATERIAL-ATTRIBTE100 used for any purpose.
MaterialOf
Material type, such as carbon-steel or iron.
Construction

Drawing Manager
MATERIAL-OF-
CONSTRUCTION Material type, such as carbon-steel or iron.
OUTSIDE-DIAMETER /
OUTSIDE-DIAMETER2 Outside diameter on the pipe.
Rating Maximum pressure allowed for the pipe.
RATING / RATING2 Maximum pressure allowed for the pipe
SCHEDULE / SCHEDULE 2 Pipe schedule code.
Size1 Size of the main pipe.
Size1Units Units of dimension for the size of the main pipe.
Size2 Size of the branch pipe.
Size2Units Units of dimension for the size of the branch pipe.
Size3 Size of the tertiary bore.
Size3Units Units of dimension for the tertiary bore.
SKEY Valid Isogen symbol key for the component.
Standard Industry standard, such as DIN or ANSI.
Wafter component (XW) between two flanges or two

WAFER
flanges/gaskets.
WAFER-QUANTITY Amount of wafer component.
WALL-THICKNESS /
Pipe wall thickness.
WALL-THICKNESS2
Weight Component weight.

Drawing Manager
Weld Attributes
Lists the attributes available for welds.
Not all of the weld attributes listed below are permissible for all report types. As
such, the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel determines which pipeline
attributes appear in the attributes list.
Weld-Attribute1 to User-specified weld attribute. Up to 100 attributes can be

Weld-Attribute-100 defined and used for any purpose.
Weld Specification The weld specification reference.

Drawing Manager
Spool Attributes
Lists the attributes available for spools.
Not all of the spool attributes listed below are permissible for all report types.
As such, the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel determines which
pipeline attributes appear in the attributes list.
Spool-Attribute1 to A user-specified spool attributes. Up to 200 attributes can be

Spool-Attribute10 defined and can be used for any purpose.
A number used to identify, track, or control each individual

Spool-Drawing-Number drawing without using the pipeline reference or spool number
identification. Only used on spool isometrics.
SPOOL-ID A unique identifier for the spool.

Drawing Manager
Miscellaneous Attributes
Lists the attributes that are available to report the specialized information related to some
component types.
Not all of the attributes listed below are permissible for all report types. As
such, the report that is currently active in the Report Definition panel determines which pipeline
attributes appear in the attributes list.
Allowance Cut-piece allowance for the end of the pipe where it is placed.
Value of the angle in hundredths of degrees. Angle data is

Angle reported for components such as elbow, bend, olet, tee, cross,
bend-teed, and elbow-teed type components.
Location where the component is assembled with other

components to form a spool or pipeline.
Erection - Defines the component to be placed or constructed
in the field. An erection component also creates a spool break.
Category
Fabrication - Defines the component to be fabricated in a
workshop.
Offshore - Defines the component to be placed or constructed
in the field as part of an offshore operation.
Centre Of Gravity X Calculated center of gravity at the X position.
Centre Of Gravity Y Calculated center of gravity at the Y position.
Centre Of Gravity Z Calculated center of gravity at the Z position.
Length of the pipeline as derived by the pipe and component

Centreline Length coordinates. Used in reports and can be output in a table on the
isometric drawing on a per bore basis.
Connection reference of the of the connected pipeline or

Connection Reference
equipment item.
Cut Piece Length Cut piece length of the pipe or bend.
Cross-reference to the cut length identifier that appears along a

section of plotted pipe on the isometric drawing to a table on the
CUT-PIECE-NO
drawing or a report. This cross-reference can be to a table on
the drawing or in a report.

Drawing Manager
DELIMITER-CHARACTER Special character used as the delimiter.
Enclosure Type of enclosure output on the isometric drawing.
END-PREPARATION-1 End preparation description, such as bevel, screwed, mitred,

END-PREPARATION-2 butt weld, and so on, used with additional material.
Work content erection factor that can be output to the spool

Factor Diameter
information file.
String that Isogen uses to override the default weld number

GENERAL-WELD-PREFIX
prefix for the pipeline.
Component type group, such as pipe, flange, valve, and so

GROUP
forth.
HAND
Highest ID Highest identifier generated on the previous run of the pipeline.
Highest Number Highest number generated on the previous run of the pipeline.
Highest Offshore Highest offshore number generated on the previous run of the
Number pipeline.
INFORMATION Attribute
1 to User-defined information attribute. Up to 100 attributes can be
INFORMATION Attribute used for any purpose.
100
LineStyle User-specified line style number.
Number of placement points (Thickness Measurement

Measurement Points
Location).
Measurement Type Type of measurement (Thickness Measurement Location).
Message Text Relevant information related to the error/warning message.
N.S. Main bore of the component.
N.S. (OUTPUT-UNITS) Output units for the component bore.
N.S.SEC. Secondary bore of the component.
Indicator to always output the secondary nominal size in the

N.S.SEC.(MANDATORY)
material control file.

Drawing Manager
Indicator to output the secondary nominal size only on multi-leg

N.S.SEC.(OPTIONAL)
components.
N.S.THIRD Third bore of the component.
NUMBER-OF-DRGS Number of drawings contained in the plot file.
NUMBER-OF-SPOOLS Number of spools contains in the plot file.
Part number used by Isogen instead of its automatically

Part Number
generated one.
PIPELINE-DATA-
File name of the input data file.
FILENAME
PLOTFILE-DATE Date the plot file was generated by Isogen.
PLOTFILE-NAME Name of the Isogen-generated plot file.
PT-NO Item part number.
QTY Number items to be associated.
Coordinates that give the direction of the centerline of the

Referenced Item
referenced item. Mainly used for skewed items.
Referenced Item
Primary direction of the referenced item.
Direction
User-specified comment containing special requirements.

Remark
Output to the remarks file and plotted on the isometric drawing.
REVISION-IDENTIFIER Revision of the item.
SERVICE/COMMODITY
Sheet Number Number of the drawing sheet.
SKEY Isogen symbol key for the component.
SPECIFIC-WELD-PREFIX
Spool Attribute 1 to User-defined spool attribute. Up to 10 attributes can be used for

Spool Attribute 10 any purpose.
Text string used to identify/track/control each individual drawing.

Spool Drawing Number
Output only on a spool isometric drawing.

Drawing Manager
Spool Identifier Spool identification number.
SPOOL-CL-LENGTH Value of the spool centerline length.
True length of the spool, including any branches. Calculated

length includes all flanges, fittings and pipe, including the true
SPOOL-CL-LENGTH/N.S.
length around bends. Output values are given to the nearest
1/10th foot or meter.
SPOOL-CL-N.S.
SPOOL-COFG Value of the center of gravity calculation for the spool.
SPOOL-FACTOR-DIA/FT Spool erection factor output in imperial units.
SPOOL-FACTOR-DIA/MT Spool erection factor output in mixed or metric units.
SPOOL-NUMBER Number of the pipe spool.
Calculated surface area of the pipe spool. Based on the pipe

SPOOL-SURFACE-AREA
O/D and the accumulated length of the spool being processed.
SPOOL-WEIGHT Total weight of the pipe spool.
Summation of weld diameter in inches multiplied by quantity for

SPOOL-WELDS/DIA/INCH
each spool.
Summation of weld diameter in meters multiplied by quantity for

SPOOL-WELDS-DIA/MM
each spool.
Style Representation of output units (DECIMAL or INCH).
Calculated surface area of the pipeline. Calculation is based on

Surface Area the actual pipe O/D and the accumulated length of the pipeline.
Assists in determining paint quantity, costs, and so on.
TAG User-specified identifier that identifies the component.
Type of Dimension Dimension type.
Thickness/Rating Thickness of the weld.
Additional part number information output in the material list

UNIQUE-PT-NO-LIST definition (MLD) file. Supplements or replaces the existing
PT-NO field.

Drawing Manager
Additional part number information output in the material list

UNIQUE-PT-NO-SUFFIX-
definition (MLD) file. Supplements or replaces the existing
LIST
PT-NO field.
Weight Weight of the component or the weight per unit length of pipe.
Text identifier on a weld, as distinct from the weld SKEY or from

Weld Type
implied end type.
WELD-CAT Weld category, such as fabrication, shop, or offshore.
Weld Diameter Units of dimensions (in or mm) used for weld diameter.
Pipe weld diameters or pipe weld cost factors on the isometric

WELD-DIAMETERS-PIPE
drawing.
WELD-DIAMETERS-SUPPOR Support weld diameters or support weld cost factors on the

T isometric drawing.
WELD-LOCATION Trigger to allow the location of each weld on the pipeline to be

shown on any generated list.
WELD-NO Number of the weld.
Weld Number 1 to
Weld Number 9 User-defined weld number. Up to 10 numbers can be defined.
WELD-REM Text remark associated with a particular weld.

Drawing Manager
Alternative Texts
Where applicable, each AText description includes its respective default value. If a default value
is not specified, the AText is normally left blank.
For each AText, three options are available:
 <Default> - Use the default AText value.
 <Suppress> - Suppress the AText value.
 <Edit value> - Modify the AText value with the user-specified entry.
The preview graphics shown below illustrate the default AText setting.
Nozzle Label
Indicates the nozzle name attached to items of equipment. The default value is NOZZLE?.
AText ID: -440
? Value: Yes
$ Supported: Yes
Equipment Location Label

Indicates equipment location. The default value is EQUIPMENT$LOCATION.
AText ID: -441
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

SECTION 3
Drawing Area
Sets properties that define isometric drawing objects, such as components, enclosures, and
detail sketches.
 The Piping Components and Piping Features style groups are available only for piping
isometric drawings. Likewise, the cable tray and HVAC style groups (Cable Tray
Components, Cable Tray Features, Duct Components, and Duct Features) are available
only when a cable tray or HVAC isometric drawing style, such as Iso_CableTray or
Iso_HVAC, is active.
 In this version of the software, cable tray and HVAC isometric drawing options are limited to
beta access. As such, isometric options specific to cable tray and HVAC drawings are not
visible in Isogen Configuration by default. To turn on cable tray and HVAC options so that
you have access to the full array of isometric drawing settings provided by the software,
The Drawing Area category includes the style groups listed below. Every style group is further
broken down into options groups, with each options group containing a collection of associated
isometric drawing properties.
 Piping Components organizes options groups that control the output and format of pipe
and other isometric drawing objects, including supports, flanges, elbows, and so forth. For
more information, see Piping Components (on page 83).
 Piping Features organizes options groups that define piping features, such as branches,
assemblies, nozzles, and taps. For more information, see Piping Features (on page 114).
 Cable Tray Components organizes options groups that control the output and format of
cable trays and other isometric objects, including supports, elbows, and so forth. For more
information, see Cable Tray Components (on page 132).
 Cable Tray Features organizes options groups that define cable tray features, such as
branches and taps. For more information, see Cable Tray Features (on page 141).
 Duct Components organizes options groups that control the output and format of duct work
and other isometric drawing objects, including supports, flanges, elbows, and so forth. For
more information, see Duct Components (on page 150).
 Duct Features organizes options groups that define duct features, such as branches, taps,
and nozzles. For more information, see Duct Features (on page 162).
 Enclosures organizes options groups that control the output and format of enclosures for
drawing objects. For more information, see Enclosures (on page 172).
 Graphics organizes options groups that define how to represent pipeline components on
the isometric drawing. Properties are also available that define the layer names and the
colors assigned to layer numbers. For more information, see Graphics (on page 195).
 Content organizes options groups that control what is shown on the isometric drawing, such
as the north arrow, continuation messages, and insulation indicators. For more information,
see Content (on page 206).

Drawing Area
 Detail Sketches organizes options groups that define the characteristics of detail sketches
on the isometric drawing. Properties are also available for local details sketches and
information notes. For more information, see Detail Sketches (on page 228).
 Revision Clouds organizes options groups that control the output of revision changes on
the isometric drawing. For more information see Revision Clouds (on page 238).
 Text organizes options groups that control all aspects of the fonts that appear on the
isometric drawing. For more information, see Text (on page 242).

Drawing Area
Piping Components
Controls the output and format of isometric drawing objects, including pipe, supports, flanges,
elbows, and so forth.
The Piping Components style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Pipe defines settings for the output and format of pipe on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Pipe (on page 85).
 Valves defines settings for instruments that are outputs on the isometric drawing For more
information, see Valves (on page 86).
 Instruments defines settings for instruments that are output on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Instruments (on page 87).
 Supports defines settings for supports that are output on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Supports (on page 89).
 Bends defines settings for bends that are output on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Bends (on page 91).
 Elbows defines settings for elbows that are output on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Elbows (on page 93).
 Flanges defines settings for flanges that are output on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Flanges (on page 95).
 Gaskets defines settings for gaskets that are output on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Gaskets (on page 96).
 Multi-Port defines settings for multi-port components that are output on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Multi-Port (on page 97).
 Alternative Texts sets AText values related to the output and format of isometric drawing
objects. For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 98).

Drawing Area
Pipe
Defines settings for pipe on the isometric drawing. For example, you can show insulation or heat
tracing is plotted on the drawing.
Drawing Splitting in Pipe

Controls the actions taken by the software whenever the Isogen automatic pipeline split
facility selects a split point that is located in a straight length of pipe.
 Normal uses the default for pipeline splitting to function as normal when the split point
occurs along a section of pipe. The relevant split point information is passed back to the
3D design system using the isometric repeatability file, if it is being used.
 Reject writes the warning message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, to the message file
if a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe. No plots are produced and no
information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.
 Message writes the warning message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, to the message
file if a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe. Plots are produced with the
message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT plotted at the top of each affected drawing.
No information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipelineSplittingInTube
Insulation Style
Specifies whether to show insulation alongside pipe only or alongside pipe and components.
Click Show to display a gallery of shapes, and then select the appropriate setting.
 None suppresses insulation indication.
 Alongside Pipe plots dashed insulation lines alongside pipe only, with a gap of 1 mm.
 Alongside Pipe and Components plots dashed insulation lines alongside pipe and all
components, both with a 1 mm gap.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.InsulationStyle

Drawing Area
Tracing Style
Specifies where heat tracing is shown on the isometric drawing.
 Alongside Pipe uses the default to plot chain dotted tracing lines alongside the pipe
only, with a gap of 1 mm.
 None suppresses tracing indication.
 Alongside Pipe and Components plots chain dotted tracing lines alongside pipe and
all components, both with a 1 mm gap.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TracingStyle

Drawing Area
Valves
Defines settings for valves on the isometric drawing.
Show Isometric Spindles

Controls the display of valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection.
 True displays valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection.
 False displays valve and instrument spindles as flat.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowIsometricSpindles

Drawing Area
Instruments
Defines settings for instruments that are output on the isometric drawing.

Defines:
Identification
Specifies whether to use the instrument tag or the item code in the material list or any
material control file that is generated. Typically, 3D design systems have parameters for
both the instrument name (tag) and the specification reference (item code), but only one of
these can be selected for output.
 Use Tag outputs the default for the instrument name (tag).
 Use Item Code outputs the instrument item code.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.InstIdentificaiton

Drawing Area
Supports
Defines settings for supports that are output on the isometric drawing.
Show
tolerance.
Defines:
Format
Specifies the format for support dimensions.
 None suppresses the display of support dimensions on the isometric drawing.
 String dimensions pipe supports in string format.

Drawing Area
 Overall dimensions pipe supports in overall format
 Included dimensions pipe supports in included format.

 Suppress suppresses dimensions for pipe supports.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SuppFormat
Identification
Specifies whether support names are shown on the isometric drawing and whether the
names are boxed or un-boxed. This property also controls whether supports are in the
material list (BOM) and whether the tag or specification reference (item code) is in the item
code field.
 No Tags / Spec Ref suppresses output of support names (tags) on the isometric
drawing and output of the specification reference (item code) in the item code field of
the material list.
 Unboxed Tags / Tags outputs un-boxed support names (tags) on the isometric
drawing, and outputs support names in the item code field of the material list.
 Boxed Tags / Spec Ref outputs boxed support names (tags) on the isometric drawing,
and outputs the specification reference in the item code field of the material list.
 Unboxed Tags outputs un-boxed support names (tags) on the isometric drawing, and
excludes supports from the material list.
 Boxed Tags outputs boxed support names (tags) on the isometric, and excludes
supports from the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SupportIdentification

Drawing Area

Defines:

Drawing Area
Bends
Defines settings for bends that are output on the isometric drawing.
Representation
Defines how bends appear on the isometric drawing.
 Square
 Round
If this property is not set, the supporting graphic appears as shown below:
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.BendRepresentation

Drawing Area
Radius
Sets the bend radius in millimeters. Use this property only if you set the Representation to
Round. Type a value in the range 0-9. The example below shows a radius that is set to 8
mm.
If you set Radius to 0, the software uses a default radius of 3 mm.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.BendRadius

Drawing Area
Elbows
Defines settings for elbows that are output on the isometric drawing.
Representation
Defines how elbows appear on the isometric drawing.
 Square
 Round
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ElbowRepresentation

Drawing Area
Radius
Controls the radius depiction (in millimeters) for elbows on the isometric drawing. Type a
value in the range 3mm to 9mm. In the example below, Radius is set to 4.5mm.
 Use this option only if you set Representation to Round.

 The default radius used for elbows is 3mm.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ElbowRadius
Leg Length
Specifies a plotted leg length for elbows, tees, and crosses. Leg Length does not apply to
fabricated (pulled) bends or set-on (stub-in) type tees or crosses.
Specify the required leg length in whole millimeters. For example, for a 12mm leg length,
type 12.
 The maximum suggested value is 18 (18mm), and the minimum suggested value is 6
(6mm).
 If you set the Leg Length to 0, the software uses a default value of 9mm.
Defines:
Option Switch - 95
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ComponentLegLength

Drawing Area
Flanges
Defines settings for flanges that are output on the isometric drawing.
Show Flange Rotation

Controls the output of flange rotation angles, which are used by the fabricator when welding
on flanges that must be rotated away from the normal off-center axes.
Select the check box to display flange rotation angles.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowFlangeRotation
Enclosure Style
Specifies the style of the enclosure box used for flange rotation angles on the isometric
drawing when Show Flange Rotation is also selected.
 No Box outputs angle data without an enclosure box.
 Diamond Ends outputs a diamond-ended enclosure box.
 Round Ends outputs a round-ended enclosure box.
 Square Ends outputs a square-ended enclosure box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FlangeRotationStyle

Drawing Area
Gaskets
Defines settings for gaskets that are output on the isometric drawing.
Show
Controls the output of gaskets on the isometric drawing.
 True outputs a gasket fitting shape on the isometric drawing
Isogen does not normally output a fitting shape to depict a gasket on the
isometric drawing. Where a gasket is present between two flanged components, a gap
appears between the components.
 False suppresses the output of the gasket fitting shape.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowGaskets

Drawing Area
Multi-Port
Defines settings for multi-port components that are output on the isometric drawing.
Connection Style
Controls the connection leg depiction of multi-port components.
 All Dotted displays dotted connection lines on all multi-port connections.
 Dotted for Clarity displays dotted connection lines only when needed for picture clarity,
such as when two or more ports are positioned on the same side with attached pipe
work running parallel to each other.
 Not shown suppresses the display of dotted connection lines shown.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MultiPortConnections

Drawing Area
Alternative Texts
The preview graphics shown below illustrate the default AText setting.
Flange Part Number

Defines the format of the flange part number. The default value is F.
AText ID: -210
? Value: Part Number
$ Supported: Yes
Gasket Part Number

Defines the format of the gasket part number. The default value is G.
AText ID: -211
$ Supported: Yes

Drawing Area
Bolt Part Number

Defines the format of the bolt part number. The default value is B.
AText ID: -212
$ Supported: Yes
Spindle Orientation Label

Indicates the direction of an operating spindle on a valve when it is not pointing in the primary
direction. The default value is SPINDLE.
AText ID: -213
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
MM Label
Denotes millimeters. Used with arrowed dimensions on angle and multi-way valves to indicate
leg length. The default value is MM.
AText ID: -214
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Reducing Flange Callout

Denotes a reducing flange. The indicator points to the location of the reducing flange. The
default value is REDUCING FLANGE.
AText ID: -215
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Offset Label
Indicates a dimensional offset, such as eccentric reducer, reducing flange, and all forms of offset
blocks. The default value is OFFSET.
AText ID: -216
? Value: Offset Dimension
$ Supported: Yes
Mitre Bend Callout

Denotes a mitre bend. See also AText -231 (Bend Label). The default value is MITRE.
AText ID: -217
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Lobster Bend Callout

Denotes a lobster back bend. See also AText - 231 (Bend Label). The default value is
LOBSTER.
AText ID: -218
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Reinforced Branch Callout

Plots an identification message that points to a reinforced tee or cross when the symbol key is
TERF or CRRF and no reinforcement pad is required. The default value is REINFORCED.
AText ID: -219
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Loose Flange Callout

Plots a distinguishing message that points to a flange where the LOOSE indicator is set. The
default value is LEFT LOOSE.
AText ID: -220
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Bend Label
Identifies mitre and lobster back type bends. Used in conjunction with AText -217 (Mitre Bend
Callout) and AText -218 (Lobster Bend Callout). The default value is BEND.
AText ID: -231
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Connector Part Number

Identifies a connector (clamp) as part of a material list cross-reference, such as C12 in a box.
The default value is C.
AText ID: -233
$ Supported: Yes
Line / Nut Part Number

Prefixes liners and nut material part numbers that are output on the isometric drawing. The
default value is ?.
AText ID: -234
$ Supported: Yes

Drawing Area
Support Part Number

Identifies a support as part of a material list cross-reference, such as S8 in a box. The default
value is S.
AText ID: -236
$ Supported: Yes
Primary Flat Direction

This AText has no default text, but if you set it to a word, such as FLAT, then that text acts as a
trigger to output the flat direction of eccentric reducers that have their flat side pointing in a
primary direction.
AText ID: -243
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Swept Tee Callout

Plots a message that points to a tee with a symbol key that starts with TS. The default value is
SWEPT TEE.
AText ID: -275
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Orifice Flange Callout

Outputs text that points to orifice flanges. The default value is ORIFICE FLANGE.
AText ID: -277
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Dial Face Callout

Outputs text that points to instrument dials with a symbol key that starts with ID and is followed
by a relevant direction letter. The default value is DIAL FACE.
AText ID: -278
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Lapjoint Part Number

Denotes a lap joint stub end. The letter used with the material list cross-reference pointer for
LJSE symbol keys. The default value is L.
AText ID: -279
$ Supported: Yes

Drawing Area
Orifice Callout
Outputs text that points to orifice plates and is followed by a relevant direction letter. The default
value is TAPPING.
AText ID: -280
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Slip Plate Callout

Outputs text that points to spectacle blinds and slip plates and is followed by a relevant direction
letter. The default value is TAIL.
AText ID: -281
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Sight Glass Callout

Outputs text that points to a sight glass and is followed by a relevant direction letter. The default
value is WINDOW.
AText ID: -282
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Non Primary Flat Direction

Identifies non-primary flat directions on eccentric reducers. The contents of the AText is output
in front of the contest of a DIRECTION record that contains the flat skew direction. The default
value is FLAT.
AText ID: -283
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Teed Bend Callout

Plots text at bends that have an off-line leg. The default value is TEED BEND.
AText ID: -284
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Flange Rating Callout

Provides an extra message at a flange that has a different pressure rating to standard. This is
achieved by giving the mating gasket a symbol key of the required rating (such as 300#) in the
Intermediate Data File (IDF). The facility is only used on fixed length piping. The default value is
RATING FLANGE.
AText ID: -285
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Teed Elbow Callout

Identifies a teed elbow fitting. The default value is TEE ELBOW.
AText ID: -298
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Bend Radius Diameter Label

Outputs the text 3D Bend Radius on individual pulled bends where the bend radius is
expressed in terms of a number of pipe diameters. The default value is D BEND RADIUS.
AText ID: -337
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Bend Radius Length Label

Outputs the text bend radius on individual pulled bends where the bend radius is expressed in
terms of the dimensional units in use. The default value is BEND RADIUS.
AText ID: -338
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Gearbox Label
Used in conjunction with directional information taken from a GEARBOX type record in the
pipeline data input file and which is appended to this AText. The default value is GEARBOX
ORIENTATION.
AText ID: -346
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Heat Tracing Part Number

Used on the isometric drawing in conjunction with tracing controller coordinates. The default
value is the question mark symbol ( ? ).
AText ID: -397
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Flange Tap Callout

Used on the isometric drawing in conjunctions with flange tap connections. The default value is
TAP DIRECTION.
AText ID: -432
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Set On Label
Plots a message that points to a user-positioned set on connections.
AText ID: -433
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Set In Label
Plots a message that points to a user-positioned set in connections. The default value is STUB
END.
AText ID: -434
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Flange Elevation Label

Indicates the elevation coordinate of the flange connection face. Used at flange positions in
vertical pipe legs.
AText ID: -455
? Value: Flange Elevation
$ Supported: Yes
Support Coordinates Label

Identifies pipe support coordinates. The default value is SUPPORT LOCATION.
AText ID: -470
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Port Reference Label

Displays a reference message at each port of a multi-port components on the isometric. If set to
blank, the message is suppressed.
AText ID: -479
? Value: Port Number
$ Supported: Yes
Port Coordinates Label

Displays coordinate information at each port on the isometric drawing. If set to blank, the display
of coordinate data output is suppressed.
AText ID: -480
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Support Direction Label

Indicates the orientation of pipe support. Content of the associated DIRECTION record
(containing compound directions for skewed support) is appended to AText. The default value is
SUPPORT.
AText ID: -502
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Reducing Tee NS Label

Outputs a nominal size message on reducing tees, such as TEE RED.
AText ID: -550
? Value: NS1xNS2
$ Supported: Yes
Equal Tee NS Label

Outputs a nominal size message on equal tees, such as TEE EQU.
AText ID: -551
? Value: NS1xNS2
$ Supported: Yes
Concentric Reducer NS Label

Outputs a nominal size message on concentric reducers, such as CONC RED.
AText ID: -552
? Value: NS1xNS2
$ Supported: Yes
Eccentric Reducer NS Label

Outputs a nominal size message on eccentric reducers, such as ECC RED.
AText ID: -553
? Value: NS1xNS2
$ Supported: Yes

Drawing Area
Flat Spool Flange Rotation

Identifies flange rotations on flat spools. The calculated angle is edited in by the software at the
position of the question mark ( ? ) character. The default value is FLANGE ROTATION ?.
AText ID: -497
? Value: Calculated Flange Rotation
$ Supported: Yes
Ref Ecc Reducer Label

Identifies which eccentric reducer flat direction is used as a reference for a given flange rotation.
The default value is *** REFERENCE FLAT ***.
AText ID: -487
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Ref Spindle Label

Identifies which spindle is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. The default value is ***
REFERENCE SPINDLE ***.
AText ID: -488
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Ref Support Label

Identifies which support is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. The default value is
*** REFERENCE SUPPORT ***.
AText ID: -489
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Ref Branch Label

Identifies which branch is used as reference for a given flange rotation. The default value is ***
REFERENCE BRANCH ***.
AText ID: -490
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Ref Window Label

Identifies which window is used as a reference for a given flange rotation. The default value is
*** REFERENCE WINDOW ***.
AText ID: -491
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Piping Features
Defines properties for piping features, such as branches, nozzles, and taps.
The Piping Features style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Branches controls settings for branches. For more information, see Branches (on page
115).
 Taps controls settings for taps. For more information, see Taps (on page 121).
 Nozzles defines settings for nozzles. For more information, see Nozzles (on page 127).
 Alternative Texts sets AText values related to the output of piping features. For more
information, see Alternative Texts (on page 129).
Branches
Defines settings for branches.
Tap Branch Coordinates

Controls the output of coordinates at tapped branch connection points, which is the point on
the host component where the tapped branch is connected.
 None does not plot the coordinates of tapped branch connection points.
 Coordinates plots the coordinates of tapped branch connection points.
 Offset plots the coordinates of tapped branch connection points as an offset of the
component origin.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowTapBranchCoords

Drawing Area
Skew Orientation Reference

Controls the output of skew orientation.
 Previous Position outputs the orientation direction message showing rotation relative
to previous position.
 Primary Direction outputs the orientation direction message showing rotation from
primary direction.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.OrientationFrom

Drawing Area
Olet Branch Orientation Message

Controls the output of an orientation message on undeveloped olet branches that are in
primary directions.
 No Message suppresses output of an orientation message on the isometric drawing.
 Create Orientation Message outputs an orientation message on undeveloped olet
branches in a primary direction.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.OletBranchOrientationMessage
Tap Branch Inline Scale

Provides a tapped branch scaling factor for taps on inline items such as valves and flanges.
Type 0 for no tapped branch scaling. Tapped branches shown the same size as the main
pipeline (100%). This is the default setting. Alternatively, type an alternative branch scaling
factor. This value represents a percentage of the main pipeline size. For example, type 110
to increase scaling, 90 to decrease scaling. The minimum value is 75 and the maximum is
125.
 A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point.

The components in a tapped branch can be scaled up or down from the size used for
the main pipeline.
 50% is the minimum recommended value.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TapBranchInlineScale

Drawing Area
Tap Branch Pipe Scale

Provides a tapped branch scaling factor for taps on pipe type components. Examples of pipe
type components are elbows, tees, reducers, and so forth.
Type 0 for tapped branch scaling at 65% of main pipeline size. This is the default setting.
Alternatively, type an alternative tapped branch scaling factor. This value represents a
percentage of the main pipeline size. For example, type 80 to increase scaling, 45 to
decrease scaling. The minimum value is 1 and the maximum is 99 (%).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TapBranchPipeScale
Tap Branch Dimension

Controls the dimensioning of tee and tap branches to allow dimensioning to the edge of
pipe.
 CentreLine originates dimensions from the centerlines of the main run.
 TapAndSetOnStartPoint dimensions to the edge of pipe.

Drawing Area
 TapStartPoint defines tap dimensions only.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapBranchDimension

Drawing Area
Tap Branch Suppression

Suppresses the drawing of tapped branches for particular components.
Tapped branch connections can sometimes be difficult to draw clearly on an isometric,
particularly where a number of fittings are in close proximity. Isogen can suppress the
drawing of tapped branches for particular components. This enables you to use a detailed
sketch to show branch connections as an alternative.
the style and displays the specified text under the Tap Branch Suppression property label.
 The suppressed components are defined by the component type SKEY, such as
VALVEVB**, or by component type as listed below:
 ALL suppresses the output of all tapped branches.
 PIPE suppresses the output of all tapped branches on pipe.
 FITTING suppresses the output of all tapped branches on fittings.
 FLANGE suppresses the output of all tapped branches on flanges.
 VALVE suppresses the output of all tapped branches on valves.
 INSTRUMENT suppresses the output of all tapped branches on instruments.
 MISC-ITEM suppresses the output of all tapped branches on miscellaneous
components.
 Where tapped branches have been suppressed, part numbers and weld numbers can
still be output on the isometric.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.TapBranchSuppression

Drawing Area
Show Reinforcement Pads

Controls the automatic generation of an item code and a material description on the material
list and a plotted shape for the pad on the isometric drawing.
 True generates an item code, material description, and show a plotted pad shape on
the isometric drawing.
 False suppresses the generation of an item code and a material description and plotted
pad shape. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowRPads

Drawing Area
Taps
Defines settings for taps.
Tap on Pipe
components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Drawing Area
Tap on Component
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on actual fitting components, such as valves
and flanges.
A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping
point.
 None suppresses the display of tapped branch dimensions.
 Full displays dimensions for tapped branches as set for the main pipeline.
 Pipe Only displays dimensions only for pipes and pipe-type components (elbows, tees,
reducers, and so forth).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapOnCpt
Tap on Pipe Fittings

Controls the dimensioning of tapping points on pipe-type components, such as elbows/teed
elbows, bends/teed bends, tees, and crosses. A tapped branch is a collection of
components attached to a connection tapping point.
 None suppresses dimensioning of tapped branches on pipe fittings.
 Full dimensions tapped branches on pipe fittings.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapOnPipeFittings

Drawing Area

pipe.

Drawing Area
Defines:

Drawing Area

component origin.
Defines:

Provides a tapped branch scaling factor for taps on inline items such as valves and flanges.
Type 0 for no tapped branch scaling. Tapped branches shown the same size as the main
pipeline (100%). This is the default setting. Alternatively, type an alternative branch scaling
factor. This value represents a percentage of the main pipeline size. For example, type 110
to increase scaling, 90 to decrease scaling. The minimum value is 75 and the maximum is
125.

the main pipeline.
Defines:
Tap Branch Pipe Scale

Provides a tapped branch scaling factor for taps on pipe type components. Examples of pipe
type components are elbows, tees, reducers, and so forth.
Type 0 for tapped branch scaling at 65% of main pipeline size. This is the default setting.
percentage of the main pipeline size. For example, type 80 to increase scaling, 45 to
decrease scaling. The minimum value is 1 and the maximum is 99 (%).
Defines:

Drawing Area
Convert Tap To Straight Through

Controls IDFGEN’s facility to convert cap and blind-flange components that bear tap
connections on the centerline to an equivalent straight through arrangement while
eliminating the tap connection.
By default, this option is not selected. To convert cap and blind-flange components, select
the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ConvertTapToStraightThrough

components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Drawing Area
Nozzles
Defines settings for nozzles.
Show
Controls whether equipment nozzle indicators are plotted (in dotted line style) on the
isometric drawing.
 True displays equipment nozzle indicators.
 False suppresses the display of equipment nozzle indicators. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowNozzles

Drawing Area
Alternative Texts
Screwed End Label

Plots an indicator that points to a pipe end that has been set to screwed in the pipeline input
data file. The default value is SCREWED END.
AText ID: -229
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Screwed Erection Callout

Sets the output text as a message on screwed erection (construction) fittings. This AText is
blank by default.
AText ID: -286
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Pipeline Change Label

Denotes the positions of a change in the pipeline reference or system isometrics. The default
value is PIPE.
AText ID: -288
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Tangential Connection Label

Identifies tangential connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used, the existing
tapping connection message (AText -451) is not output. The default value is TANGENTIAL
CONNECTION.
AText ID: -388
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Offset Connection Label

Identifies offset connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used, the existing
tapping connection message (AText -451) is not output. The default value is OFFSET
CONNECTION.
AText ID: -389
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Connection Origin Label

Identifies tangential/offset connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used, the
existing tapping connection message (AText -451) is not output. The default value is FROM ?
ORIGIN.
AText ID: -390
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Tap Connection Label

Identifies tangential/offset connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used, the
existing tapping connection message (AText -451) is not output.
AText ID: -391
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Fab Site Assembly Prefix

Used on the isometric drawing in conjunction with fabrication site assembly identifier. The
default value is J.
AText ID: -429
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Offshore Site Assembly Prefix

Used on the isometric drawing in conjunction with offshore site assembly identifier. The default
value is J.
AText ID: -430
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Tapping Connection Label

Is output along with coordinate values at the tapping point on a user-specified fitting. Requires
Option Switch 122 to be set to 1 for tapping coordinates that are output on the isometric
drawing. The default value is TAPPING CONNECTION.
AText ID: -451
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Undeveloped Branch Label

Indicates undeveloped set-on tees and olets, which have no branch leg and are indicated on
dotted form on the pipeline, where the intended branch connection is in a skewed direction. A
system-generated direction word is appended. The default value is CONNECTION
ORIENTATION.
AText ID: -454
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Thickness Label
Shows thickness of a penetration plate on the drawing.
AText ID: -459
? Value: Penetration Plate

Thickness
$ Supported: Yes
Flange Assembly Prefix

The site assembly uses the AText -478 default value J, such as J1 or JA, to prefix the flange
assembly identification. The default value is J.
AText ID: -478
? Value: Assembly Number
$ Supported: Yes

Drawing Area
Cable Tray Components

Controls the output and format of isometric drawing objects, including cable tray, supports,
elbows, and so forth.
The Cable Tray Components style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Cable Tray defines settings for the output and format of cable tray on the isometric drawing.
For more information, see Cable Tray (on page 133).
Cable Tray
Defines settings for cable tray on the isometric drawing. For example, you can show how
insulation is plotted on the drawing.
Insulation Style
Specifies whether to show insulation along cable tray only or along cable tray and
components.
 Alongside Cable Tray plots dashed insulation lines alongside cable tray only, with a
gap of 1 mm.
 Alongside Cable Tray and Components plots dashed insulation lines alongside cable
tray and all components, both with a 1 mm gap.
Defines:

Drawing Area
Supports
Show
tolerance.
Defines:
Format

Drawing Area

Defines:
Identification
code field.
the material list.
Defines:

Drawing Area

Defines:

Drawing Area
Bends
Representation
 Square
 Round
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Drawing Area
Radius
mm.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Drawing Area
Elbows
Representation
 Square
 Round
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Drawing Area
Radius

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Leg Length
type 12.
(6mm).
Defines:
Option Switch - 95

Drawing Area
Multi-Port
Connection Style
Defines:

Drawing Area
Cable Tray Features

Defines properties for cable tray features, such as branches and taps.
The Cable Tray Features style group contains the options groups listed below.
142).
Branches

component origin.
Defines:

Drawing Area

primary direction.
Defines:

Controls the plotted size for tapped inline branches. You can scale the components in a
tapped branch from the size used for the main run.
Type 0 for no tapped branch scaling. Tapped branches are shown as the same size as the
main run (100%). This is the default setting. Alternatively, type an alternative branch scaling
factor. This value represents a percentage of the main run size. For example, type 110 to
increase scaling, 90 to decrease scaling. The minimum value is 75 and the maximum is 125.

the main run.
Defines:

Drawing Area
Tap Branch Cable Tray Scale

Controls the plotted size of tapped branches. The components in a tapped branch may be
scaled up or down from the size used for the main run.
Type 0 for tapped branch scaling at 65% of main run size. This is the default setting.
percentage of the main run size. For example, type 80 to increase scaling, 45 to decrease
scaling. The minimum value is 1 and the maximum is 99 (%).
Defines:

cable tray.
 TapAndSetOnStartPoint dimensions to the edge of the cable tray.

Drawing Area
Defines:

components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Drawing Area
Taps
Tap on Cable Tray

Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on cable tray-type components, such as
elbows, tees, and cable trays.
 None turns off dimensions for tapped branch dimensions. This is the default setting.
 Full turns on tapped branch dimensions.
 Cable Tray Only turns off tapped branch dimensions, except for those on cable tray
and cable tray-type components.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TapOnPipe
Tap on Component
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on components.
point.

Drawing Area
 Full displays dimensions for tapped branches as set for the main run.
 Cable Tray Only displays dimensions for cable trays and similar components (elbows,
tees, reducers, and so forth) only.
Defines:
Tap on Fittings
Controls the dimensioning of tapping points on cable tray-type components, such as
elbows/teed elbows, bends/teed bends, tees, and crosses. A tapped branch is a collection
of components attached to a connection tapping point.
 None suppresses dimensioning of tapped branches on fittings.
 Full dimensions tapped branches on fittings.
Defines:

Drawing Area

cable tray.
Defines:

Drawing Area

component origin.
Defines:


the main run.
Defines:
Tap Branch Cable Tray Scale

Defines:

Drawing Area

components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Drawing Area
Duct Components
Controls the output and format of isometric drawing objects, including duct, supports, elbows,
and so forth.
The Duct Components style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Duct defines settings for the output and format of duct on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Duct (on page 151).
 Valves defines settings for instruments that are outputs on the isometric drawing For more
information, see Valves (on page 86).
 Instruments defines settings for instruments that are output on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Instruments (on page 87).
 Gaskets defines settings for gaskets that are output on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Gaskets (on page 96).
Duct
Defines settings for duct on the isometric drawing. For example, you can show insulation or heat
tracing is plotted on the drawing.
Insulation Style
Specifies whether to show insulation along duct only or along duct and components.
 Alongside Duct plots dashed insulation lines alongside duct only, with a gap of 1 mm.
 Alongside Duct and Components plots dashed insulation lines alongside duct and all
Defines:

Drawing Area
Tracing Style
 Alongside Duct uses the default to plot chain dotted tracing lines alongside the duct
 Alongside Duct and Components plots chain dotted tracing lines alongside duct and
Defines:

Drawing Area
Valves
Defines settings for valves on the isometric drawing.

Defines:

Drawing Area
Instruments
Defines settings for instruments that are output on the isometric drawing.

Defines:
Identification
Specifies whether to use the instrument tag or the item code in the material list or any
material control file that is generated. Typically, 3D design systems have parameters for
both the instrument name (tag) and the specification reference (item code), but only one of
these can be selected for output.
 Use Tag outputs the default for the instrument name (tag).
 Use Item Code outputs the instrument item code.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.InstIdentificaiton

Drawing Area
Supports
Show
tolerance.
Defines:
Format

Drawing Area

Defines:
Identification
code field.
the material list.
Defines:

Drawing Area

Defines:

Drawing Area
Bends
Representation
 Square
 Round
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Radius
mm.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Drawing Area
Elbows
Representation
 Square
 Round
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Radius

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Drawing Area
Leg Length
type 12.
(6mm).
Defines:
Option Switch - 95

Drawing Area
Gaskets
Defines settings for gaskets that are output on the isometric drawing.
Show
Controls the output of gaskets on the isometric drawing.
 True outputs a gasket fitting shape on the isometric drawing
Isogen does not normally output a fitting shape to depict a gasket on the
isometric drawing. Where a gasket is present between two flanged components, a gap
appears between the components.
 False suppresses the output of the gasket fitting shape.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowGaskets

Drawing Area
Multi-Port
Connection Style
Defines:

Drawing Area
Duct Features
Defines properties for cable tray features, such as branches and taps.
The Duct Features style group contains the options groups listed below.
142).
 Nozzles defines settings for nozzles. For more information, see Nozzles (on page 127).
Branches

component origin.
Defines:

Drawing Area

primary direction.
Defines:


the main run.
Defines:

Drawing Area
Tap Branch Duct Scale

Defines:

duct.
 TapAndSetOnStartPoint dimensions to the edge of the duct.

Drawing Area
Defines:

components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Drawing Area
Taps
Tap on Duct
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on duct-type components, such as elbows,
tees, and duct.
 Duct Only turns off tapped branch dimensions, except for those on duct and duct-type
components.
Defines:
Tap on Component
point.

Drawing Area
 Duct Only displays dimensions for duct and duct-type components (elbows, tees,
reducers, and so forth) only.
Defines:
Tap on Fittings
Controls the dimensioning of tapping points on duct-type components, such as elbows/teed
Defines:

Drawing Area

duct.
Defines:

Drawing Area

component origin.
Defines:


the main run.
Defines:
Tap Branch Duct Scale

Defines:

Drawing Area

components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Drawing Area
Nozzles
Defines settings for nozzles.
Show
Controls whether equipment nozzle indicators are plotted (in dotted line style) on the
isometric drawing.
 True displays equipment nozzle indicators.
 False suppresses the display of equipment nozzle indicators. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowNozzles

Drawing Area
Enclosures
Controls the output and format of enclosures for drawing objects.
The Enclosures style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Part Numbers settings for part number enclosures. For more information, see Part
Numbers (on page 173).
 Component Attributes defines settings for component attribute enclosures. For more
information, see Component Attributes (on page 177).
 Component Tags defines settings for component tag enclosures. For more information, see
Component Tags (on page 178).
 Weld Numbers defines the assignment of weld enclosures. For more information, see Weld
Numbers (on page 182).
 Spool Identifiers defines settings for spool identifier enclosures. For more information, see
Spool Identifiers (on page 185).
 Cut Pieces defines settings for cut piece enclosures. For more information, see Cut Pieces
(on page 187).
 Joints and Assemblies defines settings for joints and assemblies. For more information,
see Joints and Assemblies (on page 190).
 Messages defines settings for message enclosures. For more information see, Messages
(on page 193).
Part Numbers
Defines settings for part number enclosures.
Show
Suppresses the plotting of part numbers and associated enclosure boxes on the drawing.
 True displays part numbers on the isometric drawing.
 False suppresses the display of part numbers on the isometric drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoVisible

Drawing Area
Size
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle, and eclipse
enclosure style.
Valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters or Variable size, which dynamically sizes the
enclosure. The default setting is 2. The example below shows the default setting used for
the circle enclosure style:
The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double
circle, or ellipse is drawn. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure is
dynamically adjusted to suit. The Variable size setting allows the circle, double circle, and
ellipse to be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjusts to suit
the number of characters.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoEnclSize
Length
Sets a fixed length for part numbers (1-9 characters or variable). Select a fixed part number
length or Variable from the list.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoLength
Number of Spaces
Sets the number of spaces used for Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3 enclosures (as specified by
the Additional Items Style setting).
Set the number of spaces to use. If no value is set, Isogen uses a default value of 2.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoSpaces

Drawing Area
Style
Specifies the part number enclosure box shape.
 None displays no enclosure box. Only plots the part number.
 Square Ends
 Round Ends
 Diamond Ends
 Circle

Drawing Area
 Double Circle
 Ellipse
The size at which the circle, double circle, and ellipse is drawn is controlled by
the Size setting (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If
there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to
accommodate.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoEnclosureStyle
Additional Items Style
Specifies the style for part number enclosures.
 None displays no enclosure style.
 Type1 Square
 Type1 Round

Drawing Area
 Type1 Diamond
 Type2 uses Style to define the style of end used with Type 2 additional enclosure.
 Number of Spaces needs to be set to control the number of blank spaces used.
 If Style is set to Circle, Double Circle, or Ellipse, then Type 2 Additional Items Style
is switched off, as this uses the same setting.
 For Type2, the enclosure style for the box with the part numbers in it is defined using
the Style setting.
 All pipe part numbers, which are usually output as messages along the pipe, are
converted to arrowed out type messages.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AdditionalEnclosureStyle

Drawing Area
Defines settings for component attribute enclosures.
Data
Specifies the text that is output to the data definition (DDF) file for the component attribute
enclosure.
the style and displays the specified text under the Data property label.
 Use the format Message-Type Attribute.

Message-Types:
 MESSAGE-POINTED
 MESSAGE-ROUND
 MESSAGE-TRIANGLE
 MESSAGE-DIAMOND
 MESSAGE-SQUARE
 MESSAGE-CIRCLE
 MESSAGE-UNBOXED
Attributes:
 COMPONENT-NAME
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10
 You can output attributes to the following:
 Material list (variable and user-defined)
 Printed material list
 Material control file
 Cut list report
 Cut list file
 Click Hide to close the text box.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CptATtributesEnclStyle

Drawing Area
Component Tags
Defines settings for component tag enclosures.
Component Tag Enclosure

Defines the style for tag numbers on inline items.
 Suppress plots no tag numbers or names.
 Enclosure plots tag numbers and names and encloses each in a box.
 No Enclosure plots tag numbers and names without enclosing each in a box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CptTagStyle
Component Tag Enclosure Style

Controls the enclosure shapes used for components if Component Tag Enclosure is set to
Boxed.
 Square-ended box
 Diamond-ended box
 Round-ended box
 Triangular
 Diamond
 Rectangular
 Circular
 Elliptical
 Hexagonal
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CptTagEnclStyle

Drawing Area
Instrument Size
Specifies the size of the enclosure for instrument text. You can select 1 through 4 characters
on each of the two available lines within an instrument balloon, or you can specify no
balloon.
 No Balloon suppresses plotting of a balloon around the instrument name.
 1 Character plots a balloon size at least 1 character on each line.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.InstIDEnclosureSize
Instrument Style
Specifies the shape of the instrument name box.
 No Box reverts to using the Instrument Size setting .
 Diamond displays a diamond-ended box enclosure.
 Round displays a round-ended box enclosure.
 Triangular displays a triangle-shaped enclosure.
 Diamond displays a diamond-shaped enclosure.
 Square displays a square-ended box enclosure.
 Circle displays a circular-shaped enclosure.
 Ellipse displays an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
 Hexagon displays a hexagonal-shaped enclosure.
To reduce the chances of these enclosures becoming quite large, especially the
diamond and triangle enclosures, limit the display to only 2 or 3 characters.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.InstIDEnclosureStyle

Drawing Area
Support Style
Controls the enclosure shapes used for supports when you set the support enclosure style
to Boxed Tags / Spec Ref or Boxed Tags. For more information, see Identification.
 Default Rectangle
 Round Ends
 Diamond Ends
 Triangle
 Diamond
 Rectangle
 Circle
 Ellipse
 Hexagon
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SupportTagEnclStyle

Drawing Area
Weld Numbers
Defines the assignment of weld enclosures. You can define up to six enclosure definitions, each
of which can apply to one or more of the six weld types. You can also use the Enclosure Editor
to modify the style, shape, and label length of an existing weld enclosure definition. The editor
can also be used to define additional enclosure assignments.
Section 1: Show weld number enclosures for

Specifies which of the six weld types are shown on the isometric drawing. This section also
defines which enclosure definitions are shown in the summary and can be edited. Weld
enclosure assignments are specified by selecting and clearing the checkboxes.
 All welds assigns the enclosure definition to pipe and support welds across all
categories (Fabrication, Erection, and Offshore).
 Pipe welds assigns the enclosure definition to pipe welds only across all
categories. To exclude a category, clear its checkbox. In the example below,
Offshore pipe welds are excluded from the enclosure assignment.
 Support welds assigns the enclosure definition to support welds only across all
categories. To exclude a category, clear its checkbox. In the example below, only
Fabrication support welds are assigned a weld enclosure.

Drawing Area
Section 2: Configure enclosure settings

Shows a preview of all currently defined weld enclosures (1) and includes a summary of the
selected weld types to which each enclosure applies (2).
Section 2 also provides access to the Enclosure Editor.

Enclosure Editor
Provides options for modifying an existing enclosure definition and for creating a new
definition. Click Edit enclosure definitions to open the Enclosure Editor.
 Add Enclosure opens an enclosure panel so that you can define a new weld
enclosure.
 Enclosure style specifies the weld enclosure type. The available types are simple,
extended, or one of the four special extended types.
 Simple Enclosure represents an enclosure with a single field that shows the
weld number and prefix, if set.
 Extended Enclosure is a segmented enclosure. Each segment contains a weld
attribute. An extended enclosure can have up to 10 segments.
 Special Extended Enclosure is an enclosure with two, three, or four segments.

Each segment contains a weld attribute. Available segment arrangements are
shown below:
 Enclosure shape specifies the shape of the enclosure. Available shapes depend
on the selected enclosure type.
 Label length controls the number of characters used for a simple enclosure. Valid
entries are from 1 to 8 characters and Variable size, which dynamically sizes the
enclosure. The default setting is 2. This option appears only when a simple
enclosure type is select for Enclosure style.

Drawing Area
 Attribute specifies the attribute that appears in the enclosure. This option appears
only when an extended or special extended enclosure type is selected for
Enclosure style.
 Width controls the number of characters displayed in each segment. Select a
number in the list. This option appears only when an extended or special extended
enclosure type is selected for Enclosure style.
 Force all welds as special applies only to objects with Enclosure style set to one
of the special extended enclosure types.
Select the checkbox to force all welds to adopt the special layout for their enclosure.
This option appears only when an extended enclosure type is selected for Enclosure
style.
To allow the generation of an enclosure containing only the weld number, when the data
for all the other fields in an enclosure are missing, clear the checkbox.
 Add a segment adds a segment to the enclosure and displays an additional

Attribute and Width list so that you can define the content to appear in the
segment. This option displays only when the non-special extended enclosure is
selected in the Enclosure style list.
 Apply enclosure to displays a summary of the welds selected in Section 1.
Click Hide to close the Enclosure Editor.

Drawing Area
Spool Identifiers
Defines settings for spool identifier enclosures.
Layout
Controls the size of the spool ID enclosure.
Specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that are used by the software
to pad-out the Style setting effectively increases the size of the enclosure. The size of the
text, which is controlled by the Text Size setting, that is displayed within any increased size
enclosure is not increased in size. The data string associated with each identifier consists of
a combination of the @, $, and ? characters.
 The @ character signals a blank (space) requirement.
 The $ character signals a new line requirement.
 The ? character indicates where the actual data from the declared record should be
located in the 'padded-out' record.
Setting the value to the text string @$@@?@@$@ increases the Style with the
diamond-end enclosure as shown in the example below:
Use the increase in size with care as it affects the isometric representation
considerably.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDEnclosureStyle
Style
Specifies the enclosure shape for the spool identifiers.
 None uses no enclosure.
 Square Brackets encloses spool identifiers in the standard square brackets or a double
box enclosure.

Drawing Area
 Diamond Ends encloses spool identifiers in a diamond-ended box.
 Round encloses spool identifiers in a round-ended box.
 Triangular encloses spool identifiers in a triangle-shaped box.
 Diamond Box encloses spool identifiers in a diamond-shaped box.
 Square Box encloses spool identifiers in a square-ended box.
 Circle encloses spool identifiers in a circle.

Drawing Area
 Double Circle encloses spool identifiers in a double circle.
 Ellipse encloses spool identifiers in an ellipse.
the Spools > Settings > Spool Identifiers > Size setting (default 2 characters), which
defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set,
the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDEnclosure

Drawing Area
Cut Pieces
Defines settings for cut piece enclosures.
Style
 Square Ends
 Round Ends
 Diamond Ends
 Circle

Drawing Area
 Double Circle
 Ellipse
accommodate.
Defines:

Drawing Area
Joints and Assemblies

Defines settings for joints and assemblies.
Site Assembly Style
Controls the enclosure style for site assemblies on the isometric drawing.
 None displays no box enclosure.
 Diamond Ended displays a diamond-ended box enclosure.
 Round Ended displays a round-ended box enclosure.
 Triangular displays a triangular-shaped enclosure.

Drawing Area
 Rectangular displays a rectangular-shaped enclosure.
 Double Circle displays a circular-shaped enclosure inside another circle.
 The site assembly uses AText -478, default J--such as J1 or JA--to prefix the flange
assembly identification.
 The size that the circle, double circle, and ellipse is drawn at is controlled by the Site
Assembly Size setting (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the
enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically
adjusts to suit.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure

Drawing Area
Site Assembly Size

Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle, and ellipse
enclosure style.
enclosure. The default setting is 2. The example below shows the default size used for a
circle style enclosure:
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize
Fabrication Assembly Style
Controls the enclosure style for fabrication assembly identifiers that Isogen outputs on the
isometric drawing.
 None displays assembly identifiers in no box enclosure.
 Diamond Ended displays assembly identifiers in a diamond-ended box enclosure.
 Round Ended displays assembly identifiers in a round-ended box enclosure.
 Triangle displays assembly identifiers in a triangular-shaped enclosure.
 Diamond displays assembly identifiers in a diamond-shaped enclosure.
 Square Ended displays assembly identifiers in a square-ended box enclosure.
 Circle displays assembly identifiers in a circular enclosure.
 Suppressed suppresses the display of assembly identifiers.
 Double Circle displays assembly identifiers in a circular-shaped enclosure inside
another circle.
 Ellipse displays assembly identifiers in an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FabricationAssemblyIDEnclosure

Drawing Area
Offshore Assembly Style

Controls the enclosure style for Offshore assembly identifiers that Isogen outputs on the
isometric drawing.
another circle.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.OffshoreAssemblyIDEnclosure

Drawing Area
Messages
Defines settings for message enclosures.
You can increase the size an enclosure by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character
indicators that are used by the software to pad-out the normal message record. The data string
associated with each identifier consists of a combination of the @, $, and ? characters. Setting
the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the message enclosure.
 The ? character indicates where the actual data from the declared record is be located in
the padded-out record.
Ideally, the message enclosure should only contain two or three characters, and
should also be used with care, as a large message considerably affects the isometric
representation.
Round Layout
Controls the physical size of the round enclosure used to contain user input messages.
Type the data string in the box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MessageRoundEnclosure
Circle Layout
Controls the physical size of the circle enclosure used to contain user input messages. Type
the data string in the box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MessageCircleEnclosure
Diamond Layout
Determines the source used to output the date.
 Data File uses the date contained in the pipeline data file.
 System uses the system clock date.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DateSource

Drawing Area
Pointed Layout
Controls the physical size of the pointed-ended enclosure used to contain user input
messages. Type the data string in the box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MessagePointedEnclosure
Square Layout
Controls the physical size of the square enclosure used to contain user input messages.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MessageSquareEnclosure
Triangle Layout
Controls the physical size of the triangle enclosure used to contain user input messages.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.MessageTriangleEnclosure

Drawing Area
Graphics
Defines the representation of pipeline components on the isometric drawing. Properties are also
available that define the layer names and the colors assigned to layer numbers and that control
how graphics are grouped in the output CAD file.
The Graphics style category contains the options groups listed below.
 Definitions defines the representation of pipeline components on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Definitions (on page 196).
 Layers defines settings for layer numbers. For more information, see Layers (on page 203).
 Scale the scale of the pipeline within drawing area of the plotted isometric. For more
information, see Scale (on page 203).
 Additional defines additional data for the data definition (DDF) file. For more information,
see Additional (on page 204).
 Grouping sets grouping parameters for the output of objects on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Grouping (on page 206).
Definitions
Defines the representation of pipeline components on the isometric drawing.
Definitions
Specifies how to represent pipeline components or facilities on the drawing. For example,
you can specify that valves are to be drawn 1.5 times normal size with a line thickness of 1
on layer 5, and appear in the color blue. The software uses this collection to construct the
corresponding drawing definition (DDF) file. You enter the data using a grid. To open the
grid, click Show .
 Applies To specifies the pipeline, pipeline component, or facility to which the definition
is applied. This is set using a list, which includes the allowable settings for this property.
In most instances, the drawing graphics that the setting modifies is clear. For
example, FLOW-ARROWS affects flow arrows. However, some settings are more
ambiguous. Refer to the table below for more information:
Applies To setting Type of output graphics to be modified
CONTINUATION Dotted un-dimensioned pipe and components
DIMENSION-LINES Dimension line standouts, dimension lines, and

dimension arrows
DIMENSION-TEXT
d Numerical dimensioning text
END-CONNECTORS
a Hygienic end connection fittings
FLOORS Floor Penetration symbol
FRAME Default Isogen-generated drawing frame.

Drawing Area
Applies To setting Type of output graphics to be modified
FRAME-TEXT Default Isogen-generated text in the default

generated drawing frame
ISO-TEXT Text that has been arrowed out on a leader line
REFERENCE-ITEM Reference dimensions
SPECIAL-STATUS Dotted dimensioned pipe and components
SPECIAL Dotted dimensioned pipe
SPECIAL BENDS Dotted dimensioned bends
SPECIAL CROSSES Dotted dimensioned crosses
SPECIAL ELBOWS Dotted dimensioned elbows
SPECIAL FITTINGS Dotted dimensioned components
SPIT-POINTS Dotted continuation when pipeline

automatically splits across multiple sheets
TRACING-CONTROLS Heat tracing junction boxes
UNDIMENSIONED-BRANCHES Used when the Branch Dimension Suppression

facility is invoked
WALLS Wall Penetration symbol
LAGGING Insulation
SAFETY-DISC Rupture Disk
MISC-COMPONENTS All miscellaneous components rather than the

ones that are individually list, such as
MISC-COMPONENT-PLUG.

Drawing Area
 Lower NS defines the minimum bore as an integer or real number. Type a value in the
current nominal size units.
When there are two or more definitions with the same Applies To setting, you can use
a zero (0) in the first of the lower bore positions to signal there is no lower bore, as
shown in the example below.
Applies To Lower NS Upper NS
Pipeline 0 2
Pipeline 2.5 6
Pipeline 8 0
The software displays the Lower NS and Upper NS options together, rather
than separated.
 Upper NS defines the maximum bore as an integer or real number. Type the required
value in the current nominal size units.
When there are two or more definitions with the same Applies To setting, you can use
a zero (0) in the last maximum bore position to signal there is no maximum bore limit, as
shown in the example below:
Applies To Lower NS Upper NS
Pipeline 0 2
Pipeline 2.5 6
Pipeline 8 0
The software displays the Lower NS/Upper NS parameter together, rather

than separated.
 Category specifies the category governed by this definition. ALL represents an
unspecified category.

Drawing Area
 Colour specifies the index number that represents a specific color as defined in the
output drawing software. AutoCAD uses a fixed 256 color pallet starting at 1 (red) to
256. In MicroStation, in addition to a default color pallet, each design file can have a
unique custom color table. For example, color index number 3 may be red in one design
file, but it may be green in another.
The table below shows a color comparison between a sampling of AutoCAD and
MicroStation color index numbers.
AutoCAD Colour MicroStation Colour Colour Output on

Index Number Index Number Isometric Drawing
1 3
2 4
3 2
4 7
5 1
6 5
7 0
8 9
9 14
For specific information about AutoCAD, MicroStation, and other third party
drawing software color tables, refer to the product documentation delivered with your
software.

Drawing Area
The table below shows the index numbers applicable to the software and their mapped
colors.
Numeric
Mapped Color
Value
0 Black
1 Blue
2 Cyan
3 Green
4 Magenta
5 Red
6 Yellow
7 White
8 Dark Blue
9 Dark Cyan
10 Dark Green
11 Dark Magenta
12 Dark Red
13 Dark Yellow
14 Dark Gray
15 Light Gray
 Layer defines a number that corresponds to the layer. This number is an integer that
identifies the required layer (level) to which the component type is to be assigned. Type
a value in the range 1-50.
 Scale specifies an integer value for the scale that represents an increase or decrease to
the basic 100% standard symbol size for all types of fitting. Type a value in the range 75
- 200.
 Thickness Actual defines the actual thickness (width) of the plotted line in millimeters
(a real number). Type a value in the range 0.0 to 10.0.

Drawing Area
 Line Style specifies the number that corresponds to the line style that is to be output on
the isometric drawing. A line style is a simple pattern of lines and gaps. In the Line
Style list, the 12 line styles generated by Isogen, shown below, are listed by default.
Isogen-generated line styles apply only for showing heat tracing on the isometric
drawing. They do not apply for piping. User-specified line styles can be applied for
showing either heat tracing or piping.
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
You can define additional line styles using Line Style Table.
 The value that displays on the Definitions icon indicates the number of columns
currently defined in the report. In the example below, three columns are currently
defined.
 Click Hide to close the grid.

Drawing Area
Line Style Table

Opens a free-form text box that allows you to map a standard name to a line style number.
Click Show to open the free-form text box, and then type your data. An example is
shown below.
1 Dotted
2 Dash-dot
The text that you enter must be the name of a line style defined in the
output CAD system and must have a corresponding line style number.
When finished, click . The software updates the style and displays the text under
the Line Style Table property label.
 The software displays any line style number that you save to Line Style Table in the
Drawing Area > Graphics > Definitions > Line Style list.
 The software supports up to 1000 user-specified line styles.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Definitions.LineStyleTable

Drawing Area
Layers
Defines settings for layer numbers.
Layers
Isogen-generated line styles apply only for showing heat tracing on the isometric
drawing. They do not apply for piping. User-specified line styles can be applied for showing
either heat tracing or piping.
Stores the definitions of the layer names and colors assigned to layer numbers.
 Colour specifies the optional color integer number to override the default color as
defined in the output drawing system.
 Number identifies the integer number that corresponds to the layer defined in
Definitions (on page 196).
 Name specifies a name for the layer. For example, delivered layers include PIPE,
FITTINGS, DIMTEXT, DIMLINES, and MATLIST.
 The value that displays on the Layers icon indicates the number of layers currently
defined for the active isometric drawing style. In the example below, 11 layers are
currently defined:

Default Colour
Sets the default color for all layers if a color is not set explicitly.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Layers.DefaultColour

Drawing Area
Scale
Defines the scale of the pipeline within drawing area of the plotted isometric.
Drawing Area
Increases or decreases the scale of the pipeline picture part of the isometric only, while
leaving all other parts, such as the drawing frame, material list, title block and line summary
areas, unaltered. Use Drawing Area to re-scale the pipeline picture and all text pointing to
it.
Type 0 or 100 to use the default scale, or type a number to increase or decrease the scaling
effect as a percentage.
Defines:
Option Switch - 34
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipeLineScale
Drawing Size
Controls the finished isometric drawing size. You can increase or decrease the final plotted
isometric size from the size defined by Drawing Size, or Custom Height and Custom
Width.
Type the number that represents the percentage by which to increase or decrease the final
isometric drawing size. For example, if you type 71, the software generates a drawing
reduced by 71% of the set size. If you type 120, the software generates a drawing increased
by 120% of the set size. If you type 0 or 100, there is no scaling change. The software
generates the isometric drawing at the size defined by Drawing Size or Custom Height
and Custom Width.
Defines:
Option Switch - 32
I-Configure - Drawing.Control.IsoScale
True Scale
Attempts to adjust the length of sections of pipe to be proportional to their actual physical
length. Select the check box to use true scaling of isometrics (proportional pipe lengths).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.TrueScale

Drawing Area
Additional
Defines additional data for the data definition (DDF) file.
Enabled
Controls whether the data specified in the DDFLines setting is added to the DDF file. To
include the data, select the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AdditionalData.Enabled
Data
Specifies a block of text to be added to the data definition (DDF) file.
the style and displays the specified text under the Data property label.
Click Hide to close the text box.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.AdditionalData.DDFLines

Drawing Area
Grouping
Sets grouping parameters for the output of objects on the isometric drawing.
Group graphics by UCI
Controls how components are grouped in the output CAD file. When you select this option,
graphics are grouped based on the Unique Component Identifier (UCI). For example, if you
output a pipeline in which an olet/support has been placed in the middle of a pipe, the
resulting isometric drawing splits that pipe into two segments on each side of the
component. In this instance, you can use Option Switch 98 to keep the entire pipe together
in the drawing.
Typically, the 3D system that generates the drawing data supplies this UCI. Selecting this
option makes it easier to correlate the 2D isometric drawing with the 3D data when both are
published to SmatPlant Foundation.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawings.Controls.GroupGraphicsbyUCI

Drawing Area
Content
Controls what is shown on the isometric drawing. For example, you can set the direction of the
north arrow and specify how nominal size information appears on the isometric drawing.
The Content style category contains the options groups listed below.
 North Arrow controls how the North arrow is shown on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see North Arrow (on page 207).
 Continuations defines settings for continuation messages. For more information, see
Continuations (on page 207).
 Nominal Sizes defines settings for the output of nominal size data. For more information,
see Nominal Sizes (on page 211).
 Widths defines settings for the output of nominal size data. For more information, see
Widths.
 Insulation and Tracing defines settings for the representation of insulation and heat
tracing. For more information, see Insulation and Tracing (on page 213).
 Spec Breaks defines the appearance of specification breaks on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Spec Breaks (on page 215).
 Flow Arrows defines settings for displaying flow arrows on pipe and in-line components.
For more information, see Flow Arrows (on page 215).
 Ghost Gap For more information, see Ghost Gap (on page 217).
 Alternative Text sets AText values related to the content of the isometric drawing. For more
North Arrow
Show Enclosure
Controls whether the north arrow, as specified by North Direction, is displayed on the
isometric drawing enclosed within a box.
 True displays the north arrow enclosed in a box.
 False suppresses the display of the north arrow in an enclosed box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.NorthArrowBox

Drawing Area
Continuations
Defines settings for continuation messages.
Pipeline Name Style

Controls the style of pipeline name output for drawing continuation messages when Include
Pipeline Name is selected.
 Blank outputs a standard drawing continuation message.
 Drawing Identifier outputs a drawing continuation message that includes
CLIENT-DRAWING-IDENTIFIER.
 Pipe Reference outputs a drawing continuation message includes pipeline name.
 Sequence Number outputs a drawing continuation message that includes
PIPELINE-DRAWING-SEQUENCE-NUMBER.
 Spool Drawing Sequence Number outputs a drawing continuation message that
includes SPOOL-DRAWING-SEQUENCE-NUMBER.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipeNameStyle
Include Pipeline Name

Controls whether the pipeline name is output as part of the drawing continuation message
on the isometric.
 True outputs the pipeline name as part of the continuation message on the isometric
drawing.
 False outputs a standard drawing message.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipeNameInContMessages

Drawing Area
Continuation Name Style

Controls the style of name output for drawing continuation messages when Include
Continuation Name is selected.
 Blank outputs a standard drawing continuation message.
 Continuation Name outputs a drawing continuation message that includes the name of
the continuation.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipeNameStyle
Include Continuation Name

Controls whether the continuation name is output as part of the drawing continuation
message on the isometric.
 True outputs the continuation name as part of the continuation message on the
isometric drawing.
 False outputs a standard drawing message.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.PipeNameInContMessages
Show Coordinates
Controls whether the coordinate information for continuations and ISO TEXT are shown on
Select the check box to display the coordinate information. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowPipeLineCont
Show for Pipelines

Controls whether the coordinate information for pipeline continuations and ISO TEXT are
shown on the isometric drawing.
Select the check box to display the coordinate information. This is the default setting.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for pipeline continuation is -209. The
default value is CONT. ON.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowPipeLineCont

Drawing Area
Show Continuations at Split Points

Controls the location of drawing continuation messages at drawing split points on the
isometric drawing.
 True outputs a drawing continuation message that points to the drawing split point. If
Show Coordinates at Split Points is also set to True, coordinate data is displayed (1).
However, if Show Coordinates at Split Points is set to False, Isogen displays the
drawing continuation message but suppresses the display of coordinate data (2).
 False suppresses the output of coordinate data and outputs a drawing continuation
message that points to the end of continuation components (1). Requires that Show
Coordinates at Split Points also be set to False. If Show Coordinates at Split Points
is set to True, Isogen displays a full set of coordinates and a drawing continuation
message that points to the drawing split point (2).
 Show Continuation at Split Points works in conjunction with Show Coordinates at

Split Points.
 Setting AText -209 and -276 to blank suppresses the isometric output of the Show
Continuation at Split Points and Show Coordinates at Split Points settings.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowContAtSplitPoint
Show for Spools

Controls the display of continuation graphics at the ends of spool isometric drawings. Where
a spool continues on another spool, an appropriate continuation message is also output on
 True displays continuation graphics on spool isometric drawings.
 False suppresses the display of continuation graphics on spool isometric drawings.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.ContinuationGraphicsOnSpoolIsos

Drawing Area
Nominal Sizes
Defines settings for the output of nominal size data.
Units in Drawings
Controls how nominal size information is output in a number of tables and lists appearing on
the isometric drawing. Isogen does not have an option when outputting the nominal size on
whether the units (typically the “ character) is appended to the output text. To give you
control over the output of the nominal size units, the software adds keywords to the
appropriate control files.
Select the check box to append the keyword OUTPUT-UNITS to N.S, N.S.SEC and
N.S.THIRD when this appears in the control files for tables and lists appearing on the
isometric drawing. An example is shown below.
PRINTED-M/C-DATA-ITEMS
'PIPELINE-REFERENCE' 1 L
'REVISION' 18 L
'ITEM-CODE' 24 L
'N.S.' 41 L OUTPUT-UNITS
'QTY' 57 N
'GROUP' 64 L
Clear the check box to append the keyword SUPPRESS-UNITS to N.S, N.S.SEC and
N.S.THIRD when this appears in the control files for tables and lists appearing on the
isometric drawing.
You can control nominal size units for the following output tables and report files:
 Material List – Style 2
 Material Control File
 Cut Pipe List
 Cut Pipe Report File
 Weld List
 Welding Report File
 Site Welding Report File
 Operations List (default – units output)
 Site Assembly Report File (default – units output)
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowNSUnitsOnDrg

Drawing Area
Units in Report
Controls whether nominal size is output at branch (tee/olet/cross) and reducer locations.
 True outputs nominal size information at branches and reducers as normal.
 False suppresses the output of nominal size information at branches and reducers.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.NominalSize

Drawing Area
Tees and Crosses

Controls the nominal size (N.S.) output at set-on tees and crosses.
 Combined displays nominal size output at set-on tees and crosses as combined.
 Separate displays nominal size output at set-on tees and crosses separately.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TeeCrossNS

Drawing Area
Insulation and Tracing

Defines settings for the representation of insulation and heat tracing.
Insulation Style
Specifies whether to show insulation alongside pipe only or alongside pipe and components.
 Alongside Pipe plots dashed insulation lines alongside pipe only, with a gap of 1 mm.
 Alongside Pipe and Components plots dashed insulation lines alongside pipe and all
Defines:
Tracing Style
 Alongside Pipe uses the default to plot chain dotted tracing lines alongside the pipe
 Alongside Pipe and Components plots chain dotted tracing lines alongside pipe and
Defines:
Heat Tracing Options

Controls heat tracing options.
 On uses heat tracing options.
 Off suppresses the use of heat tracing options.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.HeatTracingOptions

Drawing Area
Spec Breaks
Defines the appearance of specification breaks on the isometric drawing.
Enclosure
Controls the shape of the enclosure that surrounds the indication of a specification break
(specification change) on the isometric drawing.
 None suppresses the display of an enclosure around the specification break reference
on the isometric drawing.
 Square Ended displays a square-shaped box enclosure around the specification break
reference on the isometric drawing.
 Diamond Ended displays a diamond-shaped enclosure around the specification break
 Round Ended displays a round-ended box enclosure around the specification break
 Hexagonal Ended displays a hexagonally-shaped enclosure around the specification
break reference on the isometric drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpecBrkEnclosure
Representation
Specifies single or dual specification break indication boxes on the isometric drawing.
 Single indicates a single specification. Boxed message consisting of the new
specification reference pointing to the position on the pipeline where the change occurs.
 Dual indicates two specifications. Two boxed messages containing the current and new
specification references are positioned at the point on the pipeline where the change
occurs.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpecBrkRepresentation

Drawing Area
Flow Arrows
Defines settings for displaying flow arrows on pipe and in-line components. Flow arrows are
used to show the flow direction of fluid or gas in the pipeline.
Show on Pipe
Controls the use of flow arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe. Their purpose is to show
the flow direction of fluid or gas in the pipeline. The size of the flow arrow is controlled by the
Scale setting.
 True displays flow arrows on pipe on the isometric drawing.
 False suppresses the display of flow arrows on pipe.
 You can generate this type of flow arrow only if the relevant information is included in
the input pipeline data file.
 You can also use a separate type of flow arrow that is plotted alongside in-line fittings,
either as well as, or instead of, the one output on pipe.
Defines:
Option Switch -112, Pos 1-2
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowFlowArrows
Show on Components
Controls the use of flow arrows that are plotted alongside certain types of in-line
components. Their purpose is to show the fluid or gas flow direction in a pipeline.
 True displays flow arrows. This is the default setting.
 False suppresses the display of flow arrows.
Defines:
Option Switch -17, Pos 1
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowCptFlowArrows
Scale
Scales flow arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe.
Type a value in the range 5 to 15 to plot pipeline flow arrows at an alternative scale factor. A
value of 5 produces smaller arrows, whereas a value of 15 produces larger ones.
 You can generate this type of flow arrow only if the relevant information is included in
the input pipeline data file.
 You can also use a separate type of flow arrow, which is plotted alongside in-line
fittings, either as well as or instead of, the flow arrow annotation output on pipe.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FlowArrowScale

Drawing Area
Ghost Gap
Length
Controls the plotted length of a ghost gap element. A ghost gap is a physical gap on the
plotted isometric drawing that can be used when generating individual isometrics, or as a
link between related, but unconnected, pipelines or subsystems on a system isometric
drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.GhostGapDimension

Drawing Area
Alternative Texts
Nominal Size
Denotes the pipe nominal size. By setting the AText to blank, the nominal size message is
suppressed. Using the question mark (?) character determines the format used for outputting
the nominal size message. The default value is ? NS.
AText ID: -207
? Value: Pipe nominal size
$ Supported: Yes
Equipment Connection
Denotes CONNected TO where a pipeline branch end is connected to an equipment nozzle.
The default value is CONN. TO.
AText ID: -208
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Pipeline Connection
Denotes CONTinued ON at the point where a pipeline/branch end is continued onto another
drawing. Used in conjunction with END-CONNECTION type record. Also used with AText -255
(Drawing Label) to create a CONT. ON DRG 2 type message when a pipeline is split across
multiple drawings (isometric drawing area and material list overflow).For more information, see
Alternative Texts (on page 246) in Drawing Area > Text. The default value is CONT. ON.
AText ID: -209
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Continued From
Denotes CONTinued FROM. This message is plotted when a pipeline is split onto two or more
drawings, such as CONT. FROM DRG 1.
The text DRG comes from AText -255 (Drawing Label).
AText ID: -276
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Continuation Jacket
Denotes continuation of core pipe used on a jacket pipeline. The default value is CONT
JACKET.
AText ID: -557
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Continuation Core
Denotes continuation of jacket pipe on a core pipeline. The default value is CONT CORE.
AText ID: -558
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Vent Callout
Plots an indicator that points to a vent position at any open-ended pipe. It is used in conjunction
with an END-POSITION-VENT type record. The default value is VENT.
AText ID: -230
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Pipe Spec Label

Plots an identification message that points to any place in the pipe where the piping specification
changes. The name of the new specification is automatically indicted. The default value is
SPEC.
AText ID: -232
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Start Point Message

Plots a user-specified start point message on the isometric drawing. Use the special characters
listed below to output information items as part of the message:
 ? - Output the system/pipeline reference (IDF record -25 or -6)
 ?? - Output the spool.
AText ID: -235
? Value: Various
$ Supported: Yes
Drain Callout
Plots a message that points to a drain position on any open-ended pipe. Used in conjunction
with an END-POSITION-DRAIN type record. The default value is DRAIN.
AText ID: -239
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Open Callout
Produces a message at any open-ended pipe. Used in conjunction with an
END-POSITION-OPEN type record.
AText ID: -240
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Closed Callout
Produces a message at any open-ended pipe. Used in conjunction with an
END-POSITION-OPEN type record. The default setting for this AText value is blank.
AText ID: -241
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Null Callout
Produces a message at any miscellaneous pipe end. Used in conjunctions with an
END-POSITION-NULL type record. The default setting for this AText value is blank.
AText ID: -242
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Pipe Spec Change Label

Indicates a piping material specification change. The content of the PIPING-SPEC type record in
the pipeline input data file is appended AText to form a composite message.
AText ID: -286
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Insulation Spec Change Label

Indicates an insulation specification change. The content of the INSULATION-SPEC type record
in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. The
default value is INSUL.
AText ID: -290
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Tracing Spec Change Label

Indicates a tracing specification change. The content of the TRACING-SPEC type record in the
pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default
value is TRACE.
AText ID: -291
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Painting Spec Change Label

Indicates a PAINTING specification change. The content of the PAINTING-SPEC type record in
the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default
value is PAINT.
AText ID: -292
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Misc Spec 1 Change Label

Reserved for user-specified AText. The content of a MISC-SPEC1 type record in the pipeline
input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message.
AText ID: -293
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

AText ID: -294
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area

AText ID: -295
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

AText ID: -296
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

AText ID: -297
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Personnel Protection Label

Indicates personal protection type insulation. Indication symbols having the symbol key NPP.
The default value is PP.
AText ID: -349
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Reducing Elbow Label

Indicates a reducing elbow with symbol key ER** on fittings. The default value is REDUCING
ELBOW.
AText ID: -350
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Pipe Summary Ft
Indicates unit type feet in pipe centerline length region. The default value is FT.
AText ID: -360
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Pipe Summary Ft-In

Indicates unit type feet-inches in pipe centerline length region. The default value is FT-INS.
AText ID: -361
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Pipe Summary Insulation Heading

Controls the output of insulation length. The default value is blank.
AText ID: -386
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Pipe Summary Tracing Heading

Controls the output trace length. The default value is blank.
AText ID: -387
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
ATexts -400 through -411 are used in the line summary area along the bottom of the
isometric drawing and can have their values changed or made blank. If the AText value is
changed, then its associated symbol is drawn. If set to blank, then the symbol is not drawn. In
these ATexts, the inclusion of the dollar sign character ( $ ) creates a forced line feed that
results in the text being plotted over two lines.
Traced Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for traced pipe in the Line Summary area. The default value is
TRACED$PIPE.
AText ID: -400
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Insulated Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for insulated pipe in the Line Summary area. The default value is
LAGGED$PIPE.
AText ID: -401
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Support Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for supports in the Line Summary area. The default value is
PIPE$SUPPORT.
AText ID: -402
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Compression Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for compression joints in the Line Summary area. The default value is
COMPN$JOINT.
AText ID: -403
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Screwed Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for screwed joints in the Line Summary area. The default value is
SCREWED$JOINT.
AText ID: -404
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Socket Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for socket welded joints in the Line Summary area. The default value
is SOCKET$WELD.
AText ID: -405
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Field Weld Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for field welds in the Line Summary area. The default value is
FIELD$WELD.
AText ID: -406
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Shop Weld Symbol Header

Plots text with the symbol for Fabrication or Shop welds in the Line Summary area. The default
value is SHOP$WELD.
AText ID: -407
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
User Note 1
Represents any user-specified general information on the drawing frame. A typical example is
PULLED BEND RADIUS IS 3X NOMINAL PIPE BORE. No default text.
AText ID: -408
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
User Note 2
Represents any user-specified general information on the drawing frame. A typical example is
PULLED BEND RADIUS IS 3X NOMINAL PIPE BORE. No default text.
AText ID: -409
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Spool Numbers Note

Signifies how spool numbers and material list part numbers are shown on the isometric drawing.
AText ID: -410
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
A preview of the default output is shown below:
Site Connection Symbol Header

Plots the text with the symbol for site connection in the Line Summary area of the isometric
drawing.
AText ID: -411
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Detail Sketches
Defines the characteristics of detail sketches on the isometric drawing. Options are also
available for local details sketches and information notes.
The Detail Sketches style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Settings specifies the characteristics of detail sketches on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Settings (on page 229).
 Local Sketches stores the properties for local detail sketches and information notes. For
more information, see Local Sketches (on page 235).
 Alternative Texts sets AText values related to detail sketches. For more information, see
Alternative Texts (on page 236).
Settings
Specifies the characteristics of detail sketches on the isometric drawing.
Path
Defines the full path to the detail sketch folder containing SYM, DWG, or DXF data or sets
the location of a DGN .cel file (cell library). To reference a path relative to the Smart 3D
SharedContent folder, use the $SYMBOLSHARE$ macro instead of a hard-coded path.
Use the Sketch Mapping setting to specify the symbol filename.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.Path
Fixed Position
Controls positioning of detail sketches along the top of the drawing border. Select the check
box to position detail sketches left to right along top of drawing border. For normal detail
sketch placement, where sketches run right to left along the top of the drawing border, clear
the check box
This isometric drawing property is not used in the current version of the software.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.PositionFix

Drawing Area
Position
Defines the location of detail sketches on the isometric drawing.
 Default plots detail sketches along the top of the drawing. The horizontal positioning of
the detail sketches is controlled by the North arrow setting. Usually, Isogen displays the
sketches from right to left (Figure 1). However, if there is no North arrow, the sketches
are displayed from left to right (Figure 2).
 Fixed plots detail sketches along the top of the drawing from right to left, regardless of
the position of the North arrow.
 Local plots detail sketches as close as possible to the related component.
 Overflow plots overflow detail sketches to a separate sheet.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.SketchPosition
Height
Sets the height of user-generated sketches. This setting must be the same for all sketches.
Type a value (integer or decimal number).
If drawing units are set to millimeters, the value should not exceed 50 mm.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.SketchHeight

Drawing Area
Width
Sets the width of user-generated sketches. Type a value (integer or decimal number).
If you set drawing units to millimeters, the value should not exceed 50 mm.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.SketchWidth
Label Type
Specifies whether you want sketches ordered alphabetically (A, B, C...) or numerically (1, 2,
3...).
 Alpha orders sketches alphabetically.
 Number orders sketches numerically.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.LabelType

Drawing Area
Label Layer
Specifies the layer on which the label text resides. For example, the label text in Detail A is
the letter A.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.LabelLayer
Colour
Sets the drawing color for the detail sketch. This value is expressed as an integer number
representing the color number as defined in the output drawing system.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.Colour
Label X
Provides the X-coordinate of the label text, relative to the bottom left corner of a sketch.
Type the required value.
The sketch origin is always at the bottom left corner.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.LabelX
Label Y
Provides the Y-coordinate of the label text, relative to the bottom left corner of a sketch.
Type the required value.
The sketch origin is always at the bottom left corner.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.LabelY

Drawing Area
Text Font
Specifies a font corresponding to a font entry in the font information (FIF) file. Select the font
type from the list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.TextFont
Text Height
Specifies the size of the label text. Type a value (integer or real number). This setting
overrides the Text Size setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.TextHeight
Text Weight
Controls the character thickness of the cross-reference text.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.TextWeight
Note Position
Specifies the location of informational notes.
 Default plots notes along the bottom of the drawing.
 Local plots notes along the bottom of the isometric, near the reference.
 OverFlow outputs only one copy of each unique information note on a single isometric
in cases of duplicate occurrences.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.NotePosition

Drawing Area
Note Format
Specifies the format of informational notes, which refer to a pipeline, spool, or component in
the drawing.
The format of the detail sketch, information note and, drawing output, must be
consistent. If Format is set to DXF, then Note Format and Output Format must also be set
to DXF. These properties change automatically when the Output Format or Template
Format settings change.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.NoteFormat
Note Height
Specifies the height of the informational notes. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.NoteHeight
Note Width
Specifies the width of the informational notes. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches.NoteWidth

Drawing Area
Library
Opens the Detail Sketch Manager, which allows you to place parameters on the selected
detail sketch so that correct relevant values, such as weld numbers, part number, and
angles, are displayed on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Configure a detail
sketch.
You must use the Path property to set the full path location to the detail
sketch folder.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.DetailSketches

Drawing Area
Local Sketches
Local Sketches
Stores the properties for local detail sketches and information notes.
 Identifier specifies the detail sketch or Information note string identifier. The following
are examples:
 Detail Sketch - SK1.dxf
 Information Note - note_N.dxf or note_S.dxf
 For AutoCAD and SmartSketch, the file format extension must be shown in the ID,
such as SK1.dxf or SK1.igr.
 For MicroStation, specify just the name of the sketch as found in the graphic cell
library, as in SK1.
 Inclusion of _N - as in GenNote_N.dxf or GenNote_N - as part of the information
note name signifies a general note, which is output on every sheet.
 Inclusion of _S - as in SpecNote_S.dxf or SpecNote_S - signifies a specific note,
which is only output on the sheet on which the component having this particular
note attached is output.
 Height specifies a single value for the height of the detail sketch or information note in
millimeters.
 Width defines the width of the detail sketch/information note. Type a single value in
millimeters.
 Label X specifies the horizontal cross-reference position measured from the bottom left
corner of the detail sketch in millimeters.
 Label Y specifies the vertical cross-reference position measured from the bottom left
corner of the detail sketch in millimeters.
 Text Height sets the text height to be used. Type a value in millimeters or inches,
depending on the setting of the drawing units.
The value that displays on the Local Sketches icon is a count of how many
attributes have been defined for output in the user-defined cut list. The example below
indicates that three attributes are currently defined.

Drawing Area
Alternative Texts
Equipment Detail Label

Used on isometric drawings in conjunction with detail sketches on equipment. The default value
is DETAIL ?.
AText ID: -442
? Value: Detail Identifier
$ Supported: Yes
Detail Sketch Label

Provides a cross-reference message for detail sketches. This AText appears on the drawing
part of the isometric drawing. The sketch identifying number or letter is edited in by the software
at the ? position. The default value is SEE DETAIL ?.
AText ID: -456
Detail Sketch
? Value:
Identifier
$ Supported: Yes
General Note Suffix

Denotes a delimiter/identifier in general note names. The default value is _N.
AText ID: -541
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
General Sketch Suffix

Denotes a delimiter/identifier in general sketch names. The default value is _S.
AText ID: -542
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Revision Clouds
Controls the output of revision changes on the isometric drawing.
The Revision Clouds style group contains the option groups listed below.
 Settings sets properties that control the output of revision changes. For more information,
see Settings (on page 239).
 Identifiers sets property that control the output of revision identifiers on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Identifiers (on page 241).
Settings
Sets properties that control the output of revision changes. Revision output is triggered only
when the component and pipeline revisions match. During isometric drawing generation, the
software considers each component individually. When a revision match occurs, the component
is highlighted on the isometric drawing.
Enabled
Controls the output of the revision block to the Data Definition (DDF) file. When the
component revision matches the pipeline revision, the revision output is triggered.
 True outputs the revision block to the DDF.
 False suppresses output of the revision block.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.Enabled
Revisions Highlighted
Specifies which components are highlighted and the corresponding revision identifier is
output on the isometric drawing.
 Current highlights only those components with a revision attribute that matches the
pipeline revision. This is the default setting.
 Multiple highlights all components that have a revision attribute and displays the
corresponding revision identifier of each.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.RevisionOutput
Layer
Controls on what layer the revision box is placed. Type the number that corresponds to the
layer in the drawing system. The default setting is 0.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.Layer

Drawing Area
Fill Colour
Controls the color of the revision box. The default setting is the color associated with the
Layer attribute.
Type the index number that corresponds to the color defined in the drawing system.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.Colour
Distance
Controls the distance from the component centerline to the revision cloud.
Type a value in 1/10th millimeters. The default setting is 50.
This value should not exceed the setting of a standard leg length.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.Distance
Colour
Controls the fill color of the revision box when Enclosure Style is set to Polygon. The
default setting is the color associated with the Layer attribute.
Type the index number that corresponds to the color defined in the drawing system. For
example, for AutoCAD you can type 1 = Red and 2 = Yellow.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.Colour
Minimum Cloud Arc

Defines the minimum pitch of the cloud enclosure.
Type a value in 1/10 mm. The default setting is 20.
This option is required only when you set Enclosure Style to Cloud.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.MinCloudArc

Drawing Area
Maximum Cloud Arc

Defines the maximum pitch of the cloud enclosure.
Type a value in 1/10 mm. The default setting is 60.
This option is required only when you set Enclosure Style to Cloud.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.MaxCloudArc
Enclosure Style
Controls the output of the enclosure type that surrounds the revision block to the Data
Definition file
 Polygon highlights revised components with a polygon. This is the default setting.
 Cloud highlights revised components with a cloud.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.EnclosureType

Drawing Area
Identifiers
Sets properties that control the output of revision identifiers within a user-specified enclosure
Enabled
Controls the output of revision identifier text on the isometric drawing. To output the text,
select the check box. By default, this setting is turned off.
Using this setting requires that you also select Drawings > Revisions >
Enabled.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawings.Revisions.TextIdentifier
Enclosure
Specifies the shape of the enclosure that surrounds the record identifier output text. The
default setting is Triangle.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.TextEnclosure
Height
Specifies the revision identifier text height. Type a value in 1/10th millimeters. By default, the
height of revision identifier text is the same as the drawing text height.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Revisions.TextHeight

Drawing Area
Text
Controls all aspects of the fonts that appear on the isometric drawing.
The Text style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Settings defines the type of font and its size (including weight) for text that is output on the
isometric drawing. For more information, see Settings (on page 243).
 Static Fonts controls the use of the Isogen font information (FIF) file. For more information,
see Static Fonts (on page 245).
 Dynamic Fonts defines the parameters of the user-defined fonts that are available for
output on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Dynamic Fonts (on page 245).
 Alternative Texts sets AText values related to the fonts that appear on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 246).
Settings
Defines the type of font and its size (including weight) for text that is output on the isometric
drawing.
Size
Specifies the size of the text characters on the drawing.
 Small (2.1 mm) outputs small characters, 2.1 mm high.
 Medium (2.5 mm) outputs medium-sized characters, 2.4 mm high. This is the default
setting.
 Large (2.8 mm) outputs large-sized characters, 2.8 mm high.
 XLarge (3.5 mm) outputs extra-large characters, 3.5 mm high.
 XXLarge (4.2 mm) outputs extra-large characters, 4.2 mm high.
 XXXLarge (4.9 mm) outputs extra-large characters, 4.9 mm high.
 Or User outputs characters with a height defined by Custom Size.
Title block text, which is always output using large characters (2.8 mm) and
material list text, which is controlled by properties of the material list object, are not affected
by this setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TextSize

Drawing Area
Custom Size
Specifies a user-defined size to 1/10mm precision. Type a value in the units shown. Values
must be between 1mm and 9.9mm.
Use this option only if Drawing Area.Text.Settings.Size is set to User.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TextSize
Font
Defines the font that Isogen uses when outputting text on the isometric drawing. Use the
Font list to select the font type.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TextFont
Width
Specifies the character width when using a fixed-width font.
Type the value required (in the range 10-99) in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TextWidth
Weight
Specifies the thickness of the text.
Type a value as an integer in the range 10-99 in millimeters or inches
Use this option only if Size is set to User.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TextWeight
Isometric
Controls the output of dimension text and messages.
Select the check box to place dimension text and messages along a section of pipe in
isometric projection (oblique angle\slanted text). Text oblique angle is adjusted to be parallel
to the dimension standout direction. Isogen attempts to set a vertical dimension standout for
horizontal sections of pipeline wherever practical.
This feature is only available for .dxf format output styles generated using the
piping object data (POD) file interface.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.IsometricText

Drawing Area
Static Fonts
Controls the use of the Isogen font information (FIF) file. If required, it can be used to turn off the
use of fonts in the Isogen output files. By default, there is always a path to the supplementary
fonts file. If one does not exist, for example, you delete it, it is recreated automatically. However,
if you select Enabled, this setting is persisted.
When importing a style, the Enabled property is turned off before import starts, and
only resets if there was previously a FONT-INFORMATION-FILE (or IDF -152 record) reference
in the imported style.
Enabled
Controls whether fonts are enabled. By default, this property is turned on.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Fonts.Enabled
Path
Specifies the Isogen font information (FIF) file. Type the full path location and filename of
the file. Alternatively, click Browse , and navigate to the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Fonts.Path

Drawing Area
Dynamic Fonts
Defines the parameters of the user-defined fonts that are available for output on the isometric
drawing.
Dynamic Fonts
Controls the output of user-specified dynamic fonts on the isometric drawing.
 Number specifies the Isogen font number. This value is used to cross-reference Isogen
control options to determine which fonts should be used on the isometric drawing. The
value that you enter must be 3 digits and cannot exist in the Isogen font information
(FIF) file (Fontstd.fif). The first 300 numbers are reserved exclusively for use in the FIF
file. As such, the value you enter must be 301 or higher.
 Name specifies the name of the user-specified font.
 The TrueType font name that you type enter must already be installed on the
computer. Type the name of the font exactly as it appears in the C:\Windows\Fonts
folder.
 To view a list of installed fonts, Open the Control Panel, and double-click Fonts.
 Correction Factor specifies the factor by which the width of characters are adjusted so
that the font neither falls short of nor overlaps the boxes/gaps that are provided for the
text on the drawing. The default setting is 1. Typically, this value is adjusted up or down
by 1 or 2 after viewing the isometric drawing output.
 AutoCAD Style Name specifies the AutoCAD text style name.
 Microstation Number specifies the MicroStation-specific index number of the required
font. This option is required only if you want to view the correct font on the screen.
 Multibyte Width specifies the factor by which the width of all multibyte characters are
adjusted so that the font neither falls short of nor overlaps the boxes/gaps that are
provided for the text on the drawing. The default setting is 2. Typically, this value is
adjusted up or down by 1 or 2 after viewing the isometric drawing output.
The value that displays on the Dynamic Fonts icon is a count of how many
attributes have been defined for output in the user-defined cut list. The example below
indicates that three attributes are currently defined.

Drawing Area
Alternative Texts
ATexts -244 to -249 are used to output directions in conjunction with other ATexts on
items that carry a direction setting on the component record in the pipeline input data file. The
appropriate direction as defined by ATexts -244 to -249 is appended to the specific fitting text to
make a composite message, such as DIAL FACE WEST.
X Coordinate
Labels the positive X coordinate. The default value is E.
AText ID: -201
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Y Coordinate
Labels the positive Y coordinate. The default value is N.
AText ID: -202
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
-X Coordinate
Labels the negative X coordinate. The default value is W.
AText ID: -203
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
-Y Coordinate
Labels the negative Y coordinate. The default value is S.
AText ID: -204
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Z Coordinate
Labels the positive Z coordinate. The default value is EL+.
AText ID: -205
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
-Z Coordinate
Labels the negative Z coordinate. The default value is EL-.
AText ID: -206
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Degree Symbol
Produces a software-generated degree ( º ) symbol, which is output at all angle indicators
requiring a degree symbol (bends, falls, and so on).
AText ID: -223
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Primary +Z Label
Appends a primary direction as part of a composite message. The default value is UP.
For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 98) in Drawing Area > Piping
Components.
AText ID: -244
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Primary -Z Label
Appends a primary direction as part of a composite message. Used in conjunction with ATexts
-243 (PRIMARY FLAT DIRECTION), -278 (DIAL FACE CALLOUT), -280 (TAPPING), -281
(SLIP PAINT CALLOUT), and -282 (SIGHT GLASS CALLOUT).The default value is DOWN.
Components.
AText ID: -245
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Primary +Y Label
(SLIP PAINT CALLOUT), and -282 (SIGHT GLASS CALLOUT). The default value is NORTH.
Components.
AText ID: -246
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Primary -Y Label
(SLIP PAINT CALLOUT), and -282 (SIGHT GLASS CALLOUT). The default value is SOUTH.
Components.
AText ID: -247
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Primary +X Label
(SLIP PAINT CALLOUT), and -282 (SIGHT GLASS CALLOUT). The default value is EAST.
Components.
AText ID: -248
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Primary -X Label
(SLIP PAINT CALLOUT), and -282 (SIGHT GLASS CALLOUT). The default value is WEST.
Components.
AText ID: -249
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
Drawing Label
Used in conjunctions with AText -256 to generate a drawing identifier of the form DRG n OF n in
cases where a pipeline is split into multiple isometric drawings. The default value is DRG.
AText ID: -255
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Drawing Count Label

Used in conjunctions with AText -256 to generate a drawing identifier of the form DRG n OF n in
cases where a pipeline is split into multiple isometric drawings. The default value is OF.
AText ID: -256
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Material List Separator

Acts as a separator between the pipeline reference and the spool identifier in the spool isometric
drawing identifier.
AText ID: -274
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
System Reference Label

Indicates the system reference in a printed material list. This has the system reference
automatically appended. The default value is SYSTEM REF.
AText ID: -336
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
View Direction Label

Labels the view direction arrow. The default label for combined, fabrication, erection, and normal
spool isometrics is N, while U is the default label for flat spool isometric drawings. If set as blank,
the viewpoint direction arrow is suppressed.
AText ID: -339
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Edge of Pipe Indicator

Used to indicate edge of pipe dimensions. The default value is EOP.
AText ID: -439
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Bottom of Pipe Callout

Used on the isometric drawing in conjunction with bottom of pipe text. The default value is
B.O.P.
AText ID: -450
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Split Failure Message

Indicates that an unacceptable drawing split point has been found in tube. When used, the
message is output in the top left corner of each affected drawing. The default value is
UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT.
AText ID: -452
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
NS Metric Units
Indicates the nominal size for metric bore units. For example, if set to mm, the output is 32mm
NS. If set to Blank, the output is 32NS.
AText ID: -458
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Cut Out Label

Shows the location of where the material should be removed. The default value is CUT OUT?.
AText ID: -477
? Value: Unknown
$ Supported: Yes
Unique Part Number Delimiter

Acts as a delimiter between the material list cross-reference identifier and the suffix that is
added as a unique component identifier in the style of Identifier (3.1, 3.2, 3.3, as opposed to 3).
The default value is the period symbol ( . ).
AText ID: -539
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Additional Material Separator

Acts as a separator between part numbers when outputting dual numbers for associated
additional material identification on the plotted isometric drawing. The default value is /.
AText ID: -545
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Drawing Area
I01 Extension Character

Acts as the first character of the drawing output file extension (used in conjunction with Drawing
Manager > Drawing File > Use I01 Style). The default value is the pipe character ( | ).
AText ID: -546
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Underline Character
Acts as an character. The default value is the underline character ( _ ).
AText ID: -547
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

SECTION 4
Dimensions
Sets properties that control the display and format of dimension and coordinate data on the
isometric drawing.
 The Piping Components and Features style group is available only for piping isometric
drawings. Likewise, the cable tray and HVAC style groups (Cable Tray Components and
Features and Duct Components Features) are available only when a cable tray or HVAC
isometric drawing style, such as Iso_CableTray or Iso_HVAC, is active.
The Dimensions category includes the style groups listed below. Every style group is further
 Dimension Style organizes options groups that specify the dimension styles that are output
on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Dimension Style (on page 256).
 Piping Components and Features organizes options groups that control the
representation of component dimensions on the isometric drawing. For more information,
see Piping Components and Features (on page 270).
 Cable Tray Components and Features organizes options groups that control the
representation of cable tray component dimensions on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Cable Tray Components and Features (on page 289).
 Coordinates organizes options groups that control the representation of coordinate data on
the isometric drawing. For more information, see Coordinates (on page 312).
 Display Format organizes options groups that control the display of metric and imperial
dimensions and angle data on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Display
Format (on page 319).
 Skews and Falls organizes options groups that control the representation of such things as
skews, falls, slopes, callouts, and tolerances on the isometric drawing. For more information,
see Skews and Falls (on page 327).
 Reference Dimensions organizes options groups that control the display of reference
dimensions on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Reference Dimensions (on
page 342).
 Reference Planes organizes options groups that define reference planes for the Reference
Plane Definition file (RPDF). These properties provide the ability to reference grids for
coordinate callouts on isometric drawings. For more information, see Reference Planes (on
page 347).

Dimensions
Dimension Style
Controls the dimension styles that are output on the isometric drawing.
The Dimension Style style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Standard Dimensions sets standard dimensions. For more information, see Standard
Dimensions (on page 256).
 Overall Dimensions sets overall dimensions. For more information, see Overall
Dimensions (on page 257).
 Standouts controls the format of the dimension line standout. For more information, see
Standouts (on page 259).
 Dimension Location controls the location of the dimension text in relation to the dimension
line. For more information, see Dimension Location (on page 262).
 Dual Units sets the units of measure output. For more information, see Dual Units (on page
263).
 Additional Allowance sets the display of additional allowances on the isometric drawing.
For more information, see Additional Allowance (on page 264).
 Suppress Branch Dimensions controls the display of branch dimensions on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Suppress Branch Dimensions (on page 265).
 Vertical Dimensions sets the representation of vertical pipe, cable tray, or duct dimensions.
For more information, see Vertical Dimensions (on page 267).
The type of vertical dimensions that this property controls is determined by the active
isometric drawing style: pipeline, cable tray, or HVAC.

Dimensions
Standard Dimensions
Sets standard dimensions.
Format
Controls the dimension format plotted on the isometric drawing.
Click Show to display graphical representations of the options listed below, and then
select the appropriate setting.
 Basic plots ordinary string dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference
dimensions on the isometric drawing.
 Combined Erec/Offsh - Basic plots ordinary string dimensions. Do not dimension
separately erection pipe fittings (bends, elbows, tees, and so forth), support/message
dimensions and reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
 Composite plots composite dimensions together with support/message dimensions and
reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
 Combined Erec/Offsh - Composite plots composite dimensions. Do not dimension
separately erection pipe fittings (bends, elbows, tees, and so forth), support/message
dimensions and reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
 Support plots only support/message and reference dimensions on the isometric
drawing.
 Reference Only plots only reference dimensions on the isometric drawing. Suppress all
other dimensions.
 Full String plots full string dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference
dimensions on the isometric drawing. All components are dimensioned individually.
 Pipe Only plots pipe dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference
dimensions on the isometric drawing. Suppress fitting dimensions.This setting is
available only for piping isometric drawings.
 Cable Tray Only plots cable tray dimensions, support/message dimensions, and
reference dimensions on the isometric drawing. Suppress fitting dimensions. This
setting is available only for cable tray isometric drawings.
 Duct Only plots duct dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference
dimensions on the isometric drawing. Suppress fitting dimensions. This setting is
available only for HVAC isometric drawings.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.Format

Dimensions
Overall Dimensions
Sets overall dimensions.
Style
Controls the use of overall dimensions. You can specify whether overall dimensions are
plotted, and if they are, which type.
 None plots no overall dimensions.
 Across Branches plots overall dimensions across branches (tees, olets and crosses).
 Stop At Branches plots overall dimensions that stop at branches.

Dimensions
 Valves / Across Branches plots overall dimensions to valve centers and across
branches.
 Valves / Stop At Branches plots overall dimensions to valve centers, stopping at

branches.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.Overall
Break at Spools
Controls the output of overall dimensions across spool breaks.
 True outputs overall dimensions across fabrication items only.
 False outputs overall dimensions across component categories.
Overall dimensions to valve centers are only available to valves that have a
spindle.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.OverallAcrossFabItemsOnly

Dimensions
Standouts
Use text size (2.8 mm)
Use the text size of 2.8 mm. When you select this property, Composite Standout and
Overall are not available.
Composite Standout
Controls dimension line standout distances for the conditions listed below:
 String and composite dimensions that are normally plotted as the middle layer of
multi-layer dimensions.
 Dimensioned messages, support dimensions and reference dimensions on the inner
layer, but only when Dimensions > Piping Components and Features > Supports >
Standout is not set. For cable tray and HVAC drawings, you must set Dimensions >
Cable Tray Components and Features > Supports > Standout or Dimensions >
Duct Components and Features > Supports > Standout, respectively.
 Overall dimensions on the outer layer, but only when Overall is not set.
Composite Standout is available only if Use text size (2.8 mm) is not selected.
In the Composite Standout box, type a value that equals the required standout distance for
string and composite dimensions on the middle layer in mm or inches. In the example
below, Composite Standout is set to 18, so all dimension lines are 18 mm away from the
pipe.
When you set the value to 0 (zero), which is the default, the standard dimension line
standouts listed below are used depending on the Text Size setting:
 Small
 String / Composite Dimension Standout = 12 mm.
 Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 6 mm.
 Overall Dimension Standout = 18 mm.
 Medium
 String / Composite Dimension Standout = 1 4mm.

Dimensions
 Large
 XLarge
 XXLarge
 XXXLarge
 String / Composite Dimension standout = 22 mm.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.StandoutComposite
 The software ignores values greater than or equal to 11 mm and substitutes the
appropriate standard dimension line standout distance.
 The software uses values greater than 11 mm to set the dimension line standout
distance for string and composite dimensions on the middle layer. The inner
dimension layer for dimensioned messages, Support dimensions and reference
dimensions are then be set to 0.5 x this distance, while the outer layer overall
dimensions is set to 1.5 x this distance.

Dimensions
Overall
Controls the overall dimension standout in millimeters. Overall is only available if Use text
size (2.8 mm) is not selected.
Type a value in the range 0 and 99.
For no overall dimension standout, type 0.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.StandoutOverall
Preferred Dimension Standout

Positions the determined standout dimensions, if possible. Otherwise, the software uses
normal standout rules.
 Default Dimension uses normal standout rules. This is the default setting.
 Vertical Dimension positions the standout dimension vertically, if possible.
 Horizontal Dimension positions the standout dimension horizontally, if possible.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawings.Dimensions.StandoutDimension

Dimensions
Dimension Location
Controls the location of the dimension text in relation to the dimension line.
Above Line
Controls whether the dimension line is broken to make space for the dimension characters.
 True positions the text on top of dimension line.
 False inserts the text into dimension line.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.USAStyle

Dimensions
Dual Units
Sets the units of measure output.
Double Units
Controls whether measurements are output in both imperial and metric units, or just one.
 True outputs measurements in both imperial and metric units.
 False outputs measurements in one type of unit only. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.DoubleUnits

Dimensions
Additional Allowance
Sets the display of additional allowances on the isometric drawing.
Format
Controls how additional allowances are displayed alongside or as part of dimensions.
 Suppress displays no additional allowances.
 Dim + Allowance displays the dimension plus the additional allowance.
 Dim Includes Allowance adds the allowance to dimension. Select this setting only if
you are using a Spool isometric drawing style
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.AdditionalAllowanceFormat

Dimensions
Suppress Branch Dimensions

Controls the display of branch dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Nominal Size
Specifies a branch bore limit to suppress dimensions.
Type a value in the range 0-999 to suppress the dimensions of branches having a bore
equal to or less than the defined value. Value is in 1/16th of an inch or mm, depending on
the bore units. For example, the branch in the example below has a pipe bore of less than
the value stated in Nominal Size. Consequently, it is not dimensioned.
 To dimension all pipe, type 0.

 Nominal Size works in conjunction with Component Count, if defined.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.BranchBoreLimit
Width/Diameter
Specifies a branch bore limit to suppress dimensions. This property is specific to HVAC
isometric drawings.
equal to or less than the defined value. Value is in 1/16th of an inch or mm, depending on
the bore units. For example, the branch in the example below has a pipe bore of less than
the value stated in Nominal Size. Consequently, it is not dimensioned.
 To dimension all pipe, type 0.

 Nominal Size works in conjunction with Component Count, if defined.
Defines:

Dimensions
Width
Specifies a branch width limit to suppress dimensions. This property is specific to cable tray
isometric drawings.
equal to or less than the defined value.
Defines:
Component Count
Controls the dimensioning of branches based on the number of components. Branches with
a specified number of components are un-dimensioned.
Type a value in the range 0-99 to suppress dimensions for branches having a number of
components equal to or less than the specified value. Gasket and bolt entries are counted
as components. For example, the branch in the example below has six components: a
weldolet, a weld neck flange, two gaskets, a valve and a blind flange. In this example,
Component Count has been set to 7, so the branch has not been dimensioned.
 To dimension all branches, type 0.

 Component Count works in conjunction with Nominal Size, if defined.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.BranchCPTLimit
 Any branch containing pipe (100 record), fixed length pipe (101 record), or pipe block (103
record) does not have branch dimension suppression applied to it.
 Branch dimension suppression using this property does not apply to tapped branches.
 Nominal Size and Component Count work independently of each other or together,
depending upon your requirements.

Dimensions
Vertical Dimensions
Sets the representation of vertical pipe, cable tray, or duct<SP3DEnd) dimensions.
The type of vertical dimensions that this property controls is determined by the active
Style
Controls how vertical pipe positions are indicated on the isometric drawing.
 Normal displays normal vertical pipe, cable tray, or duct dimensions, with elevations at
intersection points when the level changes.
 Suppressed suppresses all vertical pipe, cable tray, or duct dimensions, replaced by
elevations in the form of text messages at all positions where dimensions would
normally be output.

Dimensions
 Elevation displays vertical dimensions and elevations at all normal dimensioning

positions.
Defines:
Option Switch - 119
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.VertOption

Dimensions
Piping Components and Features

Defines the representation of component dimensions on the isometric drawing.
The Piping Components and Features style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Valves and Instruments controls dimensioning of valves and straight through instruments
(that have spindles) to their center points rather than to their ends. For more information, see
Valves and Instruments (on page 271).
 Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves controls the representation of dimensions for angle, 3-way, and
4-way valves on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves
(on page 272).
 Supports sets the representation of dimensions for supports on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Supports (on page 289).
 Set on Tees and Tapped Branches in Pipe controls the representation of dimensions for
set-on tees and tapped branches on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Set on
Tees and Tapped Branches in Pipe (on page 275).
 Tap Branches sets the representation of dimensions for tapped branches on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Tap Branches (on page 294).
 Tap Headers sets the representation of dimensions for tap headers on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Tap Headers (on page 295).
 Teed Bends and Elbows sets the representation of dimensions for teed bends and elbows
on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Teed Bends and Elbows (on page 280).
 Pulled (Pipe) Bends sets the representation of dimensions for pulled bends on the
isometric drawing. For more information, see Pulled (Pipe) Bends (on page 281).
 Gaskets sets the representation of dimensions for gaskets on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Gaskets (on page 281).
 Welds sets the representation of weld dimensions on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Welds (on page 283).
 Penetration Plates the representation of dimensions for penetration plates on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Penetration Plates (on page 285).
 Jacketed Pipe the representation of dimensions for jacketed pipe on the isometric drawing.
For more information, see Jacketed Pipe (on page 286).
 Curved Pipe the representation of dimensions for curved pipe on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Curved Pipe (on page 288).

Dimensions
Valves and Instruments

Valves and straight through instruments, that have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to
their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions.
Click Show to display graphical representations of the options listed below, and then specify
the appropriate settings. Select the valve, and then use the left arrow ( ) and right arrow (
) to move the selected valve between the To End or To Centre columns, depending on
your project requirements. In the example below, compression, socket weld, flanged, butt weld,
and plain end valves will be dimensioned to their ends. Hygienic and screwed end valves are
dimensioned to their center points.
Limit
Specifies the bore limit. Type a value in the range 0-999.
If you set Limit and the valve is above this limit, the software generates end
dimensions.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.ValveLlimit

Dimensions
Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves

Sets the representation of dimensions for angle, 3-way, and 4-way valves on the isometric
drawing.
Non Linear Valves

Produces arrowed dimensions for angle, 3-way, and 4-way valve, and instrument legs.
Otherwise, the software prints a message.
 True dimensions angle, 3-way, and 4-way valves and instruments using arrowed
dimensions.
 False dimensions angle, 3-way, and 4-way valves and instruments using a message.
This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.NonLinearValves

Dimensions
Supports
Sets the representation of dimensions for supports on the isometric drawing.
Support Dimension Options

Provides settings that specify how support dimensions are output on the isometric drawing.
 Don't show support dimensions
 Don't show supports or support dimensions
 Dimension supports with other components
 Dimension supports separately
The properties listed below display only when you select Dimension supports
separately.
Format
 String dimensions supports in string format.
 Overall dimensions supports in overall format.

Dimensions
As Pipe Dimensions
Controls on which side of the pipeline supports are drawn.
 True draws support dimensions on the same side of pipeline as the normal dimensions.
 False draws support dimensions on the opposite side of the pipeline to the normal
dimensions. When As Pipe Dimensions is set to False, the software ignores any
distance set by Standout.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SuppDimAsDim
Standout
Specifies the support dimension standout.
Type a value in the range 0 and 99. To set no support dimension line stand-out distance,
type 0 (the default setting). This software default is used for all support dimensions.
The software ignores this property when As Pipe Dimensions is set to False.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SuppStandOut

Dimensions
To Centre
Controls whether support dimensioning obeys the same rules as centerline dimensioning.
 True obeys the same rules as centerline pipe dimensioning.
 False obeys regular string/overall values.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SuppDimToCentre
Options
Defines selective support dimensioning.
 All dimensions all supports.
 Fabrication dimensions only fabrication supports.
 Erection dimensions only erection supports. The example below shows only one of two
supports dimensioned. The support that is dimensioned has its category set to
Erection.
 Offshore dimensions only offshore supports.

 Erection and Offshore dimensions only erection and offshore supports.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SuppOptions

Dimensions
Set on Tees and Tapped Branches in Pipe

Sets the representation of dimensions for set-on tees and tapped branches on the isometric
drawing.

pipe.

Dimensions
Defines:

Dimensions
Tap Branches
Sets the representation of dimensions for tapped branches on the isometric drawing. A tapped
branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point.
Tap on Pipe
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on pipe-type components, such as elbows,
tees, and pipe.
point.
 Pipe Only turns off tapped branch dimensions, except for those on pipe and pipe-type
components.
Defines:

Dimensions
Tap on Component
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on actual fitting components, such as valves
and flanges.
point.
 Full displays dimensions for tapped branches as set for the main pipeline.
 Pipe Only displays dimensions only for pipes and pipe-type components (elbows, tees,
reducers, and so forth).
Defines:

Dimensions
Tap Headers
Sets the representation of dimensions for tap headers on the isometric drawing. A tapped
Tap on Pipe Fittings

Controls the dimensioning of tapping points on pipe-type components, such as elbows/teed
 None suppresses dimensioning of tapped branches on pipe fittings.
 Full dimensions tapped branches on pipe fittings.
Defines:

Dimensions
Teed Bends and Elbows

Sets the representation of dimensions for teed bends and elbows on the isometric drawing.
Teed Bend Branch

Controls the dimensioning of tee bend/elbows.
 Connection dimensions tee bend/elbows from connection point.
 Centre-Line Intersection dimensions tee bend/elbows from centerline intersection
point.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TeedBendBranchDimension
Pulled (Pipe) Bends

Sets the representation of dimensions for pulled bends on the isometric drawing.
Show Separate
Controls how bends are dimensioned.
 True plots separate dimensions for the pipe and bend sections of pulled bends.
 False plots combined dimensions for the pipe and bend sections of pulled bends. This
is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.SeparatePulledBends

Dimensions
Gaskets
Sets the representation of dimensions for gaskets on the isometric drawing.
Show
Specifies gasket dimensions. You can choose not to show gasket dimensions, to include the
dimension with the component, or to treat the dimension separately.
 None suppresses gasket dimensions.
Gasket thicknesses are not included. The component dimension is indicated

by the presence of two leader lines.
 Included includes gasket dimensions with the component.
 Gasket thicknesses are included. The component dimension is indicated by the

presence of only single leader lines.
 The length of the valve has now increased by the thickness of the gaskets (2 mm in
this case) either side.

Dimensions
 Separate dimensions gaskets separately.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.Gaskets
Precision
Controls precise dimensioning of gaskets.
 1 mm outputs gasket dimensions to the nearest millimeters.
 0.1 mm outputs gasket dimensions to the nearest 1/10th millimeter
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.GasketDimPrecision

Dimensions
Welds
Sets the representation of weld dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Show
Controls the dimensioning of welds.
 True enables the dimensioning of welds.
 False suppresses the dimensioning of welds.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.WeldDimensioning
Accuracy
Allows welds to be dimensioned to the nearest 10th millimeter.
 Nearest mm dimensions welds to the nearest millimeter.
 Nearest 10th mm dimensions welds to the nearest 10th millimeter. If the decimal place
value is zero, the dimension is output in whole millimeters.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.WeldDimensionAccuracy
Fab Welds in Pipe

Controls dimensioning of fabrication welds in pipe.
 Show dimensions controls the display of dimensions to the fabrication weld. To show
dimension to the fabrication weld, select the check box.

Dimensions
 Suppress dimensions suppresses dimensioning to the fabrication weld. Clear the

check box to suppress dimensioning.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.FabWeldsInPipe

Defines:

Dimensions
Penetration Plates
Sets the representation of dimensions for penetration plates on the isometric drawing.
Pipes
Controls the dimensioning of pipes passing through penetration plates.
 Dimension From Adjacent Plate Face dimensions pipes passing through penetration
plates from the adjacent plate face.
 Dimension From Same Plate Face dimensions pipes passing through penetration
plates dimensioned from the same plate face.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.PipesThroughPenetrationPlates

Dimensions
Jacketed Pipe
Sets the representation of dimensions for jacketed pipe on the isometric drawing.
Style
Controls the dimensioning used for jacketed pipework on the isometric drawing.
 Full displays full jacket dimensioning.
 Minimal suppresses jacketed dimensioning.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.JacketDimensioning

Dimensions
Curved Pipe
Sets the representation of dimensions for curved pipe on the isometric drawing.
Style
Controls the dimensioning of curved pipe.
 Message outputs curved pipe dimensions as a message.
 Standard outputs curved pipe dimensions as a standard dimension.
 Suppress outputs curved pipe dimensions.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CurvedPipeDimensioning
Threshold
Defines the minimum radius at which bends are output as curved pipe on the isometric
drawing. Type a value in the range 0-99.
Curved pipe can be drawn only in primary planes.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CurveThreshold
Angle Style
 Message outputs curved pipe angles as a message.
 With dimension outputs curved pipe angles as part of dimensions.
 Suppress suppresses curved pipe angles.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CurvedPipeAngleStyle
Radius Style
 Message outputs curved pipe radii as a message.
 Suppress suppresses curved pipe radii.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CurvedPipeRadiusStyle

Dimensions
Cable Tray Components and Features

The Cable Tray Components and Features style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Set on Tees and Tapped Branches the representation of dimensions for set-on tees and
tapped branches on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Set on Tees and
Tapped Branches (on page 293).
 Pulled Bends sets the representation of dimensions for pulled bends on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Pulled Bends (on page 296).

Dimensions
Supports

separately.
Format

Dimensions
As Cable Tray Dimensions

Controls on which side of the cable tray supports are drawn.
 True draws support dimensions on the same side of cable tray as the normal
dimensions.
 False draws support dimensions on the opposite side of the cable tray to the normal
dimensions. When you set this option to False, the software ignores any distance set by
Standout.
Defines:
To Centre
Defines:
Options
Erection.

Defines:

Dimensions
Standout
The software ignores this property when As Cabletray Dimensions is set to
False.
Defines:

Dimensions
Set on Tees and Tapped Branches

drawing.

cable tray.
Defines:

Dimensions
Tap Branches
Tap on Cable Tray

Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on cable tray-type components, such as
elbows, tees, and cable trays.
 Cable Tray Only turns off tapped branch dimensions, except for those on cable tray
and cable tray-type components.
Defines:
Tap on Component
point.

Dimensions
 Cable Tray Only displays dimensions for cable trays and similar components (elbows,
tees, reducers, and so forth) only.
Defines:

Dimensions
Tap Headers
Tap on Fittings
Controls the dimensioning of tapping points on cable tray-type components, such as
elbows/teed elbows, bends/teed bends, tees, and crosses. A tapped branch is a collection
of components attached to a connection tapping point.
Defines:

Dimensions
Pulled Bends
Show Separate
Defines:

Dimensions
Duct Components and Features

The Duct Components and Features style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Valves and Instruments controls dimensioning of valves and straight through instruments
(that have spindles) to their center points rather than to their ends. For more information, see
Valves and Instruments (on page 271).
 Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves controls the representation of dimensions for angle, 3-way, and
4-way valves on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves
(on page 272).
 Set on Tees and Tapped Branches in Duct the representation of dimensions for set-on
tees and tapped branches on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Set on Tees
and Tapped Branches in Duct (on page 304).
 Pulled Bends sets the representation of dimensions for pulled bends on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Pulled Bends (on page 296).
 Gaskets sets the representation of dimensions for gaskets on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Gaskets (on page 281).

Dimensions
Valves and Instruments

Valves and straight through instruments, that have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to
their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions.
Click Show to display graphical representations of the options listed below, and then specify
the appropriate settings. Select the valve, and then use the left arrow ( ) and right arrow (
) to move the selected valve between the To End or To Centre columns, depending on
your project requirements. In the example below, compression, socket weld, flanged, butt weld,
and plain end valves will be dimensioned to their ends. Hygienic and screwed end valves are
dimensioned to their center points.
Limit
Specifies the bore limit. Type a value in the range 0-999.
If you set Limit and the valve is above this limit, the software generates end
dimensions.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.ValveLlimit

Dimensions
Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves

Sets the representation of dimensions for angle, 3-way, and 4-way valves on the isometric
drawing.
Non Linear Valves

Produces arrowed dimensions for angle, 3-way, and 4-way valve, and instrument legs.
Otherwise, the software prints a message.
 True dimensions angle, 3-way, and 4-way valves and instruments using arrowed
dimensions.
 False dimensions angle, 3-way, and 4-way valves and instruments using a message.
This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.NonLinearValves

Dimensions
Supports

separately.
Format

Dimensions
As Duct Dimensions
Controls on which side of the duct supports are drawn.
 True draws support dimensions on the same side of duct as the normal dimensions.
 False draws support dimensions on the opposite side of the duct to the normal
dimensions. When you set this option to False, the software ignores any distance set by
Standout.
Defines:
To Centre
Defines:
Options
Erection.

Defines:

Dimensions
Standout
The software ignores this property when As HVAC Dimensions is set to False.
Defines:

Dimensions
Set on Tees and Tapped Branches in Duct

drawing.

duct.

Dimensions
Defines:

Dimensions
Tap Branches
Tap on Duct
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on duct-type components, such as elbows,
tees, and duct.
 Duct Only turns off tapped branch dimensions, except for those on duct and duct-type
components.
Defines:
Tap on Component
point.

Dimensions
 Duct Only displays dimensions for duct and duct-type components (elbows, tees,
reducers, and so forth) only.
Defines:

Dimensions
Tap Headers
Tap on Fittings
Controls the dimensioning of tapping points on duct-type components, such as elbows/teed
Defines:

Dimensions
Teed Bends and Elbows

Sets the representation of dimensions for teed bends and elbows on the isometric drawing.
Teed Bend Branch

Controls the dimensioning of tee bend/elbows.
 Connection dimensions tee bend/elbows from connection point.
 Centre-Line Intersection dimensions tee bend/elbows from centerline intersection
point.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.TeedBendBranchDimension

Dimensions
Pulled Bends
Show Separate
Defines:

Dimensions
Gaskets
Sets the representation of dimensions for gaskets on the isometric drawing.
Show
Specifies gasket dimensions. You can choose not to show gasket dimensions, to include the
dimension with the component, or to treat the dimension separately.
 None suppresses gasket dimensions.
Gasket thicknesses are not included. The component dimension is indicated

by the presence of two leader lines.
 Included includes gasket dimensions with the component.
 Gasket thicknesses are included. The component dimension is indicated by the

presence of only single leader lines.
 The length of the valve has now increased by the thickness of the gaskets (2 mm in
this case) either side.

Dimensions
 Separate dimensions gaskets separately.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.Gaskets
Precision
Controls precise dimensioning of gaskets.
 1 mm outputs gasket dimensions to the nearest millimeters.
 0.1 mm outputs gasket dimensions to the nearest 1/10th millimeter
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.GasketDimPrecision

Dimensions
Coordinates
Controls the representation of coordinate data on the isometric drawing.
The Coordinates style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Display specifies where coordinate data is displayed on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Display (on page 313).
 Bends and Branches specifies the output and display of coordinate data at bends and
branches. For more information, see Bends and Branches (on page 317).
 Supports specifies for which type of pipe supports, if any, coordinate data is shown on the
isometric drawing. For more information, see Supports (on page 318).
 Heat Tracing controls the output of coordinates on heat traced components. For more
information, see Heat Tracing (on page 318).This style group is only available for piping
isometric drawings.
Display
Specifies where coordinate data is displayed on the isometric drawing.
The properties that display depend on the type of active isometric drawing style:
pipeline, cable tray, or HVAC. Some properties are specific to piping isometric drawings, while
others are specific to cable tray or HVAC isometric drawings.
Show at Open End

Controls the display of coordinate data at the open end of pipe work, cable tray, or duct work
and ISO TEXT are shown on the isometric drawing.
 True displays the coordinate data. This is the default setting.
 False suppresses the display of the coordinate data.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for open end is - 240; The default
value is Blank.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowOpenEnd
Show at Closed End

Controls the display of coordinate data for closed end of pipe work, cable tray, or duct work
and ISO TEXT are shown on the isometric.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for closed end is -241; The default
value is Blank.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowClosedEnd

Dimensions
Show at Vent
Controls the display of coordinate data at vent positions and ISO TEXT on the isometric.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for connections to vent positions is
-230; the default value is VENT.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowVentPosition
Show at Drain
Controls the display of coordinate data at drain positions and ISO TEXT are shown on the
isometric.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for drain position is -239.The default
value is DRAIN.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowDrainPosition

component origin.
Defines:

Dimensions
Show at Miscellaneous Position

Controls the display of coordinate data at miscellaneous positions and ISO TEXT is shown
 True displays the coordinates. This is the default setting.
 False suppresses the display of the coordinates.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for miscellaneous positions is
-242.The default value is Blank.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowMiscPosition
Show at Nozzle
Controls the display of coordinate data at connection to equipment nozzles and ISO TEXT
are shown on the isometric drawing.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for connections to equipment nozzles
is -208. The default value is CONN. TO.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowEquipConn
Show Coordinates at Split Points

drawing.
Defines:
Show Coordinates at Reference Item

Controls the display of coordinate data for referenced items is shown on the isometric
drawing.
 True displays the coordinate data
 False suppresses the display of the coordinates. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowCoordAtRefItem

Dimensions
Show at BIP
Controls the display of coordinate data for break-in points (BIPs) on the isometric drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowBIP
Suppress Jacketed Connection

Controls the display of coordinate information for jacketed connections on the isometric
drawing.
To suppress the display of coordinates for jacketed connections, select the check box. Clear
the check box to display the coordinates. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.SuppressJacketedConnection

Dimensions
Bends and Branches

Specifies the output and display of coordinate data at bends and branches.
Style
Controls the output type for supplementary coordinates, that is, coordinates at bends or at
branches. You can choose output with arrows or witness lines.
 Arrowed outputs coordinates and elevations as arrowed-out message type. This is the
default setting.
 Witness lines outputs coordinates and elevations along witness lines.
This property does not apply to end connection coordinates. It also does not
apply if you have set Show at Bends and Elbows or Show at Branches to Full.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CoordType
Show at Bends and Elbows

Controls the display of coordinates and elevations at bends and elbows.
 None displays no elevations and coordinates on the isometric drawing.
 Elev at changes outputs elevations when changed.
 Elev and Coords at changes outputs elevations and coordinates that have changed.
 Full outputs a full set of coordinates.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CoordOutputBends
Show at Branches
Controls the display of coordinates at branch intersections.
 None displays no elevations and coordinates on the isometric drawing.
 Elev at changes outputs elevations when changed.
 Elev and Coords at changes outputs elevations and coordinates that have changed.
 Full outputs a full set of coordinates
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CoordOutputBranches

Dimensions
Supports
Specifies for which type of supports, if any, coordinate data is shown on the isometric drawing.
Supports
Controls the output of coordinates at different types of supports.
 None suppresses the display of coordinates on all supports.
 Fabrication outputs coordinates at Fabrication supports only.
 Erection outputs coordinates at Erection supports only.
 Offshore outputs coordinates at Offshore supports only.
 All outputs coordinates at all supports.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CoordSupports

Dimensions
Heat Tracing
Heat Tracing Components
Controls whether coordinates are output on heat traced components.
 Off suppresses coordinates on heat traced components.
 On outputs coordinates on heat traced components.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.CoordOutputHTCpts

Dimensions
Display Format
Defines the display for metric and imperial dimensions and coordinates and angle data on the
isometric drawing.
The Display Format style groups contains the options groups listed below.
 Metric Coordinates sets the format for metric coordinates output on the isometric drawing.
For more information, see Metric Coordinates (on page 320).
 Metric Dimensions sets the format for metric dimensions output on the isometric drawing.
For more information, see Metric Dimensions (on page 321).
 Imperial Dimensions and Coordinates controls the format of imperial dimensions and
coordinates output on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Imperial Dimensions
and Coordinates (on page 321).
 Angles controls the output and display of angle information on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Angles (on page 322).
 Alternative Texts sets AText values directly related to the display of metric and imperial
dimensions and coordinates on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Alternative
Texts (on page 326).
Metric Coordinates
Metric Coordinates
Sets the format used for metric coordinates.
 mm plots coordinates in millimeters, for example 1234.
 m plots coordinates in meters (M.mm), for example 1.234.
 10th mm plots coordinates in 1/10th millimeters, for example 1234.5.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.MetresCoordinates

Dimensions
Metric Dimensions
Metric Dimensions
Sets the format used for metric dimensions.
 mm plots dimensions in millimeters, for example 1234.
 m plots dimensions in meters (M.mm), for example 1.234.
 10th mm plots dimensions in 1/10th millimeters, for example 1234.5.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.MetresDimensions

Dimensions
Imperial Dimensions and Coordinates

Imperial Format
Controls the format of imperial measurements on the isometric drawing.
 Standard outputs measurements using the standard ft/in format: 6' 10.3/4".
 Standard dash inserts a dash between the feet and inches: 6'-10.3/4".
 Space dash inserts a blank space instead of a period ( . ) between inches and fractions
of an inch: 6'-10 3/4".
 Stacked fractions with dash outputs stacked fractions with a dash: 6'-10¾".
 Stacked fractions without dash outputs stacked fractions without a dash: 6' 10¾".
 1DecimalPlace outputs decimal inches to 1 decimal place.
 2DecimalPlace outputs decimal inches to 2 decimal places.
 The Stacked fractions options only apply to MicroStation .DGN output.

 Two additional options are available for controlling the format of pipe dimensions:
 Use inches only plots dimensions in inches only
 Use feet and inches if above nn inches plots dimensions greater than the
user-specified value (nn) in feet and inches. This is the default setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.ImperialFormat

Dimensions
Angles
Controls the output and display of angle information on the isometric drawing.
Style
Controls the output of angle information for bends and elbows in the pipeline.
 All outputs all angle information on the isometric (including angles that are exactly 90-
and 180-degrees.)
 All except 90/180 deg outputs all angle information on the isometric drawing except
angles that are within 0.5-degrees of 90- and 180-degrees.
 All except within 10th degree of 90/180 deg outputs angle information on the
isometric drawing unless when rounded angles are within .1-degree of 90- and
180-degrees.
 None suppresses angle information on the isometric drawing.
You must set Style to None if you are using it with Drawing > Format >
Show Bend Angle.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AngleStyle

Dimensions
Type
Controls whether the angles output for bends and elbows are the included or deflected
angle.
 Deflected
 Included
If Type is set, AText -396 is combined with the angle information and displayed
If Type is not set (default), only the angle information is output.

Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AngleType

Dimensions
Accuracy
Controls the accuracy at which angle data is output on the isometric drawing.
 Default outputs all angles to the Isogen default accuracy of 0.1 degrees with no trailing
zeros. For example, 80.16 is output as 80.2 degrees, and 80.01 is output as 80
degrees.
 Nearest Degree outputs angles to the nearest degree.
 Nearest 10th Degree (1 decimal place) outputs angles to the nearest 0.1 degrees.
 Nearest 100th Degree (2 decimal places) outputs angles to the nearest 0.01 degrees.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AngleAccuracy

Dimensions
Alternative Texts
Inch Label
Denotes the inch sign indicator is used in imperial dimensions, coordinates, and nominal size
outputs. The default value is ".
AText ID: -237
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Foot Label
Denotes the feet sign indicator is used in imperial dimensions and coordinates. The default
value is '.
AText ID: -238
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Length Indicator
Used on the isometric drawing in conjunction with dimension text on curved pipe and teed
reducer branches.
AText ID: -273
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Dimensions
Included Angle Label

The default setting is blank. If Option Switch 65 is set to 1 and the AText ? character is
substituted by angle valve and combined with INC ANGLE text to indicate that angles displayed
for elbows and bends on the isometric are included (not deflected angles). The default value is
?INC ANGLE.
AText ID: -396
Elbow or
? Value:
Bend Angle
$ Supported: Yes
Metric Dimension Units

Allows the dimensional units of metric dimensions to be output on the isometric drawing.
AText ID: -437
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Dimensions
Skews and Falls

Sets properties that define the display and format of dimensions for skews and falls.
The Skews and Falls style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Style controls the representation of skews on the isometric drawing. For more information,
see Style (on page 328).
 Dimensions sets the output and format of skew dimensions and skew angles on the
isometric drawing. For more information, see Dimensions (on page 330).
 Hatching controls the output and appearance of skew hatching. For more information, see
Hatching (on page 333).
 Falls and Slopes defines the representation of falls and slopes on the isometric drawing.
For more information, see Falls and Slopes (on page 334).
 Callouts sets the insertion of orientation direction references and messages on the
isometric drawing. For more information, see Callouts (on page 336).
 Tolerances specifies how the software handles dimensional and angular deviations in the
pipeline input data. For more information, see Tolerances (on page 338).
 Alternative Texts sets AText values directly related to the display and format of skews and
falls on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 339).
Style
Sets the representation of skews on the isometric drawing.
Skew Representation
Controls the method used to depict sloping (falling) sections of a line that are skewed in the
horizontal plane.
 3D box displays the full 3D box or triangle.
 2D Skew + Fall displays the 2D skew box or triangle plus fall indicator.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewRepresentation
Skew 3D and 2D Mixed

Controls the display of 3D skew boxes and 2D skew triangles.
 True displays skew indications as defined by Style.
 False displays a mixture of skew indication types. For example, 3D skews are indicated
with boxes, and 2D skews are indicated with triangles.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewMixed

Dimensions
Overall
Controls how skew sections containing branch connections are depicted in terms of the
skew indication on the isometric drawing. Such skews may be shown as either a single,
overall enclosure or as a series of separate box or triangle enclosures.
 Individual depicts skews with a series of separate box or triangle enclosures, one
enclosure per branch.
 Overall depicts a single overall skew.
Defines:
Option Switch - 97
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewOverall
Component Count
Optionally permits simple skewed branch legs to have the normal skew box/triangle
enclosure suppressed and replaced by a single pipe length dimension and a text message
giving the branch orientation.
When used to suppress the normal box enclosure, the value set represents the maximum
number of fittings permitted in the branch. Branches found to contain more fittings than this
are drawn with the normal skew box/triangle enclosure.
Type a value in the range 0-99. If you type 0 (the default setting), all branches are drawn
with normal skew box/triangle depiction. If you type a value in the range 1-99, the software
suppresses the skew box/triangle depiction on branch legs whose number of components is
less than or equal to the value set, and output an orientation message.
This property is available only on straight through branches. Any change in
direction along the branch automatically causes the software to default to normal skew
box/triangle output.
Defines:
Option Switch - 70
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewMinCpts

Dimensions
Vertical Branch Style

Controls the drawing depiction method used when a vertical branch connection is made to a
sloping (falling) pipeline, cable tray, or duct using a special zero length bend component.
This special bend (which has no length) is used to carry the angle between the vertical
branch and the sloping pipeline, cable tray, or duct. Two drawing methods are available: one
method shows a small 2D skew box section between the branch and the main pipe, while
the other method does not.
 True displays the short tee branch leg section of pipe, cable tray, or duct skewed. Olets
have an orientation message instead of a skewed section. Both are dimensioned
separately to the connecting pipe, cable tray, or duct. This is the default setting.
 False connects the vertical branch straight into the main pipe, cable tray, or duct so that
there are no separate skew sections. Olets do not have an orientation message. Both
are included in a single inclusive dimension.
 Where olets are used in such cases, a text message indicates the orientation direction if
the branch is not developed.
 In both cases, the angle between the vertical branch and the sloping (falling) pipeline,
cable tray, or duct is indicated.
Defines:
Option Switch - 68
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewInVerticalBranch

Dimensions
Dimensions
Sets the output and format of skew dimensions and skew angles on the isometric drawing.
Style
Specifies how Isogen plots skewed sections on the isometric drawing, along with the form of
skew dimensioning Isogen uses.
 Box - normal standout depicts a skew box with normal dimensioning.
 Triangle - normal standout depicts a skew triangle with normal dimensioning.
 Triangle - skew standout depicts a skew triangle with normal dimensioning. Isogen
uses the value set in Dimensions > Skews and Falls > Standout.
 Triangle - alternative depicts a skew triangle with alternative dimensioning. Actual
dimensions are positioned close to the sides of triangle with no witness lines.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewDimStyle
Standout
Controls the dimension line standout distance used on boxed or triangle skew dimensions.
Type 0 to use the dimension line standout setting defined in Dimensions. Dimension
Style.Composite Standout, except when Style is set to Triangle - Alternative. In these
cases, the default dimension position is 4 mm. Alternatively, type the value (real number)
used as an alternative dimension line standout in mm or inches, depending on the setting of
the drawing units. Used when Style is set to Triangle - Skew standout.
Defines:
Option Switch - 100
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewDimStandout

Dimensions
Angle Style
Controls the output of skew angles on skewed section of the drawing.
 Both Angles With Arrowheads displays both skew angles with arrow heads on the arc
radius.
 Both Angles Without Arrowheads displays both skew angles without arrow heads on
the arc radius.
 Not Shown suppresses the output of skew angles.
 With Arrowheads displays a single skew angle with arrow heads on the arc radius.
 Without Arrowheads displays a single skew angle without arrow heads on the arc
radius.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewAngleStyle
Skew Triangle Right Angle Indication

Controls the output of a right angle indicator on skew triangles.
 True outputs a right angle indicator on skew triangles.
 False suppresses output of a right angle indicator on skew triangles.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewTriangleRightAngleIndication

Dimensions
Hatching
Controls the output and appearance of skew hatching.
Show
Controls skew hatching.
 True turns on skew hatching.
 False turns off skew hatching.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SketchHatching
Spacing
Controls the spacing of the hatching lines in 1/10 millimeters. Type a value (in the range
0-10) that equals the alternative hatch line spacing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SketchSpacing
Cut Off
Specifies the hatch line length cut-off in millimeters. Type a value in the range 0-99. For
example, type 25 for a 25mm cut-off value. In this case, hatch lines in excess of 25mm long
are not be plotted. This gives a partial hatched effect.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SketchHatchCutOff
Gap for Pipe

Controls the physical size of the unhatched gaps (white space) to be left local to the
pipeline. Specify the value in the range 0-10. The default setting is 2.5 mm.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SketchHatchPipeGap
Gap for Cable Tray

Controls the physical size of the unhatched gaps (white space) to be left local to the cable
tray. Specify the value in the range 0-10. The default setting is 2.5 mm.
Defines:

Dimensions
Gap for Duct

Controls the physical size of the unhatched gaps (white space) to be left local to the duct.
Specify the value in the range 0-10. The default setting is 2.5 mm.
Defines:
Gap for Inline Components

Specifies the gap left unhatched for in-line components in 1/10 millimeters. Acceptable
values are in the range 0-99. The default setting is 2.5 mm.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewHatchCptGap
Gap for Text

Specifies the gap left unhatched for dimensions and text in 1/10 millimeters. The default
setting is 1.5 mm.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewHatchDimText

Dimensions
Falls and Slopes

Defines the representation of falls and slopes on the isometric drawing.
Fall Representation
Specifies how sections of falling lines (downward slopes) are indicated on the isometric
drawing. This option determines the method of how the fall value is indicated numerically on
 None suppresses the falling line indication.
 D deg outputs angle to nearest degree.
 D.d deg outputs to nearest 1/10th degree.
 D.dd deg outputs angle to nearest 1/100th degree.
 deg.min outputs angle in degrees and minutes.
 G grad outputs gradient to nearest grad.
 G.g grad outputs gradient to nearest 1/10th grad.
 G.gg grad outputs gradient to nearest 1/100th grad.
 Incline~1/16th"/ft outputs incline to nearest 16th of an inch per foot.
 Incline~1/100"/ft outputs incline to nearest 100th of an inch per foot.
 Incline~1mm/m outputs incline to nearest mm per meter.
 Incline~5mm/m outputs incline to nearest 5 mm per meter.
 Incline~10mm/m outputs incline to nearest 10 mm per meter.
 P% outputs percentage to nearest whole value.
 P.p% outputs percentage to nearest 1 decimal place.
 P.pp% outputs percentage to nearest 2 decimal place.
 Ratio~5 (>1:30) outputs ratio to nearest 5 when greater than 1:30.
 Ratio~5 (>1:100) outputs ratio to nearest 5 when greater than 1:100.
 Ratio~1 outputs ratio to nearest 1.

Dimensions
 Ratio~25 (>1:500)~10(>1:100)~5(>1:50)~2(>1:30)~1 outputs t ratio according to the

following:
 Nearest 25 when greater than 1:500
 Nearest 1 in all other circumstances.
 Symbol Only shows only the Fall indicator symbol. Suppresses the output of
associated text.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FallRepresentation
Cut Off
Defines the minimum slope treated as a fall. Slopes steeper than the cut-off value are
shown with a 2D or 3D box or triangle skew indication as appropriate.
Type 0 to use a 5° angle cut-off or its equivalent depending upon the type of indication
selected by Fall Representation. This is the default setting. Alternatively, type a value that
defines a cut-off number to suit the type of indication selected by Fall Representation.
 For fall cut off of 5 Degrees, type 5 or 0.
 For fall cut off of 1:11 Ratio, type 11.
 For fall cut off of 9 Percent, type 9.
 For fall cut off of 5 Grads, type 5.
 For fall cut off of 1" Per foot, type 1.
 For fall cut off of 88 mm per meter, type 88.
Defines:
Option Switch - 20
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FallCutOff
Always set Cut Off to 0 when sloping pipeline indication has been suppressed by
Fall Representation.

Dimensions
Callouts
Sets the insertion of orientation direction references and messages on the isometric drawing.

primary direction.
Defines:

Dimensions
Olet Branch Orientation Message

Controls the output of an orientation message on undeveloped olet branches that are in
primary directions.
 No Message suppresses output of an orientation message on the isometric drawing.
 Create Orientation Message outputs an orientation message on undeveloped olet
branches in a primary direction.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.OletBranchOrientationMessage

Dimensions
Tolerances
Specifies how the software handles dimensional and angular deviations in the pipeline input
data.
Difference Limit
Controls how Isogen interprets and acts up small dimensional deviations detected in the
input data file. These deviations can lead to small, unwanted skews being generated on the
isometric drawing. You can use Difference Limit to define a dimensional cut-off value,
whereby Isogen ignores any offset coordinate numerically below this value.
Set to the required dimensional tolerance in millimeters or inches. For example, you can
type 1.0 mm or 0.04 inch. When set to 0, no dimensional offset tolerance is set.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Dimensions.MinOffset
Angle Limit
Controls how Isogen interprets and acts upon small angular deviations detected in the input
data. These deviations can lead to small, unwanted skews being generated on the isometric
drawing. You can define an angular cut-off value with this property so that any skew that has
an angular deviation below this value is ignored by Isogen and not treated as a skew.
To specify a user-defined angle tolerance, type a value in the range 1-10, such as 0.5 for
0.5-degrees. Type 0 for no angular offset tolerance. This is the default setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - 115
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.MinAngleOffset

Dimensions
Alternative Texts
Fall Label
Denotes a FALLing (sloped) line. Used in conjunction with the Fall symbol. You can use the ?
symbol to determine the format used for outputting the falling line messages. The default value
is FALL ?.
AText ID: -222
? Value: Slope angle
$ Supported: Yes
Fall Label (Ratio)

Denotes falling lines specified with a ratio, such as 1:10.
AText ID: -224
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Fall Label (Percent)

Produces a system-generated percent symbol ( % ) used on falling pipelines specified with a
percentage indication.
AText ID: -225
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Dimensions
Fall Label (Gradient)

Indicates a falling line specified in gradients. The default value is GRAD.
AText ID: -226
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Fall Label (Metric Incline)

Indicates a falling line specified as an incline in metric units, such as millimeters per meter. The
default value is PER M.
AText ID: -227
Value: None
$ Supported: No
Fall Label (Imperial Incline)

Indicates a falling line specified as an incline in imperial units, such as inches per foot. The
default value is PER FT.
AText ID: -228
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Skewed Branch Label

Identifies skewed branches in cases where skew box indication has been suppressed. A
software-generated direction is appended to this text to form a complete message. The default
value is ORIENTATION DIRECTION.
AText ID: -287
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Dimensions
Horizontal Label
Distinguishes horizontal skew angles from vertical skew angles on the isometric drawing.
AText ID: -548
? Value: Skew angle
$ Supported: Yes
Vertical Skew Label

Distinguishes vertical skew angles from horizontal skew angles on the isometric drawing.
AText ID: -549
? Value: Skew angle
$ Supported: Yes
Reference Dimensions
Defines the display of reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
The Reference Dimensions style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Settings defines reference dimension properties. For more information, see Settings (on
page 342).
 Alternative Texts sets AText values directly related to reference dimensions. For more
Settings
Defines settings for reference dimensions.
Show
Controls the output of reference dimensions on the isometric drawing. Select the check box
to output reference dimensions.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowReferenceDims
Show Coordinates at Reference Item

Controls the display of coordinate data for referenced items is shown on the isometric
drawing.
 True displays the coordinate data
 False suppresses the display of the coordinates. This is the default setting.
Defines:

Dimensions

I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowCoordAtRefItem

Dimensions
Name Style
Controls the physical size of the characters that are used for dimensions, coordinates, and
message text on the 'picture section' of the isometric drawing.
 Default (Along Reference Lines)
 1 Character Circular Enclosure

 2 Characters
 3 Characters
 4 Characters
 5 Characters
 6 Characters
 7 Characters
 8 Characters
 9 Characters
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ReferenceNameStyle

Dimensions
Alternative Texts
ATexts -460 to -469 are used for the identification of external reference items when
using the reference dimension facility. Any associated text elements are automatically prefixed
or appended, as appropriate, to the specified AText element. The dollar character ( $ ) causes a
new line to be plotted and the question mark character ( ? ) is where the software edits the
element name to derive the full text string.
Ref Beam Label

Identifies horizontal steel-work element (SKEY=HST*). The default value is BEAM$?.
AText ID: -460
? Value: Reference item tag
$ Supported: Yes
Ref Column Label

Identifies vertical steel-work element (SKEY=VST*). The default value is COLUMN$?.
AText ID: -461
$ Supported: Yes
Ref Building Label

Identifies the centerline of a building (SKEY=BLD*). The default value is ?$BUILDING.
AText ID: -462
$ Supported: Yes

Dimensions
Ref Equipment Label

Identifies the centerline of equipment (SKEY=EQU*). The default value is CL EQUIPMENT$?.
AText ID: -463
$ Supported: Yes
Ref Pipeline Label

Identifies the centerline of pipeline (SKEY=PIP*). The default value is CL PIPELINE$?.
AText ID: -464
$ Supported: Yes
Ref Floor Label

Identifies the specified floor level (SKEY=FLR*). The default value is ?$FLOOR.
AText ID: -465
$ Supported: Yes
Ref Wall Label

Identifies the specified wall position (SKEY= WAL*). The default value is ?$WALL>
AText ID: -466
$ Supported: Yes
Ref Grid Label

Identifies the project grid line (SKEY=GRD*). The default value is GRID$?.
AText ID: -467
$ Supported: Yes

Dimensions
Ref Misc Label

Used for miscellaneous user-specified elements (SKEY=XXX*). The default ? character causes
any identification name associated with the miscellaneous reference to be used when no other
AText setting is made.
AText ID: -468
$ Supported: Yes
Reference Point Label

Identifies reference dimension item coordinates. The default value is REFERENCE POINT.
AText ID: -469
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Dimensions
Reference Planes
Defines reference planes for the Reference Plane Definition file (RPDF).
The Reference Planes style group contains the options groups listed below. You can use these
option to reference grids for coordinate callouts on isometric drawings.
 Settings defines reference plane properties. For more information, see Settings (on page
349).
 Alternative Texts sets AText values directly related to reference planes. For more
Reference Plane Definition Files (RPDF)

If you are using reference plane definition (Dimensions > Reference Planes >
Settings), you must also set Location (Dimensions > Reference Planes > Settings to specify
the reference plane definition file location
The RPDF is an input text file, not an output file. The text file enables you to specify the vertical
and horizontal positions from which location points can be related. Relative locations in the
vertical plane (Z-plane) can be from the nearest plane or from the plane below. To control which
option the software uses, you must add one of the following entries to the RPD file:
NEAREST-A-PLANE or LOWER-Z-PLANE.
 If you select Enabled, you must specify the location of the input data file. We recommend
that the reference plane definition file be located on a network share so that it can be used
by multiple client computers. The extension of the file is not important, but for recognition
purposes, you may want to use the extension .rpd.
 If reference planes are enabled but no file is specified, the relative coordinates cannot be
called out in the isometric drawing.

Dimensions
Settings
Defines reference planes. The Reference Planes properties provide the ability to reference grids
for coordinate callouts on isometric drawings.
Enabled
Controls processing of the reference plane data. Select the check box to enable processing
of the reference plane data.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.ReferencePlanes.Enabled
Path
Specifies the filename and full path location to the reference plane definition file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.ReferencePlanes.Path
Coordinate Style
Specifies the reference plane coordinate style to be used in the Reference Plane Definition
(RPDF) file.
 None suppresses the display of coordinates.
 World Coordinates returns coordinates with respect to the global coordinate system.
 Relative Coordinates returns coordinates (on the isometric drawing) with respect to the
volume referenced in the RPDF.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.ReferencePlanes.CoordStyle
Coordinate Style at Location Points

Specifies the reference plane coordinate style to be used in the Reference Plane Definition
(RPDF) file.
 None suppresses the display of coordinates.
 World Coordinates returns coordinates with respect to the global coordinate system.
 Relative Coordinates returns coordinates (on the isometric drawing) with respect to the
volume referenced in the RPDF.
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.ReferencePlanes.CoordStyle

Dimensions
Location Point Style

Specifies the style used for location points on the isometric drawing.
 Special Text Symbol (****) displays a box containing “****”.
 Square Ended Box displays a box containing the contents of AText –nnn, such as
AText -471 LOCATION$POINT?
Defines:
I-Configure - Supplementary.ReferencePlanes.LocationPtStyle

Dimensions
Alternative Texts
The reference plane ATexts output the relative directions associated with reference
planes. Where applicable, substitute the ^ character with the reference plane name. Substitute
the ? character with the distance from the reference plane.
Sub Volume Label

Controls the output of sub-volume names at coordinate positions on the isometric drawing. The
default value is VOL ?.
AText ID: -398
? Value: Sub-volume name
$ Supported: Yes
X Relative Coordinate
Identifies the positive relative position in the E/W plane. The default value is ^+?.
AText ID: -443
? Value: Ref Plane/Coord
$ Supported: Yes
-X Relative Coordinate
Identifies the negative relation position in the E/W plane. The default value is ^+?.
AText ID: -444
$ Supported: Yes

Dimensions
Y Relative Coordinate
Identifies the positive relative position in the N/S plane. The default value is ^+?.
AText ID: -445
$ Supported: Yes
-Y Relative Coordinate
Identifies the negative relative position in the N/S plane. The default value is ^+?.
AText ID: -446
$ Supported: Yes
Z Relative Coordinate
Identifies the positive relative position in the U/D plane. The default value is ^+?.
AText ID: -447
$ Supported: Yes
-Z Relative Coordinate
Identifies the negative relative position in the U/D plane. The default value is ^+?.
AText ID: -448
$ Supported: Yes
Reference Plane Delimiter

An AText record has been assigned to be output as a delimiter between the relative direction
and its relative position. AText set to blank only outputs the relative position. The default value is
^+?.
AText ID: -449
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Dimensions
Location Point Label

Indicates a location point position on the plotted isometric drawing. If more than one is included
on any single isometric, a simple ID number is generated and output in the position indicated by
the ? character. The default value is LOCATION-POINT?.
AText ID: -471
? Value:
$ Supported: Yes
Location Point Identifier

Outputs a location point ID number on the drawing frame. It is only output when multiple location
points are included on a single isometric drawing. The default value is No.?.
AText ID: -472
? Value: Location Point ID
$ Supported: Yes
Location Point of Label

Used as part of a location point position on the drawing frame. The default value is OF.
AText ID: -473
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Location Point Above Label

Used as part of a location point position on the drawing frame. The default value is ABOVE.
AText ID: -474
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

SECTION 5
Drawing Border
Defines drawing frame properties.
The Drawing Border category includes the style groups listed below. Every style group is further
The Title Texts for Mixed Material List style group is available only for piping isometric
drawings.
 Attribute Display maps backing sheet and Isogen attributes to attributes in the software
and specifies the X- and Y-coordinates for attribute placement. For more information, see
Attribute Display (on page 354).
 Table Display stores the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. For more
information, see Table Display (on page 357).
 Title Texts for Fixed Material List specifies user-defined text strings for plotting on an
Isogen-generated drawing frame. For more information, see Title Texts for Fixed Material
List (on page 365).

Drawing Border
Attribute Display
Maps Isogen attributes to attributes in the software and specifies the X- and Y-coordinates for
attribute placement.
The Attribute Display style group contains a single options group.
 Definitions specifies the drawing frame attributes that are output during drawing generation.
For more information, see Definitions (on page 355).
Definitions
Specifies the drawing frame attributes that are output during drawing generation.
Attributes
Defines the attributes that Isogen plots on the drawing frame. You enter the data using a
grid.
Many of the drawing frame attributes originate from the pipe runs in the model.
During an extraction, the software obtains the values for pipe run attributes from the run with
the largest NPD.
 Attribute specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Select an attribute in the list.
 Text Height sets the character height of the attribute text. Type a value in millimeters.
 X sets the X-coordinate location of the attribute text in the title block. Type a value in
millimeters.
 Y sets the Y-coordinate location of the attribute text in the title block. Type a value in
millimeters.
 Font defines the font to be used. Select the appropriate font in the Font list.
 Barcode specifies the barcode standard. Type the number that corresponds to the
appropriate barcode.
 1 - Barcode 39
 2 - Barcode 25
 3 - Barcode 25 Interleaved
 Text Width sets the character width of the attribute text. Type a value in millimeters.

Drawing Border
 Justification sets the alignment of the text on the drawing frame. Specify Left, Right,
or Centre.
In many CAD or graphics packages, the standard behavior for text justification is within
a pseudo box requiring at least two points. The size of the pseudo box determines the
location of the text based on the Justification setting. In the example below, the pipe
symbol ( | ) represents the left and right borders of the pseudo box.
However, the Justification setting in Isogen revolves around a single X,Y point. For
each scenario, Isogen uses the X,Y point as the focal point for text placement so that
the actual text string aligns accordingly. In the example below, the caret symbol ( ^ )
represents the X.Y point.
 Layer identifies the layer to which the definition is applied. Select the required number
from the list.
 Colour specifies the number that represents the color number as defined in the output
drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).
 Rotation Angle defines the angle of rotation in degrees clockwise.
 Text Weight controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used only
for MicroStation.
 Truncation Length defines the number of output characters.
The value that displays on the Attributes icon is a count of how many drawing
frame attributes have been defined. The example below indicates the 15 attributes are
currently defined.
Defines:
Option Switch - n/a
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.Attributes

Drawing Border
Table Display
Stores the definitions of text used on the drawing frame and the properties for symbol shape
positioning.
The Table Display style group contains the options groups listed below:
 Attribute Table the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. For more information, see
Attribute Table (on page 357).
 Symbol Table the properties for symbol shape frame positioning For more information, see
Symbol Table (on page 359).
Attribute Table
Stores the definitions of text used on the drawing frame.
Table Attributes
Defines the text that appears in the drawing frame. You enter the data using a grid.
 Text Height sets the character height of the attribute text. Type a value in millimeters.
 X sets the X-coordinate location of the attribute text in the title block. Type a value in
millimeters.
 Y sets the Y-coordinate location of the attribute text in the title block. Type a value in
millimeters.
 Font defines the font to be used. Select the appropriate font in the Font list.
 Barcode specifies the barcode standard. Type the number that corresponds to the
appropriate barcode.
 1 - Barcode 39
 2 - Barcode 25
 3 - Barcode 25 Interleaved
 Text Width sets the character width of the attribute text. Type a value in millimeters.

Drawing Border
or Centre.
 Layer identifies the layer to which the definition is applied. Select the required number
from the list.
 Colour specifies the number that represents the color number as defined in the output
drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).
 Rotation Angle defines the angle of rotation in degrees clockwise.
 Text Weight controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used only
for MicroStation.
 Truncation Length defines the number of output characters.
 Column Count specifies the number of columns in the table.
 Direction controls the table layout. Select Horizontal or Vertical in the list.
 Row Count sets the number of lines in the table.

Drawing Border
 X Spacing specifies the table offset dimension in the X (horizontal) direction. Type a
value in millimeters. You can enter a negative number.
 Y Spacing specifies the table offset dimension in the Y (vertical) direction. Type a value
in millimeters. You can enter a negative number.
The value that displays on the Table Attributes icon is a count of how many
table attributes have been defined. The example below indicates the three attributes are
currently defined.
Defines:
Option Switch - n/a
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.TableAttributes

Drawing Border
Symbol Table
Defines the properties for symbol shape frame positioning. These properties allow symbol
shapes, which could only be displayed on the standard drawing frame, to be positioned on to a
user-specified backing sheet. This options group is available only for piping isometric drawings.
Visible
Controls whether symbol shape frame positioning is used. Select the check box, to write the
definitions in the symbol table to the data definition (DDF) file, which switches on the facility.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.Visible
Drawing Layer
Sets the drawing layer for symbol shape positioning. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrames.SymbolTable.DrawingLayer
Layout
Controls whether the table is in a horizontal, vertical, or multiple style.
 SingleVertical defines a single vertical table. Data items are output vertically under
their relevant heading.
 SingleHorizontal defines a single horizontal table. Data items are output horizontally to
the right of their relevant headings.

Drawing Border
 MultipleVertical defines a multiple vertical table. Layout of data items is across and
down.
 MultipleHorizontal defines a multiple horizontal table. Layout of data items is down and
across.
The number of columns that are output is determined by the Max rows setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrames.SymbolTable.Layout
Start X
Defines the bottom left-hand X position of the first symbol shape. Type a value in millimeters
or inches (as a real number).
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.StartX
Start Y
Defines the bottom left-hand Y position of the first symbol shape. Type a value in millimeters
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.StartY

Drawing Border
Horizontal Spacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the symbol shape output
when the table is horizontally formatted or two-dimensional. Type a value in millimeters or
inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.HorizontalSpacing
Vertical Spacing
Sets the vertical spacing required between each row of the cut pipe list output when the
table is vertically formatted or two-dimensional. Type a value in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.VerticalSpacing
Maximum Columns
Defines the maximum number of columns before a new row is started when using multiple
tables or the maximum number of entries for a single horizontal table. Type the required
value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.MaxColumns
Maximum Rows
Defines the maximum number of rows before a new column is started when using multiple
tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.MaxRows
Symbol Scale
Specifies a single value for the percentage symbol scale factor. You use this property to
control the scaling of symbol shapes.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.SymbolScale

Drawing Border
Symbol Selection
Controls whether to output all the symbols that are defined or only those that are used on
the drawing.
 Fixed outputs all defined symbols.
 Dynamic outputs only those symbols that are used on the drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.SymbolSelect
Symbol List
Specifies the symbols and associated text to be output. Each line must contain the symbol
name and associated text separated by a space, as shown in the examples below:
 O1HG Pipe Support
 WS Site Weld
 WW Workshop Weld
 TRACING Tracing
 LAGGING Lagging
Open the free-form text box, type the data as needed, and then click . The software
updates the style and displays the specified text under Symbol List, as shown in the
example.
To close the text box, click Hide .

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.SymbolList

Drawing Border
Pipe Length
Specifies a single value for the length of pipe (including symbols) with a maximum value of
15 mm or 0.5 inches. A negative value ( -1 ) suppresses the output of pipe.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.PipeLength
Text Font
type from the list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextFont
Text Offset X
Specifies a single value for the horizontal movement from the symbol origin to the text
origin. Type a value (real number) in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextOffsetX
Text Offset Y
Specifies a single value for the vertical movement from the symbol origin to the text origin.
Type a value (real number) in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextOffsetY
Text Height
Specifies the height of the text label. Type a value (real number) in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextHeight
Text Width Factor

Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height used for output of the cut list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextWidthFactor

Drawing Border
Text Weight
Controls the character thickness. Specify a value between 1 and 9. Used only for
MicroStation.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.TextWeight

Drawing Border
Title Texts for Fixed Material List

Specifies user-defined text strings for plotting on an Isogen-generated drawing frame.
The Title Texts for Mixed Material List style group is available only for piping isometric
drawings.
The Title Texts style group contains a single options group.
 Title Texts specifies user-defined text strings for plotting on an Isogen-generated drawing
frame. For more information, see Title Texts (on page 366).
Title Texts
Specifies user-defined text strings for plotting on an Isogen-generated drawing frame.
Headings
Specifies the user-defined text strings to be plotted on an Isogen-generated drawing frame.
Open the grid, and then define the property listed below.
 Title Text contains the text for each title line.
 The value that displays on the Headings icon is a count of how many text strings have
been defined. The example below indicates the three text strings are currently defined.

Defines:
 Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.TitleTexts

SECTION 6
Materials
Defines properties that control the position, format, and contents of the parts list.
The Materials category includes the style groups listed below. Every style group is further
 Drawing Material List organizes options groups that define the layout and content of the
three material list formats: user-defined, variable, and fixed. For more information, see
Drawing Material List (on page 367).
 Part Numbers organizes options groups define the representation of part numbers on the
isometric drawing. For more information, see Part Numbers (on page 422).
 Accumulation contains an option group that controls the accumulation of materials and
components on the material list. For more information, see Accumulation (on page 430).
 Text organizes a collection of AText values directly related to the material list. For more
information, see Text (on page 433).
 Reports organizes a collection of properties that define the content and format of the
material control file, printed material list, and the Neutral report. For more information, see
Reports (on page 444).

Materials
Drawing Material List

Defines the content and format of the Isogen material list. Depending on the active isometric
drawing style, as many as three material list formats are available: user-defined, variable, and
fixed. Whereas any of these three material list formats is applicable for piping isometric
drawings, only the user-defined material list format is applicable for cable tray drawings.
The Drawing Material List style group contains the options groups listed below.
The following style groups are available only for piping isometric drawings:
User Defined Spool Table, Variable, Variable Columns, and Fixed.
 Settings specifies options for controlling the position, format, and contents of the parts list.
For more information, see Settings (on page 368).
 User Defined sets options for the user-defined material list format. For more information,
see User Defined (on page 378).
 User Defined Columns specifies the data that is output for three user-definable lists:
material, weld, and cut lists. For more information, see User Defined Columns (on page
390).
 User Defined Remarks contains the necessary data to define the position and properties of
a Style3 Remarks box, which is used to plot user-specified remarks attached to components.
For more information, see User Defined Remarks (on page 391).
 User Defined Spool Table defines the settings for the spool table quantities, which can be
output as part of a user-defined material list. For more information, see User Defined Spool
Table (on page 393).
 Variable defines settings for the variable layout material list format. This format includes
options to define column headers. For more information, see Variable (on page 398).
 Variable Columns defines the columns that appear in the variable layout material list. For
more information, see Variable Columns (on page 402).
 Fixed settings for the fixed layout material list format. This format produces a simple
material list. For more information, see Fixed (on page 404).
 Material Group Transfers stores the information that allows you to move a component from
one sort group to another on the material list. For more information, see Material Group
Transfers (on page 408).
 SKEYS Defined as Instruments specifies user-defined symbol keys. For more information,
see SKEYS Defined as Instruments (on page 409).
 Alternative Texts sets AText values directly related to the isometric drawing material list.
For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 410).

Materials
Settings
Sets options for controlling the position, format, and contents of the parts list.
Material List
Defines:
Active List
Defines which of the three available material list styles are output. If Drawing Manager >
Drawing Generation > Overview > Drawing Frame is not selected, you must set Active
List to Fixed.
 Fixed outputs a fixed layout format. This is the default setting. For more information,
see Fixed (on page 404).
 UserDefined outputs a user-defined format. For more information, see User Defined
(on page 378).
 Variable outputs a variable layout format. For more information, see Variable (on page
398).
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.ActiveList
Text Font
type from the list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.TextFont

Materials
Bolt Length
Controls the units that Isogen uses for bolt lengths.
 As Drawing uses the setting defined by the Drawing Manager > Drawing Generation
> Units > Pipes and Fittings settings.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.BoltLengthUnits
Bolt Diameter
Controls the units that Isogen uses for bolt diameters.
 As Drawing uses the Drawing Manager > Drawing Generation > Units > Pipes and
Fittings setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.BoltDiameterUnits
Display SmallxLarge NS
Specifies a table of record IDs and SKEYs, which are output with the nominal size in small x
large order.
Open the free-form text box, type the data in the text box using the required format (Record
identifier + optional SKEY), and then click . The software updates the style and
displays the specified text under the Display SmallxLarge NS property label.
Click Hide to close the text box.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.SmallxLargeNX

Materials
Material List Splitting

Controls the plotting of the material list when a pipeline splits onto two or more drawings.
The settings below are applicable only to piping isometric drawings.
 Per Drawing plots the material list per isometric drawing.
 Per Pipeline plots the material list per pipeline.
For cable tray or HVAC drawings, Material List Splitting controls the plotting of the material
list when an isometric drawing splits onto two or more sheets.
 Per Sheet plots the material list for each sheet separately.
 Combined plots the material list for all sheets together.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.MaterialListSplitting
Material List Overflow

Defines:
Sheet Number Format

Controls the number of characters output for the sheet number. If the sheet number output
has less than the requested number of characters, leading zero(s) are inserted where
appropriate.
 0 outputs no leading zeros.
 1 Character outputs the fixed number of characters.
 2 Characters outputs the fixed number of characters.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SheetNumberFormat

Materials
Overflow Sheet Numbering

in the sequence.
continuation.
Defines:
Materials by Spool
Controls the splitting of fabrication materials by spool on the material list.
Select the check box to fabricate materials as normal under the Fabrication section of
material list. To group spool materials separately, with part numbering on a per spool basis,
clear the check box
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.MaterialsBySpool
Spools Match Full

Controls whether part numbers on a spool isometric drawing match those on the full
isometric drawing .
Select the check box to match spool isometric material part number to full isometric part
numbers. For spool isometric material part numbers to be independent of full isometric part
numbers, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SpoolMatchFull

Materials
Linear Quantity Style

Specifies the style for linear quantities in the material list.
 n. n M n. n ft outputs pipe or cable tray length (depending on the active isometric
drawing style) in the form or meters (M) or feet: 1 decimal place, as in 10.4 M or 10.4'.
 n MM n ft n in outputs pipe or cable tray length (depending on the active isometric
drawing style) length in the form of millimeters(MM) or feet and inches, as in 1040 MM
or 10'5".
 n. nnn M n. nnn ft outputs pipe or cable tray length (depending on the active isometric
drawing style) length in the form meters or feet: 3 decimal places, as in 1.045 M or
10.375'.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.LinearQuantityStyle
Item Code Length

Sets the number of characters in the material list item code. Acceptable values are in the
range 6-29.
 The maximum number of item code characters is 29.

 Changes in this property cause the material list to be correspondingly wider or
narrower.
Defines:
Option Switch - 28
I-Configure - MaterialList.ItemCodeLength
Weight Style
Controls the output of component weights.
 Total outputs each component weight as a total weight. Example: quantity x unit weight.
 Individual outputs each component weight as the individual weight of the component
type. The quantity is not multiplied by the unit weight.
 None suppresses the output of component weight on material lists.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.WeightsStyle

Materials
Wastage Area 1
Specifies the thickness of the text.
Type a value as an integer in the range 10-99 in millimeters or inches
Use this option only if Size is set to User.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.TextWeight
Wastage Area 2
Controls any additional pipe quantity that needs to be added to the material list to allow for
wastage during fabrication.
The property is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe
wastage allowances. Each of the nine properties is applicable to a particular model area,
which can be identified in the input pipeline data file.
 0 uses a percentage multiplication factor of zero. This setting allows you to obtain no
increase in pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the
input pipeline data file.
 1 uses a percentage multiplication factor of 1. This value does not increase the basic
wastage percentage that can be set in application records in the input pipeline data file.
This is the default setting
 Value uses the specified value as an additional factor that is multiplied by the basic
wastage factor (input on appropriate records in the pipeline data input file) to arrive at a
final wastage factor percentage. For example, a value of 2 gives a final percentage of
twice the value of any figure included in the input pipeline data file.
Defines:
Option Switch - 44
I-Configure - MaterialList.WastageArea2

Materials
Wastage Area 3
Defines:
Option Switch - 45
Wastage Area 4
Defines:
Option Switch - 46

Materials
Wastage Area 5
Defines:
Option Switch - 47
Wastage Area 6
Defines:
Option Switch - 48

Materials
Wastage Area 7
Defines:
Option Switch - 49
Wastage Area 8
Defines:
Option Switch - 50

Materials
Wastage Area 9
Defines:
Option Switch - 51

Materials
User Defined
Sets options for the user-defined material list format. The user-defined material list offers more
flexibility than the other two material list styles.
 The properties that display depend on the type of active isometric drawing style: pipeline,
cable tray, or HVAC. Some properties are specific to piping isometric drawings, while others
are specific to cable tray or HVAC isometric drawings.
 This style of material list requires a backing sheet.
Type
Controls the type of material list that Isogen outputs on the isometric drawing.
 Normal suppresses creation of special type of material list
 Special gives every item a separate entry except gaskets and bolts, which are
accumulated. Isogen assigns a U prefix to pulled bends, and assigns a W or B prefix to
welds.
 Normal with alpha pointers creates a regular material list. However, Isogen uses an
alpha system of material list pointers (A, B, C...) instead of the default numeric system.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.MLType
Active Section
Defines the number of sections in the material list.
 1 uses the OneSection object properties for material list layout.
 2 uses the TwoSection object properties for material list layout.
 3 uses the ThreeSection object properties for material list layout.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ActiveSection
Start X
Defines the bottom left-hand X position of the first symbol shape. Type a value in millimeters
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.StartX

Materials
Start Y
Defines the bottom left X position of the first line of the material list. All X positions in the
column are relative to this point
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.StartX
Vertical Spacing
Specifies the vertical spacing (in millimeters) between the lines of data. The vertical spacing
applies to all sections in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.VerticalSpacing
Show Group Headings

Specifies whether group headings are displayed. Select the check box to display group
headings.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ShowGroupHeadings
Group Heading X
Defines the X position (in millimeters) for the Group heading in millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.GroupHeadingX
Underline Group Headings

Controls whether group headings are underlined. Select the check box to underline the
group heading.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.GroupUnderline
Show Category Headings

Specifies whether or not the category headings appear. Select the check box to display
group category headings.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ShowCategoryHeadings

Materials
Category Heading X
Defines the displacement in X from Start X for the category heading. Type a value in
millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.CategoryHeadingX
Underline Category Headings

Controls whether category headings are underlined. Select the check box to underline the
category heading.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.CategoryUnderline
Colour
Specifies a number that represents the color number as defined in the output drawing
system. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.DrawingColour
Drawing Layer
Sets the drawing layer for material list text. Type a value (integer) in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.DrawingLayer
Show Remarks
Controls the appearance of a remarks list, as defined by the User Defined Remarks
options. To display the Remarks list, select the check box. For more information, see User
Defined Remarks (on page 391).
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ShowRemarks

Materials
Unique Delimiter
Defines the separator used to delimit part number data in the Material List Definition (MLD)
file. Supported characters are listed below.
 Blank
 Comma (1,2,3, and so on)
 Semi-colon (1;2;3 and so on)
 Colon (1:2:3 and so on)
 Setting this option is not required when Format for the report type is set to
Fixed.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.UniqueDelimiter
Default Description Width

Defines the number of characters allocated for the width of the item description.
Descriptions exceeding this seize are wrapped to the following line.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.DefaultDescriptionWidth
Show Accumulated Pipe Data

Controls the plotting of accumulated pipe information in a material list containing
non-accumulated quantities. That is, for pipe only, it is possible to have both accumulated
and non-accumulated information in the same material list.
Select the check box to export the settings defined by Accumulated Pipe Position,
Accumulated Pipe Quantity, and Accumulated Pipe Description to the material list
definition (MLD) file. To suppress the export of the properties, clear the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ShowAccumulatedPipeData
Show Accumulated Cable Tray Data

Controls the plotting of accumulated information in a material list containing
non-accumulated quantities. That is, for cable tray only, it is possible to have both
accumulated and non-accumulated information in the same material list.
Select the check box to export the settings defined by Accumulated Cable Tray Position,
Accumulated Cable Tray Quantity, and Accumulated Cable Tray Description to the
material list definition (MLD) file. To suppress the export of the properties, clear the check
box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Materials
Show Accumulated Duct Data

Controls the plotting of accumulated information in a material list containing
non-accumulated quantities. That is, for duct only, it is possible to have both accumulated
and non-accumulated information in the same material list.
Select the check box to export the settings defined by Accumulated Duct Position,
Accumulated Duct Quantity, and Accumulated Duct Description to the material list
definition (MLD) file. To suppress the export of the properties, clear the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Accumulated Pipe Position

Specifies the horizontal offset in millimeters or inches to the contents of Alternate Text –394.
The offset is from the material list Start X property.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.AccumulatedPipePosition
Accumulated Cable Tray Position

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Accumulated Duct Position

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Accumulated Pipe Description

Specifies the horizontal offset in millimeters or inches to horizontal offset to accumulated
pipe description. The offset is from the material list Start X property.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.AccumulatedPipeDesc

Materials
Accumulated Cable Tray Description

cable tray description. The offset is from the material list Start X property.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Accumulated Duct Description

duct description. The offset is from the material list Start X property.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Accumulated Pipe Quantity

pipe quantity. The offset is from the material list Start X property.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.AccumulatedPipeQuantity
Accumulated Cable Tray Quantity

cable tray quantity. The offset is from the material list Start X property.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Accumulated Duct Quantity

duct quantity. The offset is from the material list Start X property.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Text Font
type from the list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.TextFont

Materials
Text Height
Specifies the text height for all sections in the material list. Type a value in millimeters or
inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TextHeight
Text Weight
Specifies the text weight. Type a value (integer) between 1 and 9. Used only for
MicroStation.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TextWeight
Text Width Factor

Defines the ratio of width to height of the text in the material list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TextWidthFactor
Content
Controls which category of components are listed on the material list.
 Continuous lists all items in the material list. This is the default setting.
 Fabrication lists fabrication components only.
 Erection lists erection components only.
 Offshore lists offshore components only.
 Erection/Offshore lists erection/offshore components only.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MateriaList.UserDefined.OneSection.Content
Direction Down
Controls the direction in which the material list is printed with reference to Start X and Start
Y. Select the check box to plot the material list from top to bottom. This is the default setting.
For a three-section material list, all sections must be in the same direction.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.OneSection.ListDown

Materials
Maximum Entries
Sets the maximum number of entries in the material list before an overflow sheet is
generated. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.OneSection.MaxEntries
Section1 Content
Sets which category of components is listed in Section 1 of the user-defined material list.
 FABRICATION lists only fabrication components. This is the default setting.
 ERECTION lists erection components.
 OFFSHORE lists only offshore components.
 ERECTION/OFFSHORE lists only erection/offshore components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section1Content
Section1 Down
Controls the direction in which the material list is printed with reference to the Start X and
Start Y settings for the user-defined material list.
Select the check box to plot data from the top down in Section1. To plot data from the
bottom up, clear the check box
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section1Down
Section1 Maximum Entries

Sets the maximum number of entries in Section 1 of the material list before an overflow
sheet is generated. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section1MaxEntries

Materials
Section2 Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content in Section 2. This property setting
cannot be same as Section1 Content.
 FABRICATION lists only fabrication components.
 ERECTION lists only erection components. This is the default setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section2Content
Section2 Direction Down

Controls the direction in which Section 2 of the material list is printed with reference to
Section2 Y Offset.
Select the check box to plot data from the top down in Section 2. This is the default
direction. To plot data from the bottom up, clear the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Controls the direction in which Section 2 of the material list is printed with reference to
Section2 Y Offset.
Select the check box to plot data from the top down in Section 2. This is the default
direction. To plot data from the bottom up, clear the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Section2 X Offset
Controls the X offset for Section 2 of the user-defined material list with reference to the Start
X and Start Y settings. Type a real number in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section2XOffset

Materials
Section2 Y Offset
Controls the Y offset for Section 2 of the user-defined material list with reference to the Start
X and Start Y settings. Type a real number in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.TwoSection.Section2YOffset
Direction Down
Controls the direction in which the material list is plotted with reference to Start X and Start
Y.
Select the check box to plot data from the top down, select the check box. This is the default
setting. To plot data from the bottom up, clear the check box.
For a three-section material list, all sections must be in the same direction.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MateriaList.UserDefined.ThreeSection.ListDown
Section1 Content
Selects which category of components is listed in Section 1 of the user-defined material list.
 FABRICATION lists only fabrication components. This is the default setting.
 ERECTION lists only erection components.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ThreeSection.Section1Content

Controls the maximum number of entries for Section 1 of the material list before an overflow
sheet is generated.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ThreeSection.Section1MaxEntries

Controls the maximum number of entries for Section 2 of the material list before an overflow
sheet is generated. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Materials
Section2 Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content in Section 2. This property setting
cannot be same as Section1 content.
 ERECTION lists only erection components. This is the default setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Section2 X Offset
Controls the X offset for Section 2 of the material list with reference to Start X and Start Y.
Adding a Section 2 X offset results in a horizontal double banking of the BOM. Type a value
(real number in millimeters or inches.
Defines
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ThreeSection.Section2XOffset
Section2 Y Offset
X and Start Y settings. Type a value (real number) in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialListUserDefinedThreeSection.Section2YOffset
Section3 Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content in Section 3 of the user-defined
material list. The default setting is OFFSHORE.
This property setting cannot be the same as Section1 Content or Section2
Content.
 ERECTION lists only erection components.
 OFFSHORE lists only offshore components. This is the default setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Materials

Sets the maximum number of entries in Section 3 of the user-defined material list before an
overflow sheet is generated. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Section3 X Offset
Controls the X offset for Section 3 of the user-defined material list with reference to the Start
Defines
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ThreeSection.Section3XOffset
Section3 Y Offset
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.ThreeSection.Section3YOffset

Materials
User Defined Columns

Specifies the data that is output for three user-definable lists: material, weld, and cut lists.
This must be used with a backing sheet, as the positions given are for the X
coordinate only.
Columns
Defines the columns that appear in the user-defined material list that Isogen plots on the
isometric drawing.
 Attribute specifies the name of the attribute to appear on the material list. Select the
required attribute in the Attribute list.
 Offset specifies the offset in millimeters from the Start X and Start Y settings. Type the
required value.
 Maximum Chars sets the width of the column. Type a value of zero or greater.
 Comment outputs a text comment for any definition contained in the previous columns.
If any text is entered in this field, it is output as a comment, preceded by a !, to the
relevant data or summary report file. In the example below, a text comment has been
entered for the part number, nominal size, item code, and quantity attributes.
The next example illustrates how the text comment is output to the relevant file.
The value that displays on the Columns icon is a count of how many columns
have been defined for the user-defined weld list. The example below indicates the 3
columns are currently defined.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined

Materials
User Defined Remarks

Contains the necessary data to define the position and properties of a Style3 Remarks box,
which is used to plot user-specified remarks attached to components.
Layer
Sets the drawing layer for material list text. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.DrawingLayer
Start X
Specifies the X-coordinate of the starting position for the Remarks box. Type a positive real
number in millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.StartX
Start Y
Specifies the Y-coordinate of the starting position for the Remarks box. Type a positive real
number in millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.StartY
Maximum Entries
Controls the maximum number of lines of text that can fit in the available space used for the
Remarks box. When the maximum is reached, Isogen does not output any additional lines,
and a warning message is output to the Message file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.MaxEntries
Maximum Characters
Sets the maximum number of characters allowed on each output line in the Remarks box.
The maximum number should include the REMARK ID value (positive integer).
When the maximum is reached, Isogen does not output additional lines, and a
warning message is output to the message file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.MaxCharacters

Materials
Vertical Spacing
Sets the text height used in the Remarks box. Type a positive value in millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.VerticalSpacing
Text Height
Sets the text height to be used for the Remarks box in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.TextHeight
Text Weight
Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for MicroStation only.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.RemarksBox.TextWeight

Materials
User Defined Spool Table

Defines the settings for the spool table quantities, which can be output as part of a user-defined
material list.
Enabled
Controls whether the spool table settings are written to the material list definition (MLD) file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable
Data Offset X
Sets the X offset to the first spool quantities position in millimeters or inches, depending on
the setting of the drawing units.
All positions are to the bottom left of the first character.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.DataOffsetX

Materials
Data Offset Y
Sets the Y offset to the first spool quantities position in millimeters or inches, depending on
the setting of the drawing units.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.DataOffsetY
Column Offset
Controls the horizontal offset between each column of spool quantities on the material list.
Type a value in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.ColumnOffset
Header Offset X
Sets the X offset to the spool identifier position in millimeters or inches.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.HeaderOffsetX

Materials
Header Offset Y
Sets the Y offset to the spool identifier position in millimeters or inches.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.HeaderOffsetY
Layer
Sets the drawing layer for the spool table text. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.DrawingLayer
Maximum Columns
Sets the maximum number of spool quantity columns that can fit on the backing sheet.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.MaxColumns
Overflow
Controls how skew sections containing branch connections are depicted in terms of the
skew indication on the isometric drawing. Such skews may be shown as either a single,
overall enclosure or as a series of separate box or triangle enclosures.
 Individual depicts skews with a series of separate box or triangle enclosures, one
enclosure per branch.
 Overall depicts a single overall skew.
Defines:
Option Switch - 97
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SkewOverall

Materials
Output Lines for Pipe Length

Controls the number of lines used for output of pipe lengths. Used in conjunction with AText
-537.
The form of length output on the material list is controlled by the Linear Quantity Style
setting. However, in order to save space, it is possible to have a two line format. By default,
Output Lines for Pipe Length is set to 1, which uses the default Linear Quantity Style
setting. If AText -537 is being used, then Output Lines for Pipe Length must be set to 2.
AText -537 is used to indicate the new line by using the $ and the setting for the
units indication to be output, as shown in the example below:
-537$m 13.5 m
m
-537$mm 13500 mm
mm
-537$FT 19.5 Ft
Ft
-537$FT 13.5 Ft (instead of 13.5')

Ft (instead of 13.5')
 Do not use AText -537 if pipe quantities are requested in Ft-Ins (13'-5") units.
 If set, this AText takes over control of the units indication output on all styles of material
list, as well as allowing a new line indicator to force two line output. If it is not set, then
normal defaults apply.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.OutputLinesTube
Text Height
Sets the text height to be used. Type a positive number in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.TextHeight
Text Height Multiple

Sets the height of the text to be output in multiple line form on the material list. Type a
positive number in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.TextHeightMultiple

Materials
Text Weight
Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for MicroStation only.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.TextWeight

Materials
Variable
Defines settings for the variable layout material list format. This format includes options to define
column headers. You can use a user-defined drawing frame or the standard Isogen drawing
frame.
Type
Controls the type of material list.
 Normal creates a special type of material list.
accumulated. Give pulled bends a U prefix and welds a W or B prefix.
 Normal with alpha pointers suppresses creation of a special type of material list. The
software uses an alpha system of material list pointers (A, B, C.) instead of the default
numeric system.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.MLType
Layout
Specifies the material list layout pattern.
 Standard produces the standard sectionalized type with group headings and
component sub-group headings.
 Continuous produces a layout without headings and sub-headings.
This type of list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical
groups, such as pipe, flanges, and fittings. If required, you can switch off the dividing lines
using Show Dividing Lines.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.Layout
Plot on Right
Sets the position of the material list.
Select the check box to print the material list on the right side of the drawing. To print the
material list on the left side of the drawing, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.RightSide

Materials
Show Dividing Lines

Specifies an IDFGEN-generated diagnostic and controls the output of disconnection
messages on the isometric drawing.
Select the check box to output a message at locations where an increased tolerance is used
to connect pipelines.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.DisconnectionMessage
Default Description Width

Defines the number of characters allocated for the width of the Item Description column.
Descriptions that exceed the limit are wrapped to the following line.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.DefaultDescriptionWidth
Line Spacing
Controls the line spacing distance on a plotted material list. This value is a ratio that applies
to standard line spacing. For example, a value of 90 reduces the line spacing, while a value
of 110 increases it.
Type a value in the range 75-125. The default setting is 100.
Defines:
Option Switch - 29
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.LineSpacing
Insert Blank Lines

Sets whether the software inserts blank lines.
Select the check box to insert blank lines after single line entries in the material list. When
the check box is cleared, blank lines are not inserted following single line entries. This
provides the possibility of the material list being shorter.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.InsertBlankLines

Materials
Header Text
Specifies a text string for the column header.
Open the free-form text box, type the data in the text box, and then click . The
software updates the style and displays the text under the Header Text property label.
 Use the forward slash symbol ( \ ) to start a new line. To produce a vertical break, use
the pipe symbol ( | ).
 Width is defined by the length of the last line, terminated with the pipe character (|). The
length of the last line should be at least as long as the total width of data to be displayed
below it.
 Column description text in the Header Text text box must lie in the column bounds as
defined.
 Do not put text in columns that are not within the specified range of column.
 You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the
material list definition (MLD) file.
 You can use the @ symbol instead of a space when you create headings for variable
layout bills of materials. Isogen interprets the @ symbol as a null character. It is easier
to count the number of spaces between the individual headers if you use the @ symbol
instead of using spaces.

Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.HeaderLines
Text Size
Controls the text size for the plotted material list.
 Small outputs characters 2.1 mm high.
 Medium outputs characters 2.4 mm high. This is the default setting.
 Large outputs characters 2.8 mm high.
 XLarge outputs characters 3.5 mm high.
 XXLarge outputs characters 4.2 mm high.
 XXXLarge outputs characters 4.9 mm high.
 User outputs characters with a height defined by Custom Text Size.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.TextSize

Materials
Custom Text Size

Specifies a user-defined text size for the material list. Type a value in millimeters. This
property is applicable only if Text Size is set to User.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.UserTextSize
Text Width
Specifies the character width if you are using a fixed-width font. Type a value (real number)
in the range 10-99 in 1/20 millimeters.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.TextWidth
Text Weight
Specifies the thickness of the text. Type a value in the range 0-9.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.TextWeight
Unique Delimiter
Defines the separator used to delimit part number data in the Material List Definition (MLD)
file. Supported characters are listed below.
 Blank
 Comma (1,2,3, and so on)
 Semi-colon (1;2;3 and so on)
 Colon (1:2:3 and so on)
 Setting this option is not required when Format for the report type is set to
Fixed.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout.UniqueDelimiter

Materials
Variable Columns
Defines the columns that appear in the variable layout material list.
Columns
Defines the columns that appear in the variable layout material list that Isogen plots on the
isometric drawing.
or Centre.
 Start specifies the starting point of the column. Type a value in the range 1-999.

Materials
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.VariableLayout

Materials
Fixed
Defines settings for the fixed layout material list format. This format produces a simple material
list. You can use a user-defined drawing frame or the standard Isogen drawing frame.
Active List must be set to Fixed. For more information, see Settings (on page
368).
Type
Controls the type of material list that Isogen outputs on the isometric drawing.
 Normal suppresses creation of special type of material list
accumulated. Isogen assigns a U prefix to pulled bends, and assigns a W or B prefix to
welds.
 Normal with alpha pointers creates a regular material list. However, Isogen uses an
alpha system of material list pointers (A, B, C...) instead of the default numeric system.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.MLType
Layout
Sets the material list layout pattern.
 Standard produces the standard sectionalized type with group headings and
component sub-group headings.
 Continuous produces a layout without headings and sub-headings.
This type of list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical
groups, such as pipe, flanges, and fittings. If required, you can switch off the dividing lines
using Show Dividing Lines.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.Layout
Plot on Right
Sets the position of the material list.
Select the check box to print the material list on the right side of the drawing. To print on the
left side, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.RightSide

Materials
Show Dividing Lines

Specifies lines in the material list. This property provides a way to separate the different
groups in the material list when the list does not have headings and sub-headings.
Select the check box to display dividing lines between groups, such as PIPES, FLANGES,
or FITTINGS. To display no horizontal dividing lines between logical groups, clear the check
box.
This option works only when Layout is set to Continuous and Type is set to
Special.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.ShowDividingLines
Show Item Descriptions

Controls whether item descriptions are printed on the material list. When item descriptions
are suppressed, the material list becomes narrower. Select the check box to print item
descriptions on the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.ShowItemDescriptions
Line Spacing
Controls the line spacing distance on a plotted material list. This value is a ratio that applies
to the default setting of 100.
Set a value less than 100 to reduce the line spacing. Set a value greater than 100 to
increase the line spacing. For example, a value of 90 reduces the line spacing, whereas a
value of 110 increases it.
Defines:
Option Switch - 29
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.LineSpacing
Insert Blank Lines

Specifies whether the software inserts blank lines.
Select the check box to insert blank lines after single line entries in the material list. When
this check box is cleared, blank lines are not inserted following single line entries. This
provides the possibility of the material list being shorter.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialLlist.FixedLayout.InsertBlankLines

Materials
Text Size
Controls the user-defined material list text size. Use this property only when Custom Text
Size is set to User.
 Small outputs characters 2.1 mm high.
 Medium outputs characters 2.4 mm high. This is the default setting.
 Large outputs characters 2.8 mm high.
 XLarge outputs characters 3.5 mm high.
 XXLarge outputs characters 4.2 mm high.
 XXXLarge outputs characters 4.9 mm high.
 User outputs characters with a height defined by Custom Text Size.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.TextSize
Custom Text Size

Specifies a user-defined size in 1/10 millimeters for text output in the fixed material list. Type
a value (integer) in the range 10-99.
Only use this option if Text Size is set to User.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.UserTextSize
Text Width
Defines the character width in a fixed-width font. Type a value in the range 0-99.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialLlist.FixedLayout.TextWidth
Text Weight
Specifies the thickness of the text. Type a value in the range 0-9.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.TextWeight
Show Title Block

Controls whether the title block appears on the drawing.
Select the check box to display the title block as defined by the Title Block Position setting.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.TitleBlockVisible

Materials
Title Block Position

Controls the position of the title block.
 Pipeline positions the title block at the bottom right corner of pipeline drawing area. This
is the default position.
 MatList positions the title block at the bottom of material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedLayout.TitleBlockPos

Materials
Material Group Transfers

Stores the information that allows you to move a component from one sort group to another on
the material list. For example, you can move a blank flange can to the FLAN sort group.
Transfers
Specifies the list of components to be transferred from one sort group to another. Open the
grid, and then define the attributes listed below as needed.
 IDF Record Identifier specifies the record ID of the component type. This is the
intermediate data file (IDF) record number for the component, such as 107 for a blank
flange or 90 for a control valve. Valid IDs are integers in the range 0-999. For more
information, see Appendix: Record Identification Numbers.
 New Group specifies a new group for the component type. Available sort groups
include:
 PIPE (pipe)
 VALV (valves and inline items)
 FITT (fittings)
 INST (instruments)
 FLAN (flanges)
 SUPP (supports)
 GASK (gaskets)
 MISC (miscellaneous)
 BOLT (bolts)
 WELD (welds)
 SKEY transfers a record ID to a component group based on a user-defined SKEY. In
the example below, record ID 90 (instrument) is transferred to the valve group (VALV)
but only instruments that have an SKEY of CV** (refers to a control valve with any end
preparation).
RecordID Group SKEY
90 VALV CV**
The value that displays on the Transfers icon is a count of how many
components are specified for transfer. The example below indicates that 3 components are
currently defined.

Materials
SKEYS Defined as Instruments

Specifies user-defined symbol keys.
Instrument SKEYS
Contains a list of each symbol key (SKEY) that Isogen treats as as instrument. This property
holds one SKEY from that list.
 Classify SKEY as Instrument specifies a symbol key text string.
The value that displays on the Instrument SKEYS icon is a count of how many
SKEYs have been defined. The example below indicates that three SKEYs are currently
defined.

Materials
Alternative Texts
Title Block Date

Fixed material list only: The date is taken from the DATE type record in the pipeline input data
file and automatically appended in the required format (UK, EUR, or USA) to the AText. The
default value is DATE.
AText ID: -250
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Title Block Project

Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area if the project number is set in a
PROJECT-IDENTIFIER type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is
appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default value is PROJECT NO.
AText ID: -251
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Title Block Batch

Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area if a batch reference is set in a BATCH type
record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form
a composite record. The default value is BATCH REF.
AText ID: -252
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Title Block Spec

Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area is a piping specification is set in a
PIPING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended
to the AText to form a composite record. The default value is PIPING SPEC.
AText ID: -253
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Title Block Revision

Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area if an issue (also known as a revision)
identifier is set in a REVISION type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this
record is appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default value is ISS.
AText ID: -254
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Spool Drawing Label

Fixed material list only: Used on spool isometric drawings for the identification of individual spool
pieces. A software-generated spool number is appended to the AText to form a composite
message. This AText is not used if a spool prefix (SPOOL-PREFIX type record) or spool
identifier (SPOOL-IDENTIFIER type record) is included in the pipeline input data file. The default
value is SPL.
AText ID: -257
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
January
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is JAN.
AText ID: -258
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
February
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is FEB.
AText ID: -259
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
March
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is MAR.
AText ID: -260
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
April
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is APR.
AText ID: -261
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
May
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is MAY.
AText ID: -262
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
June
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is JUN.
AText ID: -263
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
July
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is JUL.
AText ID: -264
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
August
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is AUG.
AText ID: -265
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
September
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is SEP.
AText ID: -266
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
October
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is OCT.
AText ID: -267
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
November
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is NOV.
AText ID: -268
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
December
Fixed material list only: Used to generate a date record. The default value is DEC.
AText ID: -269
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Title Block Insulation Spec

Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area if an insulation specification identifier is set in
an INSULATION-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is
appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default value is INSULATION SPEC.
AText ID: -270
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Title Block Tracing Spec

Fixed material list only: Used in the title block area if a tracing specification identifier is set in a
TRACING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is
appended to the AText to form a composite message. The default value is TRACING SPEC.
AText ID: -271
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Fab Material Heading

Specifies the category heading under which components required for SHOP Fabrication are
listed. The default value is FABRICATION MATERIALS.
AText ID: -300
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Part Heading
Specifies the part number heading used in conjunction with AText -302 (Number Heading) to
form a composite message. The default value is PT.
AText ID: -301
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Number Heading
Used in conjunction with AText -301 (Part Heading) to form a composite message. The default
value is NO.
AText ID: -302
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Description Heading
Specifies the heading in the material listing under which components are described according to
their catalog component description. The default value is COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.
AText ID: -303
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Nominal Size Heading

Specifies the heading under which the nominal size of each item is listed. Used in conjunction
with AText -330 (NS Inch Indicator) or AText -331 (NS MM Indicator) to form a composite
message. The default value is N.S.
AText ID: -304
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Item Code Heading

Specifies the heading under which component identification codes are listed. The default value
is ITEM-CODE.
AText ID: -305
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Quantity Heading
Specifies the heading under which the required quantities are listed. The default value is QTY.
AText ID: -306
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Pipe Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-header under which pipe is listed. The default value is PIPE.
AText ID: -307
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Fittings Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-header under which pipe fittings are listed, such as elbows and tees.
The default value is FITTINGS.
AText ID: -308
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Flanges Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-header under which all flanges are listed. The default value is
FLANGES.
AText ID: -309
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Erection Material Heading

Specifies the category header under which components required for SITE erection, or
construction, are listed. The default value is ERECTION MATERIALS.
AText ID: -310
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Gaskets Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all gaskets are listed. The default value is
GASKETS.
AText ID: -311
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Bolts Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all bolts are listed. The default value is BOLTS.
AText ID: -312
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Valves and Inline Sub-Heading

Specifies the group sub-heading under which all valves and in-line items are listed. The default
value is VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS.
AText ID: -313
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Instruments Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all instruments are listed. The default value is
INSTRUMENTS.
AText ID: -314
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Supports Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all supports are listed. The default value is
SUPPORTS.
AText ID: -315
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Spools Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all spool numbers are listed. The default value is
PIPE SPOOLS.
AText ID: -316
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Piping NS Summary Heading

Used in conjunction with AText -318 (Pipe CL Summary Heading) to which the total centerline
length per bore is automatically computed and listed. Also uses AText -330 (NS Inch Indicator)
or AText -331 (NS MM Indicator) to indicate units. For more information, see Alternative Text
(on page 434) in Materials > Text. The default value is PIPE NS.
AText ID: -317
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Pipe CL Summary Heading

Used in conjunctions with AText -317 (Pipe NS Summary Heading). Also uses AText -329
(Metre Indicator) or AText -361, depending on the units being used. The default value is CL
LENGTH.
AText ID: -318
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Cut length Sub-Heading

Specifies the heading under which all the cut pipe lengths are listed. The default value is CUT
PIPE LENGTH.
AText ID: -319
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Piece Sub-Heading
Specifies the sub-heading to AText -319 (Cut Length Sub-Heading) under which the cut pipe
piece numbers are listed. This AText is used in conjunction with AText -321 (Piece No
Sub-Heading) to form a composite message. The default value is PIECE.
AText ID: -320
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Piece No. Sub-Heading

Used in conjunction with AText -320 (Piece Sub-Heading) to form a composite message. The
default value is NO.
AText ID: -321
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Cut Sub-Heading
Specifies the sub-heading to AText -319 (Cut Length Sub-Heading) under which the actual cut
pipe lengths are listed. This AText is used in conjunction with AText -323 (CutLength
Sub-Heading) to form a composite heading. The default value is CUT.
AText ID: -322
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
CutLength Sub-Heading
Used in conjunction with AText -322 (Cut Sub-Heading) to form a composite message. The
default value is LENGTH.
AText ID: -323
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Remarks Sub-Heading
Specifies the sub-heading to AText -319 (Cut Length Sub-Heading) under which one of the
ATexts -326, -327, -328, or -500, if applicable, is listed. The default value is REMARKS.
AText ID: -324
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Spool Number Separator

Specifies a spool number separator on the material list.
AText ID: -325
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Spool ID Heading
Indicates a header or column identifier on the following printed output whenever spool identifiers
are listed. The default value is SPOOL ID.
 Printed material list (Fixed or Variable)
 Printed material control file
 Printed weld summary
AText ID: -503
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Part Numbers
Controls the representation of part numbers on the isometric drawing.
The Part Numbers style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Format defines the representation of part numbers on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Format (on page 423).
 Enclosure defines how enclosures for part numbers appear on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Enclosure (on page 425).
 Traceability Table defines a unique part numbers table that can be output on the isometric
drawing and the traceability output file. For more information, see Traceability Table (on
page 427).
 Traceability Columns controls the attribute data that is output to the traceability file For
more information, see Traceability Columns (on page 429).
Format
Defines the representation of part numbers on the isometric drawing.
Show
Suppresses the plotting of part numbers and associated enclosure boxes on the drawing.
Select the check box to display part numbers and their enclosure boxes.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.Visible
Length
Sets a fixed length for part numbers (1-9 characters or variable). Select a fixed part number
length or Variable from the list.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoLength
Number of Spaces
Sets the number of spaces used for Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3 enclosures (as specified by
the Additional Items Style setting).
Set the number of spaces to use. If no value is set, Isogen uses a default value of 2.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoSpaces

Materials
Unique Part Number

Controls the type of suffix used for the unique part number and whether unique part
numbers are used.
 Alpha uses an alphabetic suffix.
 Numeric uses a numeric suffix.
 Off turns off all unique part number facilities.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniquePartNumber
Part Number Suffix

Controls sequencing of the identifier suffix used for part numbering on the isometric drawing.
 Continuous generates unique part number suffixes as a continuous sequence across
all output drawings, such as 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.7 to 6.11 on Drg 2 of 2, and
so on.
 PerDrawing generates unique part number suffixes with a new sequence for each
drawing, such as 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.1 to 6.5 on Drg 2 of 2, and so on.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.IdentifierSuffix
Unique Gasket Numbers

Controls output of unique part numbers on gaskets. Select the check box to output unique
part numbers on gaskets.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniqueNosGaskets
Unique Bolt Numbers

Controls output of unique part numbers on bolts. Select the check box to output unique part
numbers on bolts.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.UniqueNosBolts

Materials
Enclosure
Defines how enclosures for part numbers appear on the isometric drawing.
Style
 Square Ends
 Round Ends
 Diamond Ends
 Circle

Materials
 Double Circle
 Ellipse
accommodate.
Defines:
Size
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle, and eclipse
enclosure style.
enclosure. The default setting is 2. The example below shows the default setting used for
the circle enclosure style:
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.PartNoEnclSize

Materials
Traceability Table
Defines a unique part numbers table that can be output on the isometric drawing and the
traceability output file.
Maximum Entries
Controls the maximum number of entries before an overflow drawing is created if you have
selected the Overflow check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.MaxEntries
Enabled
Controls the creation of the traceability file. Select the check box to create the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.Enabled
Path
Defines the output location of the traceability file. Type the full path and filename in the box.
Alternatively, click Browse , and navigate to the file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.Path
Show
Controls whether the unique part numbers table is plotted. Select the check box to plot the
table.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.PlotUniquePtNoTable
Start X
Defines the starting X position of the list in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.StartX

Materials
Start Y
Defines the starting Y position of the list in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.StartY
Layer
Sets the drawing layer for the unique part number table. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.DrawingLayer
Continuous Down
Controls the direction of the unique part numbers table.
Select the check box to set the table direction so that it is down. To set the table direction so
it is down, clear the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.ContinuousDown
Vertical Spacing
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Overflow
Controls whether an overflow drawing is created when the Maximum Entries setting is
exceeded. Select the check box to create an overflow drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.Traceability.TableOverflow
Text Height
Sets the text height to be used. Type a positive number in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - MaterialList.UserDefined.SpoolTable.TextHeight

Materials
Traceability Columns
Controls the attribute data that is output to the traceability file.
Columns
Defines the columns that appear in the traceability file.
 Justification sets the alignment of text in the column. Select Left, Numeric, or Right.
 Start specifies the starting point of the column. Type a value in the range 1-999.

The value that displays on the Columns icon is a count of how many columns
have been defined for the traceability file. The example below indicates the 3 columns are
currently defined.

Materials
Accumulation
Defines settings for the accumulation of materials and components on the material list.
The Accumulation style group contains the options group listed below.
 Settings controls the accumulation of materials and components on the material list. For
more information, see Settings (on page 430).
Settings
Controls the accumulation of materials and components on the material list.
 The properties that display depend on the type of active isometric drawing style: pipeline,
cable tray, or HVAC. Some properties are specific to piping isometric drawings, while others
are specific to cable tray or HVAC isometric drawings.
 The isometric drawing properties listed below do not apply to the user-defined material list or
when Type for the Fixed or Variable styles is set to Special:
 Bolts
 Gaskets
 Offshore Items
 Erection Items
 Fab Items
Fab Items
Controls the accumulation of Fabrication materials. Available settings depend on the active
 All Except Pipe suppresses accumulation of all Fabrication materials (excluding pipe).
 All Except Cable Tray suppresses accumulation of all Fabrication materials (excluding
cable tray).
 All Except Duct suppresses accumulation of all Fabrication materials (excluding duct).
 None suppresses accumulation of Fabrication materials but list them separately in the
material list.
 Normal accumulates Fabrication materials normally. This is the default setting.
 Pipe Only accumulates only pipe.
 Cable Tray Only accumulates only cable tray.
 Duct Only accumulates only duct.
 Suppress suppresses the display of Fabrication materials in the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FabAccumulation

Materials
Erection Items
Controls the accumulation of Erection materials. Available settings depend on the active
 All Except Pipe suppresses the accumulation of all Erection materials (excluding pipe).
 All Except Cable Tray suppresses the accumulation of all Erection materials (excluding
cable tray).
 All Except Pipe suppresses the accumulation of all Erection materials (excluding duct).
 None suppresses the accumulation of Erection materials (including pipe, cable tray, or
duct).
 Normal accumulates Erection materials normally. This is the default setting.
 Pipe Only accumulates only piping.
 Suppress suppresses the display of Erection materials in the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.ErectAccumulation
Offshore Items
Controls the accumulation of Offshore materials in the material list.
 All Except Pipe suppresses the accumulation of all Offshore materials (excluding pipe).
 All Except Cable Tray suppresses the accumulation of all Offshore materials
(excluding cable tray).
 All Except Duct suppresses the accumulation of all Offshore materials (excluding duct).
 None suppresses the accumulation of Offshore materials (including pipe, cable tray, or
duct).
 Normal accumulates Offshore materials normally. This is the default setting.
 Pipe Only accumulates only piping.
 Suppress suppresses the display of Offshore materials in the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.OffshoreAccumulation

Materials
Fixed Pipe
Controls the accumulation of fixed pipe materials. Isogen considers fixed pipe to be a
component and accumulates materials by quantity. Using Fixed Pipe you can specify that
Isogen accumulate fixed pipe materials by length for output to material list and material
control files.
 By Quantity accumulates fixed pipe by quantity.
 By Length accumulates fixed pipe by length.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedPipeAccumulation
Fixed Pieces
Controls the accumulation of fixed piece materials. Isogen considers fixed pieces to be
components and accumulates materials by quantity. Using Fixed Pieces you can specify
that Isogen accumulate fixed piece materials by length for output to material list and material
control files.
 By Quantity accumulates fixed pieces by quantity.
 By Length accumulates fixed pieces by length.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.FixedPipeAccumulation
Gaskets
Controls the accumulation of gaskets.
 Normal accumulates gaskets normally.
 None specifies non-accumulation of gaskets.
 Suppress suppresses the accumulation of all gaskets.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.GasketAccumulation
Bolts
Controls whether Isogen includes or excludes bolt components from the material list.
 None results in each occurrence of a bolt component being an individual entry on the
material list
 Normal accumulates bolt components normally.
 Suppress suppresses accumulation of all bolt components.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.BoltAccumulation

Materials
Welds
Controls the accumulation of welds.
 Normal accumulates welds normally.
 None suppresses the accumulation of welds but lists each one separately in the
material list.
 Suppress suppresses the accumulation of welds in the material list.
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.WeldAccumulation
Supports with Matching Tags

Controls the accumulation of support with matching tags.
 Non-Accumulate suppresses accumulation of supports with matching names (tags).
 Accumulate accumulates supports with matching names (tags).
Defines:
I-Configure - MaterialList.SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation

Materials
Text
Controls plotted material and cut pipe list heading texts.
The Text style group contains a single options group:
 Alternative Text sets AText values directly related to material and cut pipe list heading
texts. For more information, see Alternative Text (on page 434).
Alternative Text
Metre Indicator
Denotes lengths of pipe are in meters. Also used to indicate unit type meters in centerline length
summary. The default value is M.
AText ID: -329
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
NS Inch Indicator
Denotes nominal sizes are in inches. Also used in conjunction with AText -304 (Nominal Size
Heading) and AText -317 (Piping NS Summary Heading). The default value is INS.
For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 410) in Materials > Drawing
Material List.
AText ID: -330
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
NS MM Indicator
Denotes the nominal sizes are in millimeters. Also used in conjunction with AText -304
(Nominal Size Heading) and AText -317 (Piping NS Summary Heading). The default value is
MM.
For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 410) in Materials > Drawing
Material List.
AText ID: -331
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Page Label
Indicates the page number in the printed material list. The page number is automatically
appended. The default value is PAGE.
AText ID: -332
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Line Reference Label

Indicates the pipeline reference in a printed material list. The pipeline reference is automatically
appended, The default value is PIPELINE REF.
AText ID: -333
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Item Code Suffix Fixed Pipe

Used only on fixed length piping. The contents of this AText are appended to the item code to
form a composite code when one or more ends of the fixed length spool has a special flange.
The default value is S.
AText ID: -334
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Description Suffix Fixed Pipe

Used only on fixed length piping. The contents of this AText are appended to the item
description to form a composite message. This AText is used whenever AText -334 (Item Code
Suffix Fixed Pipe) is used. The default value is WITH SPECIAL RATING FLANGE(S) (SEE
ISO).
AText ID: -335
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Miscellaneous Sub-Heading
Specifies the group sub-heading under which all non-categorized components are listed. The
default value is MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS.
AText ID: -339
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Induction Bend Remark

Identifies pipe required in the fabrication of induction bends. The induction bend tag is appended
to the AText to form a complete text string. The default value is INDUCTION BEND ID.
AText ID: -340
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Equipment Trim Sub-Heading

Specifies the sub-heading under which all equipment trim materials are listed. The default value
is EQUIPMENT TRIM MATERIALS.
AText ID: -341
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Nozzle Ref Sub-Heading

Specifies the sub-heading under which all materials associated with an individual nozzle are
listed. The content of the related NOZZLE-REFERENCE is appended to the AText to form a
complete text string. Used on equipment trim drawings only. The default value is NOZZLE REF.
AText ID: -342
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Continued Text
Identifies situations where the listing of components for a nozzle is being continued from a
previous drawing. Used with AText -342 (Nozzle Ref Sub-Heading) on equipment trim
drawings only. The default value is CONTINUED.
AText ID: -343
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Hygienic Connector Sub-Heading

Specifies the group sub-heading under which all materials for end connections for hygienic type
piping are listed (liners, nuts, clamps, and so on). The default value is END CONNECTORS.
AText ID: -344
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
And Text
Used with AText -342 (Nozzle Ref Sub-Heading) to form a sub-heading under which all
components associated with interconnected nozzles are output on the material list for an
equipment trim drawing. The format of the resulting nozzle heading is NOZZLE REF - N22 and
N23.
AText ID: -345
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Alternate Bottom Overflow Label

Denotes an alternative to the AText used when generating a material list overflow message at
the bottom of the master drawing material list. This is a combination of AText -209 (Pipeline
Connection) and AText -255 (Drawing Label).
For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 217) in Drawing Area >
Content and Alternative Texts (on page 246) in Drawing Area > Text, respectively.
AText ID: -347
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Alternate Top Overflow Label

Functions as an alternative to the AText used when generating a material list overflow message
at the top of overflow material list drawing. This is a combination of AText -276 (Continued
From) and AText -255 (Drawing Label).
For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 217) in Drawing Area >
Content and Alternative Texts (on page 246) in Drawing Area > Text, respectively.
AText ID: -348
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
End One Heading

Denotes the column heading on the cut pipe list. Also appears in the isometric drawing area
section when it is necessary to identify a specific end of a cut piece. The default value is
END$ONE.
AText ID: -362
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
End Two Heading

Denotes the column heading on the cut pipe list. The default value is END$TWO.
AText ID: -363
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Item Code Heading

Denotes the last heading on the cut pipe list when item code heading is required. See also
AText -365 (Alternate Last Heading). The default value is ITEM$CODE.
AText ID: -364
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Alternate Last Heading

Denotes the an alternative last column heading on the cut pipe list. See also AText -364 (Item
Code Heading). If the part number is required on the cut list instead of the item code, set AText
-364 to blank and AText -365 to the required alternative heading, such as part number.
AText ID: -365
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Square Cut Label

Denotes square cut in the End Condition columns on the cut pipe list. The default value is
SQ.CUT.
AText ID: -366
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Bevel Label
Denotes bevel in the End Condition columns on the cut pipe list. The default value is BEVEL.
AText ID: -367
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Screwed Label
Denotes screwed in the End Condition columns on the cut pipe list. The default value is
SCREWED.
AText ID: -368
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Shaped Label
Denotes shaped in the End Condition columns on the cut pipe list. The default value is
SHAPED.
AText ID: -369
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Mitred Label
Denotes mitred in the End Condition columns on the cut pipe list. The default value is MITRED.
AText ID: -370
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Angle Label
Used on special type pulled bends where angle information is appended to the item description
field on the material list. The default value is ANGLE.
AText ID: -374
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Fab Label
Identifies Fabrication material when Category is used as a data item on a variable or
user-defined material list. The default value is FAB.
AText ID: -376
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Erect Label
Identifies Erection material when Category is used as a data item on a variable or user-defined
material list. The default value is EREC.
AText ID: -377
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Offshore Label
Identifies Offshore material when Category is used as a data item on a variable or user-defined
material list. The default value is OFF.
AText ID: -378
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Multiple Values Label

Indicates that multiple component attributes are present for a particular material entry. The
default value is MULTIPLE.
AText ID: -392
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Additional Material indicator

Used on the cut list in conjunction with additional length added to the cut piece. The default
value is ADD MATERIAL.
AText ID: -393
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Grooved Identifier
Indicates a grooved end preparation for Victaulic pipe connections on the cut pipe list/report.
The default value is GROOVED.
AText ID: -426
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Flared Identifier
Indicates a flared end preparation on the cut pipe list/report. The default value is FLARED.
AText ID: -427
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Screwed Female Identifier

Indicates a female screwed end preparation on the cut pipe list/report. The default value is
SCREWED.
AText ID: -428
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Socket Female Identifier

Indicates a female socket weld/compression/glued/push fit end preparation on the cut pipe
list/report. The default value is SOCKET.
AText ID: -431
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Alternate Units Label

Offers an alternative units indication on any length output on any style of material list.
AText ID: -537
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Alternate Bolt Units Label

Offers an alternative form of bolt diameter/length output on any style of material list.
AText ID: -538
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Bolt Diameter Heading

Offers an optional column heading for bolt diameter where the bolt units are different to the
normal pipeline units.
AText ID: -540
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Scalar Quantities Suffix

Outputs text to supplement scalar quantities that appear in the material list on the drawing and
material control file.
AText ID: -554
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Materials
Spool Sub-Heading
Identifies materials belonging to spools on the material list. The default value is SPOOL.
AText ID: -555
? Value: Spool Number
$ Supported: Yes

Materials
Reports
Defines the content and format of the material control file, printed material list, and the Neutral
report. The collection of properties and attributes that appear in Materials > Reports is only a
subset of Drawing Manager > Reports, which includes all of the available Isogen reports and
applicable properties and attributes. For more information, see Reports (on page 49).

Spools
SECTION 7
Spools
Defines the data required for the output of spool attributes data on the isometric drawing and to
summary report files. This category also contains a collection of properties that control the
assignment of enclosure styles to the spool attributes used to plot the on the isometric. This
category also contains properties that define the data to be output to the spool information file.
The Spools category includes the style groups listed below:
 Settings - Organizes a collection of properties that define spool attribute data and the
assignment of enclosure styles on spool isometric drawing. For more information, see
Settings (on page 446).
 Flat Spools - Organizes properties that define settings for flat spool drawings. For more
information, see Flat Spools (on page 450).
 Attributes - Organizes a collection of properties that control the creation of spool attributes
and the assignment of enclosures. For more information, see Attributes (on page 454).
 Reports - Organizes a collection of properties that define the content of the spool
information file. For more information, see Reports.

Spools
Settings
Defines spool attribute data and controls the assignment of enclosure styles on the spool
isometric drawing.
The Settings style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Spool Breaks sets properties that control spool creation and site weld assignment. For
more information, see Spool Breaks (on page 447). This options group is available only for
piping isometric drawings.
 Spool Identifiers sets properties related to spool identifiers. For more information, see
Spool Identifiers (on page 447).
 Enclosures sets properties for spool ID enclosures. For more information, see Enclosures
(on page 448).
Spool Breaks
Controls the assignment of site welds.
Site Welds are Not Assigned to Spools

Controls site weld assignment to adjoining spools. By default, site welds are assigned to
spools if they are adjoining.
Select the check box to suppress the assignment of site welds to adjoining spools. To
assign site welds to adjoining spools, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteWeldsNotAssignedToSpools
Spool Identifiers
Sets properties for spool identifiers.
Type
Turns on and off the display of spool identifiers.
 None turns off the display of spool identifiers to be suppressed. This is the default
setting.
 Numeric includes model spool numbers on the isometric drawing.
 Alphabetic uses an alphabetic system of A, B, C, and so on.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDType

Spools
Enclosures
Sets properties for spool ID enclosures.
Style
Specifies the enclosure shape for the spool identifiers.
 None uses no enclosure.
 Square Brackets encloses spool identifiers in the standard square brackets or a double
box enclosure.
 Diamond Ends encloses spool identifiers in a diamond-ended box.
 Round encloses spool identifiers in a round-ended box.
 Triangular encloses spool identifiers in a triangle-shaped box.
 Diamond Box encloses spool identifiers in a diamond-shaped box.

Spools
 Square Box encloses spool identifiers in a square-ended box.
 Circle encloses spool identifiers in a circle.
 Double Circle encloses spool identifiers in a double circle.
 Ellipse encloses spool identifiers in an ellipse.
the Spools > Settings > Spool Identifiers > Size setting (default 2 characters), which
defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set,
the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDEnclosure

Spools
Layout
Controls the size of the spool ID enclosure.
Specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that are used by the software
to pad-out the Style setting effectively increases the size of the enclosure. The size of the
text, which is controlled by the Text Size setting, that is displayed within any increased size
enclosure is not increased in size. The data string associated with each identifier consists of
a combination of the @, $, and ? characters.
 The ? character indicates where the actual data from the declared record should be
located in the 'padded-out' record.
Setting the value to the text string @$@@?@@$@ increases the Style with the
diamond-end enclosure as shown in the example below:
Use the increase in size with care as it affects the isometric representation
considerably.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SpoolIDEnclosureStyle

Spools
Flat Spools
Defines settings for flat spool drawings.
The Flat Spools style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Settings sets properties that define flat spool drawings. For more information, see Settings
(on page 451).
 Alternative Text sets AText values directly related to flat spool drawings. For more
information, see Alternative Text (on page 452).
Settings
Defines settings for flat spool drawings.
Display Up Direction
Allows the Up direction to be displayed on the isometric drawing. The Up direction shown is
relevant to the longest leg length output in the horizontal plane (bottom left to top right) of
Select the check box to display the Up direction on the longest leg of flat spool. This setting
is only applicable when Orientation Control is set to Longest Leg in E/W plant, Second
Longest in N/S plane. The example below shows the Up direction rotated 90-degrees
counter clockwise:
To display the North arrow on all drawings except flat spool isometric drawings, clear the
check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.FlatSpoolArrow
Orientation Control
Controls placement of the longest pipe in a flat spool drawing.
 Maximum Legs Flat
 Parallel Legs Flat
 Longest Leg in E/W plant, Second Longest in N/S plane
Setting Orientation Control to Parallel Legs Flat is not recommended.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Controls.FlatSpoolOrientation

Spools
Alternative Text
Flat Spool Offset Callout

Shows the offset on flat spools. The default value is OFFSET DIRECTION.
AText ID: -435
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
ATexts -481 to -486 are used in DIRECTION records in the pipeline input data file
when indicating compound directions for some components in skewed pipelines. They are also
used when Isogen is generating ORIENTATION and CONNECTION DIRECTION messages on
flat spools.
X Direction
Shows the direction component in positive X. The default value is E.
AText ID: -481
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Y Direction
Shows the direction component in positive Y. The default value is N.
AText ID: -482
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Spools
-X Direction
Shows the direction component in negative X. The default value is W.
AText ID: -483
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
-Y Direction
Shows the direction component in negative Y. The default value is S.
AText ID: -484
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Z Direction
Shows the direction component in positive Z. The default value is U.
AText ID: -485
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
-Z Direction
Shows the direction component in negative Z. The default ix D.
AText ID: -486
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Flat Spool Flat Direction

Points to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles at eccentric reducers to indicate a flat direction on
flat spools. The default value is FLAT DIRECTION.
AText ID: -492
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Spools
Flat Spool Support Direction

Points to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles located at supports on flat spools. The default
value is SUPPORT DIRECTION.
AText ID: -494
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Flat Spool Branch Direction

Points to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles located at undeveloped set-on branches or single
olets on flat spools. The default value is BRANCH DIRECTION.
AText ID: -495
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Flat Spool Window Direction

Points to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles located at sight glasses on flat spools. The default
value is WINDOW LOCATION.
AText ID: -496
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Spools
Attributes
Controls the creation of spool attributes and the assignment of enclosures.
The Attributes style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Data Files sets properties that define the output of spool attributes. For more information,
see Data Files (on page 455).
 Enclosures sets properties that control the assignment and format of spool attribute
enclosures. For more information, see Enclosures (on page 455).
Data Files
Defines the data required for the output of spool attributes data on the isometric drawing. This
option group is available only for piping isometric drawings.
Enabled
Controls the creation of spool attributes. Select the check box to create the attributes.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.SpoolAttributes.Enabled
Path
Specifies the filename and full path location to the spool attribute file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.SpoolAttributes.Path
Reference Identifier Location

Sets the spool record as the key to map spool attributes.
Select the spool record for mapping to the spool attribute file in the list. An example of the
typical input in the data definition file is shown below:
SPOOL-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION
RECORD-ID-28
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.SpoolAttributes.ReferenceIDLocation

Spools
Enclosures
Controls the assignment of enclosure styles to spool attributes used to plot them on the
isometric.
Spool Attribute Enclosures

Defines the spool attribute enclosure types.
 Type specifies the name of the enclosure type. Select the required enclosure in the
Type list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Supplementary.SpoolAttributes
 Click Hide to close the grid and re-display the Preview panel.
 The value that displays on the Spool Attribute Enclosures icon is a count of how
many enclosure assignments have been set. The example below indicates the 3
enclosures are currently set for spool attributes.

Spools
Reports
Defines the content and format of the spool information file. The collection of properties and
attributes that appear in Spools > Reports is only a subset of Drawing Manager > Reports,
which includes all of the available Isogen reports and applicable properties and attributes. For
more information, see Reports (on page 49).

SECTION 8
Cut Pieces
Defines properties for the cut list, which provides a list of pipes that are cut into smaller lengths
during construction. You can also define the layout of the fixed and user-defined cut list formats
and set options for the cut list summary file. Properties are also available for controlling cut
length calculations.
The Cut Pieces category includes the style groups listed below. Every style group is further
 Cut Length Calculations organizes options groups that control cut length calculations,
such as setting the amount of extra pipe added for shop purposes or setting the amount of
extra pipe added at loose flange and field weld positions for onshore and offshore piping.
Properties are also available for calculating branch cut length and controlling the use of weld
data. For more information, see Cut Length Calculations (on page 458).
 Drawing Cut List organizes options groups that define the content and format of the fixed
and user-defined layouts of the cut list. For more information, see Drawing Cut List (on page
461).
 Reports organizes options groups that control the generation and content of the cut list
summary file. For more information see Reports (on page 444).

Cut Pieces
Cut Length Calculations

Controls cut length calculations, such as setting the amount of extra pipe added for shop
purposes or setting the amount of extra pipe added at loose flange and field weld positions for
onshore and offshore piping. Properties are also available for calculating branch cut length and
controlling the use of weld data.
The Cut Length Calculations style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Weld Allowances sets properties related to performing cut length calculations. For more
information, see Weld Allowances (on page 459).
 Branches sets properties related to calculating branch cut length. For more information, see
Branches (on page 461).
Weld Allowances
Sets properties for performing cut length calculations, such as setting the amount of extra pipe
added for shop purposes or setting the amount of extra pipe added at loose flange and field
weld positions for onshore and offshore piping.
Shop Test Allowance

Sets the amount of extra pipe that is added for shop test purposes where certain welds are
cut-off together with a short length of pipe after testing.
Type 0 to obtain zero allowance, or type a value (in the range 0-999) of an alternative
allowance.
Shop Test Allowance is applied only to shop test welds.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.ShopWeldAllowance
Field Fit Onshore Allowance

Sets the amount of extra pipe that is added at loose flange and field fit weld (FFW) positions
for onshore piping. Extra pipe is added both to cut pipe length dimensions and to pipe
quantities on the isometric drawing.
allowance.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.OnShoreAllowance

Cut Pieces
Field Fit Offshore Allowance

Sets the amount of extra pipe that is added at loose flange and field fit weld (FFW) positions
for offshore piping. Extra pipe is added both to cut pipe length dimensions and to pipe
quantities on the isometric drawing.
allowance.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.OffShoreAllowance

Cut Pieces
Branches
Sets properties for calculating branch cut length.
Length to Centre Line and Length to Branch Point are mutually exclusive.
Length to Centre Line

Specifies the calculation of branch cut length.
Select the check box to calculate to the centerline of the main run in all situations. To
calculate the cut length to whatever the branch point position implies, clear the check box.
No adjustment to cut length is made.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.LengthToCL
Length to Branch Point

Controls the calculation of branch cut length to the branch point position.
Select the check box to calculate the cut length to whatever the branch point position
implies, that is, no adjustment to cut length is made. To calculate to the centerline of the
main run in all situations, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.LengthToBranchPoint

Cut Pieces
Drawing Cut List

Defines the content and format of the fixed and user-defined layouts of the cut list.
The Drawing Cut List style group contains the options groups listed below:
 Settings sets properties that control the creation and generation of the cut list. For more
information, see Settings (on page 462).
 Identifiers sets properties related to cut piece identifiers. For more information, see
Identifiers (on page 463).
 User-Defined sets properties that define the user-defined cut list report. For more
information, see User-Defined (on page 465).
 User-Defined Columns sets properties that control the data that is output in the
user-defined cut list. For more information, see User-Defined Columns (on page 468).
 Fixed sets properties that control the style of the cut list. For more information, see Fixed
(on page 469).
 Alternative Texts sets AText values directly related to the isometric drawing cut list. For
more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 470).
Settings
Controls the creation and generation of the cut list.
Cut List
Turns on and off the display of the cut piece list and cut piece identifiers. The cut list is a
report on the cut pieces that Isogen has determined to be in the pipeline. Select the check
box to show the cut piece list and numbers on the isometric drawing.
The Active List setting controls whether the cut list report is fixed or
user-defined.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.Visible
Active List
Controls the format of the cut list.
 Fixed uses the settings defined by the Fixed (on page 469) properties.
 UserDefined uses the settings defined by the User-Defined (on page 465) properties.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.ActiveList

Cut Pieces
Include Additional Material

Controls how additional material is handled in the cut list.
The settings that display in the list depend on the type of isometric drawing style
that is active: Pipeline, Cable Tray, or HVAC.
 None adds no entry to the cut list for additional material.
 Pipe Only adds an entry to the cut list for additional material (PIPE).
 Cable Tray Only adds an entry to the cut list for additional material (CABLE TRAY).
 Duct Only adds an entry to the cut list for additional material (DUCT).
 Misc Only adds an entry to the cut list for additional material (MISC).
 Pipe and Misc adds an entry to the cut list for additional material (PIPE and MISC).
 Cable Tray and Misc adds an entry to the cut list for additional material (CABLE TRAY
and MISC).
 Duct and Misc adds an entry to the cut list for additional material (DUCT and MISC).
Defines:
I-Configure - CutLlist.IncludeAdditionalMaterial
Decimal Inch Output

Specifies the output of cut piece lengths in decimal inches when imperial units are used.
Select the check box to output supplementary cut lengths in decimal inches format in the
REMARKS column of the new style cut piece list. To output standard cut lengths only, clear
the check box.
This property only applies when imperial units are used.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.DecimalInchOutput

Cut Pieces
Identifiers
Sets properties for cut piece identifiers.
Type
Specifies the cut piece identifier type at the appropriate positions. Two settings are
available:
 Numeric displays cut piece identifiers that are numeric.
 Alphabetic displays cut piece identifiers that are alphabetic.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.CutPieceID
Length
Sets a fixed length for part numbers (1-9 characters or variable). Select the required number
of characters from the list.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.CutPieceNoLength
Sequence
Specifies whether cut piece numbers increase across drawings. Select one of the following:
 Continuous increases cut piece numbers across drawings.
 Per drawing begins cut piece numbers at 1 or A on each drawing, depending on the
setting of Cut Pieces > Drawing Cut List > Identifiers > Type.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.CutPieceSequence

Cut Pieces
User-Defined
Sets properties for a user-defined cut list. You can define the X,Y position of the first line and the
table layout, such as the number of rows and columns and the amount of spacing in between.
Start X
Defines the bottom left X position of the first line of the cut list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.StartX
Start Y
Defines the bottom left Y position of the first line of the cut list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.StartY
Layout
Controls whether the table is horizontal, vertical, or multiple style. The number of columns
that are output is dependent on the Maximum Rows setting for the cut list.
 SingleVertical outputs data items vertically under their relevant heading.
 SingleHorizontal outputs data items horizontally under their relevant heading.

Cut Pieces
 MultipleVertical (Across/Down) outputs data items using an Across > Down layout
 MultipleVertical (Down/Across) outputs data items using an Down > Across layout.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.Layout
Maximum Rows
Sets the maximum number of entries allowed in the weld list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.MaxEntries
Maximum Columns
value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.MaxColumns
Horizontal Direction
Sets the horizontal direction for the cut list.
 Right sets the cut list is to the right. This is the default setting.
 Left sets the cut list is to the left.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.HorizontalDirection

Cut Pieces
Horizontal Spacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the cut pipe list output when
the table is horizontally formatted or two-dimensional. Type the required value in millimeters
or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.HorizontalSpacing
Vertical Direction
Sets the vertical direction for the cut list. Two settings are available: Up or Down.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.VerticalDirection
Vertical Spacing
Sets the vertical spacing required between each row of the cut pipe list output when the
table is vertically formatted or two-dimensional. Type a value in millimeters or inches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.VerticalSpacing
Layer
Sets the drawing layer for the cut list text. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.DrawingLayer
Allow Overflow Drawings

Controls whether the cut list causes an overflow drawing.
Select the check box to allow the cut list to cause an overflow drawing. When Allows
Overflow Drawings is not selected, and there is no overflow drawing created for any other
reason, then the cut list overflow data is lost.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.AllowOverflowDrawings
Show Enclosure
Controls whether cut list enclosures are shown. To display cut list enclosures, select the
check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.ShowEnclosure

Cut Pieces
Text Font
type from the list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.TextFont
Text Height
Sets the height of the text that Isogen outputs in the cut list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.TextHeight
Text Width Factor

Defines the ratio of width to height of the text in the cut list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.TextWidthFactor
Text Weight
Sets the character thickness in millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - CutList.UserDefined.TextWeight

Cut Pieces
User-Defined Columns
Controls the data that is output in the user-defined cut list.
Columns
Defines the columns that appear in the report.
required value.
The software displays a count of the number of columns that have been defined
for the report. This is a system-generated value. The example below indicates that three

Cut Pieces
Fixed
Controls the style of the cut list.
Content
Specifies a limited or full cut list.
 Standard uses the old style cut list with limited information.
 Extended uses the new style cut list with full information.
Defines:
I-Configure - CutList.FixedLayout.Content

Cut Pieces
Alternative Texts
Pulled Bend Remark

Denotes a pulled bend remark, which is listed under AText -324 (REMARKS HEADING) if a cut
pipe length contains a pulled bend. The default value is PLD BEND.
AText ID: -326
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Loose Flange Remark

Denotes a remark which is listed under AText -324 (REMARKS HEADING) if a cut pipe length
has a loose flange requirement. The default value is LOOSE FLG.
AText ID: -327
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Field Fit Remark

Denotes the field fit weld remark that is listed under AText -324 (REMARKS HEADING) if a cut
pipe length contains a field fit weld. The default value is FFWELD.
AText ID: -328
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Cut Pieces
Pulled Bend Label

Identifies fabricated bends when listed as separate items on the material list. The default value
is FABRICATED (PULLED) BENDS.
AText ID: -351
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Weight Heading
Denotes the column heading for weight. The default value is WEIGHT.
AText ID: -352
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
KGS Indicator
Denotes a units indicator for kilogram weights. Used as part of the Weight column heading and
in the pipeline weight summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is KGS.
AText ID: -353
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
LBS Indicator
Denotes a units indicator for pound weights. Used as part of the Weight column heading and in
the pipeline weight summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is LBS.
AText ID: -354
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Cut Pieces
Total Weight Label

Denotes identification text for total pipeline weight in the Weight column and in the weight
summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is TOTAL WEIGHT - THIS
DRG.
AText ID: -355
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Erection Weld Label

Identifies special type erection welds. It is used on the material list and on the isometric area as
a prefix to the part number. The default value is B.
AText ID: -357
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Fab Weld Label

Identifies special type fabrication welds. It is used in the material list and on the isometric area
as a prefix to the part number. The default value is W.
AText ID: -358
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Bolt Unit Subheading

Denotes the bolts sub-heading. Isogen outputs in DIA x LENGTH sequence.
AText ID: -359
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Cut Pieces
Offshore Material Heading

Denotes the category heading under which components required for OFFSHORE erection are
listed. The default value is OFFSHORE MATERIALS.
AText ID: -371
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
General Remarks Heading

Denotes the Remarks region heading at the bottom of the material list where remarks text is
collectively listed. The default value is REMARKS.
AText ID: -372
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Remark Number Heading

Denotes the Remarks column heading in the material list. Remark reference numbers are listed
in this column. The default value is REM.
AText ID: -373
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Welds Sub-Heading
Denotes the group sub-heading under which all welds are listed. The default value is WELDS.
AText ID: -375
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Cut Pieces
Total Fab Weight Label

Denotes identification text for total fabrication weight in the Weight column and in the weight
summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is TOTAL FABRICATION
WEIGHT.
AText ID: -379
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Total Erect Weight Label

Denotes identification weight for total erection weight in the Weight column and in the weight
summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is TOTAL ERECTION
WEIGHT.
AText ID: -380
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Total Offshore Weight Label

Denotes identification text for total erection weight in the Weight column and in the weight
summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is TOTAL OFFSHORE
WEIGHT.
AText ID: -381
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Total Unlisted Weight Label

Denotes identification text for the total weight of unlisted items in the Weight column and in the
weight summary area at the bottom of the material list. The default value is TOTAL WEIGHT
UNLISTED ITEMS.
AText ID: -382
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Cut Pieces
Missing Weight Identifier

Denotes a missing weight indicator. The asterisk character ( * ) is a special marker used on both
weight and CoG outputs to indicate that components with zero weight were encountered. The
default value is *.
AText ID: -383
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Additional Material - Tangent

Indicates where additional material has been added to a cut piece length to provide a minimum
tangent length for a start or finish bend leg. Used in the cut list Remarks column. The default
value is TANGENT +.
AText ID: -384
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Additional Material - Cut/Weld

Indicates cut pieces that have additional material added between adjacent bends. Used in the
cut piece remarks section. The default value is CUT/WELD.
AText ID: -385
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Accumulated Pipe Indicator

Distinguishes an accumulated pipe sub-total from an individual pipe entry. The default value is
TOT.
AText ID: -394
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Cut Pieces
Jacket Spec Identifier

Indicates that a jacket specification identifier is set in a JACKET-SPEC type record in the
pipeline input data file. Appears in the title block. The record content is appended to the AText to
form a composite message. The default value is JACKET SPEC.
AText ID: -436
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Shop Test Identifier

Identifies cut pieces that need an additional shop test allowance. Used on the cut list. Applies to
welds with SKEY WSST or WFST. The default value is SHOP TEST.
AText ID: -500
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Cut Pieces
Reports
Defines the content and format of the fixed and user-defined layouts of the cut list. The
collection of properties and attributes that appear in Cut Pieces > Reports is only a subset of
Drawing Manager > Reports, which includes all of the available Isogen reports and applicable
properties and attributes. For more information, see Reports (on page 49).

SECTION 9
Welds and Joints

Sets properties related to welds and joints.
The Welds and Joints category panel only displays on the Home screen when
you are viewing a Piping isometric drawing style. If you are viewing a Cabletray or HVAC
isometric drawing style, this category panel does not display.
The Welds and Joints category includes the style groups listed below. Every style group is
 Generation and Display organizes options groups that control the output and define the
representation of welds on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Generation and
Display (on page 479).
 Enclosures organizes options groups that control the output and format of enclosures for
welds. For more information, see Enclosures (on page 491).
 Drawing Weld List organizes options groups that define the layout and content of the three
weld list formats: user-defined, variable, and fixed. For more information, see Drawing Weld
List (on page 500).
 Calculations organizes options groups that define how Isogen performs weld calculations.
For more information, see Calculations (on page 520).
 Joints and Bolted Assemblies organizes options groups that control the assignment of
identifiers to joints and the sequencing of end connection identifiers. For more information,
see Joints and Bolted Assemblies (on page 521).
 Reports organizes options groups that define the titles and column headers in a
user-defined weld summary file or a site weld file. Also contains properties that define the
columns of data contained in the weld summary file and the site weld file. For more
information, see Reports (on page 444).

Welds and Joints
Generation and Display

Controls the output and defines the representation of welds on the isometric drawing.
The Generation and Display style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Controls sets properties that control the display of welds on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Controls (on page 480).
 Component Specific sets properties that control how Isogen handles implied welds.For
more information, see Component Specific (on page 481).
 Identifier Table defines the text output to the weld definition (WDF) file for weld type
identifiers. For more information, see Identifier Table (on page 481).
Controls
Controls the display of welds on the isometric drawing and the generation of implied welds for
drawing output.
Show Welds
Controls the display of welds and weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
 True displays welds on the isometric drawing.
 False suppresses the display of welds on the isometric drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowWelds
Weld Types
Controls which types of welds are plotted on the isometric drawing. You can plot all welds or
plot only a specific weld category
 All plots all welds.
 Fabrication Only plots only fabrication welds.
 Erection Only plots only erection welds.
 All - Implied Erec as Fab plots all welds, but imply erection welds as fabrication welds.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldTypes
Special Site Weld Category

Assigns special site welds to a specific category. Select Erection Type or Fabrication
Type.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.SpecialSiteWeldCategory

Welds and Joints
Component Specific
Sets properties that control how Isogen handles implied welds.
Clamp Welds
Controls the number of weld numbers allocated to victaulic welded/gorged ring type clamps
(CLVR). Type a value in the range 1-9.
If set to 0 (the default value), two weld numbers are allocated.
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.ClampWelds

Welds and Joints
Identifier Table
Weld Type Identifiers
Defines the text output to the weld definition (WDF) file for weld type identifiers.
Open the free-form text box, and then type the data as follows:
 Piping specification
 Minimum nominal size
 Maximum nominal size
 Weld type (replacement for BW welds)
 Wall thickness/Schedule (optional)
When finished, click . The software updates the style and displays the specified
data under the Weld Type Identifiers property label.
 You only need to enter the data records for the text file. The WELD-TYPE-IDENTIFIER
heading is output by Isogen during processing.
 Isogen assumes that the nominal size units are those specified by the Units setting
(Option Switch 41). For more information, see Units in Drawing Generation (on page
15). This is only used when the weld type is output on the weld operation list or welds
report, and replaces the BW weld type identifier. If using the Wall Thickness/Schedule
column, and the BW type is not being changed, then you must enter BW on the line.

Welds and Joints
Numbering
Defines the appearance and generation of weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
The Numbering style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Controls sets properties that control weld numbering. For more information, see Controls
(on page 483).
 Sequences sets properties for the weld number sequence. For more information, see
Sequences (on page 484).
 Prefixes sets properties that define the prefix used for each weld and support weld
category. For more information, see Prefixes (on page 487).
 Rarely Used includes properties used in special circumstances. For more information, see
Rarely Used (on page 490).
Controls
Sets properties that control weld numbering. You can turn on and off the generation of missing
weld numbers, generate or suppress weld numbers for special status welds, and define the
format of weld numbers. You can also specify the allocation of weld numbers for tack welds .
Generate Weld Numbers

Controls the generation of weld numbers for any welds that do not have weld numbers
defined in the Piping Component File (PCF) or Isogen Data File (IDF).
 True generates weld numbers.
 False suppresses the generation of weld numbers.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldNumbers
Length
Controls the number of characters output for a weld number. For numeric weld numbers,
leading zeros are output; for alphabetic weld numbers, spaces are output.
 Variable outputs the weld number without leading zeros or spaces.
 1 to 9 sets the number of characters to be output. For example, 3 outputs 001 through
999 for numeric weld numbers.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldNumberLength

Welds and Joints
Type
Controls whether weld numbers are numeric or alphabetic.
 Numeric outputs numeric weld identifiers.
 Alphabetic outputs alphabetic weld identifiers. Generates A to Z, and then starts AA,
AB, AC, and so on.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldNumberType
Tack Welds
Controls the allocation of weld numbers on tack welds.
 True allocates weld numbers.
 False suppresses the allocation of weld numbers.
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.TackWeldNumbers
Special Status Weld Identifiers

Controls the generation of weld numbers on special status welds.
 True generates weld numbers on special status welds.
 False suppresses the generation of weld numbers on special status welds.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.SpecialStatusWeldIdentifiers

Welds and Joints
Sequences
Sets properties for the weld number sequence.
Weld Series
Defines the weld sequence. You can set:
 one sequence for all welds
 one sequence for pipeline welds and one sequence for support welds
 an individual sequence for each weld category
 an individual sequence for each pipeline weld category and one sequence for support
welds
 an individual sequence for each pipeline weld category and an individual sequence for
each support weld category
Welds Start Number

Specifies the start number for the weld sequence. Type a value in the box.
Fab Start Number

Sets a start weld number for fabrication welds in the weld definition file (WDF). This option
only displays when you select one of the following settings:
 Individual sequence for each pipeline weld category, and one sequence for
support welds
 Individual sequence for each pipeline weld category and Individual sequence for
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.FabWeldStartNo
Erection Start Number

Sets a start weld number for erection welds in the weld definition file (WDF). This option only
displays when you select one of the following settings:
 Individual sequence for weld category
support welds
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ErectWeldStartNo

Welds and Joints
Offshore Start Number

Sets a start weld number for offshore welds in the weld definition file (WDF). This option
only displays when you select one of the following settings:
 Individual sequence for each weld category
support welds
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.OffshoreWeldStartNo
Support Welds Start Number

Sets a start weld number for support welds in the weld definition file (WDF). This option
displays only when you select one of the following settings:
 One sequence for pipeline welds, and one sequence for support welds
support welds
Fab Support Start Number

Sets a start weld number for fabrication support welds in the weld definition file (WDF). This
option only displays when Individual sequence for each pipeline weld category and
Individual sequence for each support weld category is also selected.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.FabSupportWeldStartNo
Erection Support Start Number

Sets a start weld number for erection support welds in the weld definition file (WDF). This
option displays only when Individual sequence for each pipeline weld category and
Individual sequence for each support weld category is also selected.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ErectSupportWeldStartNo
Offshore Support Start Number

Sets a weld start number for offshore support welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.OffShoreSupportWeldStartNo

Welds and Joints
Sequence
Controls how weld numbers are sequenced.
 Continuous continues the current weld number sequence on each new drawing.
 Per drawing restarts the weld number sequence on each new drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldNumberSequence
Support Weld Sequence

Controls whether the support weld numbers continue across drawings or start again on each
new drawing.
 Per Drawing restarts the support weld numbering sequence on each drawing.
 Continuous continues the support weld numbering sequence across drawings.
 The numbers used depend on the settings defined by Support Weld Type Numbers.
 If you select Support Weld Numbers, Support Weld Sequence controls weld
numbering, similar to the behavior of Sequence.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.SupporWeldSeq

Welds and Joints
Prefixes
Defines the prefix used for each weld and support weld category.
Fab Prefix
Sets the prefix used for Fabrication type welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to F.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.FabPrefix
Show Fab Prefix

Precedes the weld number with the specified prefix. Select the check box to display
fabrication weld prefixes on the isometric drawing. To suppress the display of fabrication
weld prefixes, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowFabWeldPrefix
Erection Prefix
Sets the prefix used for Erection type welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to E.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ErectPrefix
Show Erection Prefix

Precedes the weld number with the specified prefix. Select the check box to display erection
weld prefixes on the isometric drawing. To suppress the display of erection weld prefixes,
clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowErectWeldPrefix

Welds and Joints
Offshore Prefix
Sets the prefix used for Offshore type welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to O.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.OffShorePrefix
Show Offshore Prefix

Precedes the weld number with the specified prefix. Select the check box to display offshore
weld prefixes on the isometric drawing. To suppress the display of offshore weld prefixes,
clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowOffshoreWeldPrefix
Fab Support Prefix

Sets the prefix used for Fabrication support welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to
FS.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.FabSupportPrefix
Show Fab Support Prefix

Precedes the weld number with the specified prefix. Select the check box to display
fabrication support weld prefixes on the isometric drawing. To suppress the display of
fabrication support weld prefixes, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowFabSupportWeldPrefix

Welds and Joints
Erect Support Prefix

Sets the prefix used for Erection support welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to
ES.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ErectSupportPrefix
Show Erect Support Prefix

Precedes the weld number with the specified prefix. Select the check box to display erection
support weld prefixes on the isometric drawing. To suppress the display of erection support
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowErectSupportWeldPrefix
Offshore Support Prefix

Sets the prefix used for Offshore support welds. In the example below, the prefix is set to
OS.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.OffShoreSupportPrefix
Show Offshore Support Prefix

Precedes the weld number with the specified prefix. Select the check box to display offshore
support weld prefixes on the isometric drawing. To suppress the display of offshore support
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowOffshoreSupportPrefix

Welds and Joints
Rarely Used
Generate Offshore Weld Numbers
Controls the display of offshore weld numbers on the isometric drawing. To show the
offshore weld numbers, select the check box. Clear the check box to suppress the display of
the weld numbers.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowOffshoreWeldNumbers
Generate Offshore Weld Numbers Only

Controls whether only offshore weld numbers are shown. To limit the weld number display
to offshore welds only, select the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowOffShoreWeldNumbersOnly
General Prefix
Sets the general weld prefix used when none of the separate weld prefixes are set.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.GeneralPrefix
General Start Number

Sets a general start weld number in the weld definition file (WDF). Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.GeneralWeldStartNo

Welds and Joints
Enclosures
Controls the output and format of enclosures for welds on the isometric drawing.
The Enclosures style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Controls sets properties that control the appearance of weld numbers on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Controls (on page 492).
 Enclosures provides options for weld assignment definitions. For more information, see
Enclosures (on page 495).
 Alternative Text sets AText values directly related to weld enclosures on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Alternative Text (on page 498).
Controls
Controls the appearance of weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
Show Weld Numbers

Controls the display of welds and weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
 True displays welds on the isometric drawing.
 False suppresses the display of welds on the isometric drawing.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.ShowWelds

Welds and Joints
Callout Arrowheads
Controls whether messages to welds (including weld numbers and attributes) have
arrowheads attached to message leader lines.
 On shows arrowheads on message leader lines.
 Off suppresses the display of arrowheads on message leader lines.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.MessageArrowheads
Use Additional
Controls the special part number box for welds. Select the check box to display a special
part number box for welds.
Welds must have part numbers and descriptions, and Type must be set to
Special. For more information, see Fixed (on page 508).
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AdditionalWeldEnclosure
Additional Spaces
Sets the number of spaces used when Use Additional is also selected.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces

Welds and Joints

Welds and Joints

Defines:

Welds and Joints
Enclosures
Defines the assignment of weld enclosures. You can define up to six enclosure definitions, each
of which can apply to one or more of the six weld types. You can also use the Enclosure Editor
to modify the style, shape, and label length of an existing weld enclosure definition. The editor
can also be used to define additional enclosure assignments.
Section 1: Show weld number enclosures for

Specifies which of the six weld types are shown on the isometric drawing. This section also
defines which enclosure definitions are shown in the summary and can be edited. Weld
enclosure assignments are specified by selecting and clearing the checkboxes.
 All welds assigns the enclosure definition to pipe and support welds across all
categories (Fabrication, Erection, and Offshore).
 Pipe welds assigns the enclosure definition to pipe welds only across all
categories. To exclude a category, clear its checkbox. In the example below,
Offshore pipe welds are excluded from the enclosure assignment.
 Support welds assigns the enclosure definition to support welds only across all
categories. To exclude a category, clear its checkbox. In the example below, only
Fabrication support welds are assigned a weld enclosure.

Welds and Joints
Section 2: Configure enclosure settings

Shows a preview of all currently defined weld enclosures (1) and includes a summary of the
selected weld types to which each enclosure applies (2).
Section 2 also provides access to the Enclosure Editor.

Enclosure Editor
Provides options for modifying an existing enclosure definition and for creating a new
definition. Click Edit enclosure definitions to open the Enclosure Editor.
 Add Enclosure opens an enclosure panel so that you can define a new weld
enclosure.
 Enclosure style specifies the weld enclosure type. The available types are simple,
extended, or one of the four special extended types.
 Simple Enclosure represents an enclosure with a single field that shows the
weld number and prefix, if set.
 Extended Enclosure is a segmented enclosure. Each segment contains a weld
attribute. An extended enclosure can have up to 10 segments.
 Special Extended Enclosure is an enclosure with two, three, or four segments.

Each segment contains a weld attribute. Available segment arrangements are
shown below:
 Enclosure shape specifies the shape of the enclosure. Available shapes depend
on the selected enclosure type.
 Label length controls the number of characters used for a simple enclosure. Valid
entries are from 1 to 8 characters and Variable size, which dynamically sizes the
enclosure. The default setting is 2. This option appears only when a simple
enclosure type is select for Enclosure style.

Welds and Joints
 Attribute specifies the attribute that appears in the enclosure. This option appears
only when an extended or special extended enclosure type is selected for
Enclosure style.
 Width controls the number of characters displayed in each segment. Select a
number in the list. This option appears only when an extended or special extended
enclosure type is selected for Enclosure style.
 Force all welds as special applies only to objects with Enclosure style set to one
of the special extended enclosure types.
Select the checkbox to force all welds to adopt the special layout for their enclosure.
This option appears only when an extended enclosure type is selected for Enclosure
style.
To allow the generation of an enclosure containing only the weld number, when the data
for all the other fields in an enclosure are missing, clear the checkbox.
 Add a segment adds a segment to the enclosure and displays an additional

Attribute and Width list so that you can define the content to appear in the
segment. This option displays only when the non-special extended enclosure is
selected in the Enclosure style list.
 Apply enclosure to displays a summary of the welds selected in Section 1.
Click Hide to close the Enclosure Editor.

Welds and Joints
Alternative Text
Field Fit Weld Callout

Plats a distinguishing message that points to a field fit weld. The default value is FFW.
AText ID: -221
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Seal Weld Label

Indicates the weld type for seal welds on the isometric drawing. The default value is SEAL
WELD.
AText ID: -425
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Mitre Weld Label

Identifies mitre welds. The software edits the mitre angle into the text string at the ? position,
which can be positioned anywhere in the string. The default value is MITRE ?.
AText ID: -457
? Value: Mitre Angle
$ Supported: Yes

Welds and Joints
Site Weld Label

Points to a site weld. The value must be defined.
AText ID: -498
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Shop Text Weld Label

Point to a site weld or a field fit weld that requires a shop test weld be performed at the same
location. Applies to welds with the symbol key WSST or WFST. The default value is SHOP
TEST WELD.
AText ID: -499
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Offshore Weld Label

Points to an offshore weld if user-specified.
AText ID: -501
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
Drawing Weld List

Defines the layout and content of the Isogen weld list. Three weld list formats are available:
user-defined, variable, and fixed.
The weld list is the report that appears on the drawing, while the weld summary file is
the weld data formatted in a text file. For information about the weld summary file, see Reports
(on page 444).
The Drawing Weld List style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Settings sets properties that control the display of the weld list on the drawing and the style
used to display weld list data. For more information, see Settings (on page 501).
 User Defined sets options for the user-defined weld list format. For more information, see
User Defined (on page 502).
 User Defined Columns which data is output in the user-defined weld list. For more
information, see User Defined Columns (on page 505).
 Variable sets options for the variable layout weld list format. For more information, see
Variable (on page 506).
 Variable Columns sets properties that control the attribute data output in the variable layout
weld list. For more information, see Variable Columns (on page 507)
 Fixed sets options for the fixed layout weld list format. For more information, see Fixed (on
page 508).
 Alternative Text sets AText values related to the weld list output on the isometric drawing.
For more information, see Alternative Text (on page 509).
Settings
Controls the display of the weld list on the drawing and the style used to display weld list data.
Weld List
Turns on and off the display of the weld, or operations, summary on the isometric drawing.
Select the check box to plot the weld list.
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.Visible

Welds and Joints
Active List
Defines which of the three weld list styles is used.
 Fixed
 UserDefined
 Variable
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.ActiveList

Welds and Joints
User Defined
Sets options for the user-defined weld list format. The user-defined weld list offers more
flexibility than the two weld list styles.
Start X
Defines the bottom left X position of the first line of the weld list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.StartX
Start Y
Defines the bottom left Y position of the first line of the weld list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.StartY
Direction Down
Sets the plotting of the weld list.
Select the check box to plot the weld list from the top down. To plot the weld list from the
bottom up, clear the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.ListDown
Layout
Controls the order in which the weld list table is organized.
 Horizontal plots data from left to right.
 Vertical plots data from top to bottom.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.TableLayout

Welds and Joints
Maximum Columns
value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.MaxCols
Maximum Entries
Sets the maximum number of entries allowed in the weld list. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.MaxEntries
Maximum Rows
Defines the maximum number of rows before a new column is started when using multiple
tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - DrawingFrame.SymbolTable.MaxRows
Horizontal Spacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the weld list output when the
table is horizontally formatted or two-dimensional. Type the required value (integer).
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.HorizontalSpacing
Vertical Spacing
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Colour
Specifies a number that represents the color number as defined in the output drawing
system. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.DrawingColour

Welds and Joints
Layer
Sets the drawing layer for weld list text. Type a value in the range 1-50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.DrawingLayer
Text Font
type from the list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.TextFont
Text Height
Sets the height of the text (in millimeters) that Isogen outputs in the weld list. Type the
required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.TextHeight
Text Width Factor

Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height to be used for output of the weld
list on the isometric. Type the required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.TextWidthFactor
Text Weight
Specifies the character thickness in millimeters.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.UserDefined.TextWeight

Welds and Joints
User Defined Columns

Specifies which data is output in the user-defined weld list.
Columns
Specifies the data that Isogen outputs in the user-defined weld list.
required value.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - WeldList.VariableLayout

Welds and Joints
Variable
Sets options for the variable layout weld list format. This format includes options to define
column headers. You can use either a user-defined drawing frame or the standard Isogen
drawing frame.
Header Text
Specifies a text string for the column header.
Open the free-form text box, type the data in the text box, and then click . The
software updates the style and displays the text under the Header Text property label.
 Use the forward slash symbol ( \ ) to start a new line. To produce a vertical break, use
the pipe symbol ( | ).
 Width is defined by the length of the last line, terminated with the pipe character (|). The
length of the last line should be at least as long as the total width of data to be displayed
below it.
 Column description text in the Header Text text box must lie in the column bounds as
defined.
 Do not put text in columns that are not within the specified range of column.
 You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the
material list definition (MLD) file.
 You can use the @ symbol instead of a space when you create headings for variable
layout bills of materials. Isogen interprets the @ symbol as a null character. It is easier
to count the number of spaces between the individual headers if you use the @ symbol
instead of using spaces.

Welds and Joints
Variable Columns
Controls the attribute data output in the variable layout weld list.
Columns
Defines the columns that appear in the report.
required value.

Welds and Joints
Fixed
Sets options for the fixed layout weld list format. This format produces a simple weld list. You
can use a user-defined drawing frame or the standard Isogen drawing frame.
The Active List property must be set to Fixed. For more information, see Settings
(on page 501).
Show Operations Box

Controls whether the weld operations box is shown.
Select the check box to display the weld operations box. This operations box replaces the
original weld list if the Weld List check box is also selected. To suppress the display of the
box, clear the check box. In this case, the original weld list is plotted if the Weld List check
box is also selected. For more information about the Weld List drawing property, see
Settings (on page 501).
Defines:
I-Configure - WeldList.FixedLayout.ShowOperationsBox

Welds and Joints
Alternative Text
Weld Box Header 1

Denotes text appearing in line 1 of the fixed-format weld summary. Note that columns 1 and 2
are reserved for weld number and category. The default value is
WELD|SHOP|WELD|WELDER|VISUAL|NDT|HARD|S.R.|FAB.QA
AText ID: -412
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Weld Box Header 2

Denotes text appearing in line 2 of the fixed-format weld summary. Note that columns 1 and 2
are reserved for weld number and category. The default value is NO|/FLD|PROC| ID
|ACCEPT|NO | NO | |ACCEPT.
AText ID: -413
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Shop Weld Prefix

Denotes weld category identification Shop. The default value is S.
AText ID: -414
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
Field Weld Prefix

Denotes weld category identification Field / Erection. The default value is F.
AText ID: -415
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Offshore Weld Prefix

Denotes weld category identification Offshore. The default value is O.
AText ID: -416
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Butt Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for butt welds. The default value is BW.
AText ID: -417
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Socket Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the the User-Defined Weld Summary for socket welds. The default value
is SW.
AText ID: -418
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Mitre Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for mitre welds. The default value is
MW.
AText ID: -419
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
Lug Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for lug welds. The default value is LUG.
AText ID: -420
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Slip On Flange Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for slip on flange welds. The default
value is SOP.
AText ID: -421
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Olet Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for olet, latrolet, or half coupling welds.
The default value is LET.
AText ID: -423
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Seal Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for seal welds. The default value is
SLW.
AText ID: -424
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
Seam Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for seam welds. The default value is
SEAM.
AText ID: -438
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Field Fit Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for field fit welds.
AText ID: -504
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
RPAD Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary, for reinforcing weld when a single weld
is present. The default value is RPD.
AText ID: -507
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
RPAD Weld 1 Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for reinforcing weld when two welds are
present. The default value is LF.
AText ID: -508
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
RPAD Weld 2 Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for second reinforcing weld when two
welds are present. The default value is L4.
AText ID: -509
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Location Separator
If set, used as a delimiter between the two material list identifiers in the Location column of the
weld summary box.
AText ID: -510
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
RPAD Part Identifier

Denotes a part identifier in the Location column of the operations box when a reinforcement pad
has not been included on the material list. The default value is PAD.
AText ID: -511
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Tack Weld Label

Plots a distinguishing message that points to a user-positioned tack weld. The default value is
TACK WELD.
AText ID: -512
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
Tack Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for tack welds. The default value is TW.
AText ID: -513
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
RPAD Item Code

Denotes the item code for a reinforcement pad whenever automatic item code generation is
requested. The default value is REINFPAD.
AText ID: -514
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
RPAD Description
Denotes the first part of a description for a reinforcement pad when automatic description
generation is requested. The second part of the pad description is the description of the main
pipeline tube to which the pad is welded. The default value is REINFORCEMENT PAD FOR @.
AText ID: -515
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Trunnion Weld Identifier

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for trunnion (support) welds. The default
value is TRN.
AText ID: -516
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
Manual Weld Indicator

Denotes weld action identification for a manual weld on the operations list. The default value is
5.
AText ID: -517
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Automatic Weld Indicator

Denotes weld action identification for an automatic weld on the operations list. The default value
is 1.
AText ID: -518
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Pulled Bend Indicator

Denotes pulled bend identification on the operations list. The default value is EB.
AText ID: -519
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Random Length Indicator

Denotes random length identification on the operations list. The default value is RL.
AText ID: -520
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Fillet Weld Indicator

Identifies weld type in the User-Defined Weld Summary for fillet (support) welds. The default
value is FW.
AText ID: -521
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
Reinforcement Weld Indicator 1

Denotes an alternative to AText -422 (Set On Branch Weld Identifier) to identify branch
connection welds for a reinforced tee or cross.
AText ID: -522
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Angled Reinforcement Weld Indicator

connection welds for an angled (not 90º) reinforced tees.
AText ID: -523
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Angled Branch Weld Indicator

connection welds for an angled (not 90º) reinforced tee or cross.
AText ID: -524
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Coupling Weld Indicator

Denotes the weld type identifier of any olet type component with a symbol key of HCSC or
HCSW.
AText ID: -525
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
Angled RPAD Weld 1 Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of a reinforcement pad to a main pipeline weld on an angled
branch when two extra weld numbers are requested. Used with AText -527 (Angled RPAD
Weld 2 Identifier).
AText ID: -526
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Angled RPAD Weld 2 Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of a reinforcement pad to branch weld on an angled branch
when two extra weld numbers are requested. Used with AText -526 (Angled RPAD Weld 1
Identifier).
AText ID: -527
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Elbow Trunnion Weld Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of a trunnion to elbow / bend connection.
AText ID: -528
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
90-deg Pipe Trunnion Weld Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of a 90º non-reinforced trunnion to the main pipeline weld.
AText ID: -529
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
Angled Pipe Trunnion Weld Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of an angled non-reinforced trunnion to the main pipeline weld.
AText ID: -530
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
90-deg Reinforced Pipe Trunnion Weld Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of a 90º reinforced trunnion to the main pipeline weld.
AText ID: -531
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Angled Reinforced Pipe Trunnion Weld Identifier

Denotes the weld type identifier of an angled reinforced trunnion to main pipeline weld.
AText ID: -532
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Field Items Indicator

Identifies field items on an erection type isometric when a new style operations box is requested
(Option Switch 53, Position 2 set to 2). The default value is FI.
AText ID: -533
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Random Length Indicator

Identifies a random length on an erection type isometric when a new style operations box is
requested (Option Switch 53, Position 2 set to 2). The default value is RL.
AText ID: -534
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
Support Indicator
Identifies a pipe support on an erection type isometric when a new style operations box is
requested (Option Switch 53, Position 2 set to 2. The default value is SU.
AText ID: -535
? Value: None
$ Supported: No
Valve Indicator
Identifies a valve on an erection type isometric whenever a new style operations box is
requested (Option Switch 53, Position 2 set to 2. The default value is VL.
AText ID: -536
? Value: None
$ Supported: No

Welds and Joints
Calculations
Configures Isogen weld calculation methods.
The Calculations style group contains the option group listed below.
 Costing sets weld diameter calculation requirements. For more information, see Costing (on
page 521).
Costing
Sets weld diameter calculation requirements.
Calculate Weld Diameter

Specifies the method that Isogen uses to calculate weld diameter totals.
 Use nominal sizes calculates weld diameter totals using nominal sizes.
 Use specified cost factors calculates weld diameter totals using the specified cost
factors.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Welds.WeldDiameterCalculation

Welds and Joints
Joints and Bolted Assemblies

Defines settings that control the assignment of identifiers to joints and how end connection
identifiers are sequenced.
The Joints and Bolted Assemblies style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Bolted Assemblies defines settings for joints and bolted assemblies. For more information,
see Bolted Assemblies (on page 522).
 User Defined Joints sets the accumulation of end connections and the properties that
define the sequencing and the types of enclosures that appear on the isometric drawing for
user-defined end connection identifiers. For more information, see User Defined Joints (on
page 527).
Bolted Assemblies
Defines settings for joints and bolted assemblies.
Show Table
Controls the display of the site assembly table on the isometric drawing.
The default setting is to suppress the display of site assembly table. To display the table,
select the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Content.ShowSiteAssemblyTable
Identifier Type
Controls how site assembly information displays on the isometric drawing.
 Off suppresses the display of flange assembly identification.
 Numeric displays numeric flange assembly identification.
 Alphabetic displays alphabetic flange assembly identification.

Defines
Options Switch - OS 79, Pos 1
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDs

Welds and Joints
Length
Controls the number of characters that are output for a site assembly number. Select the
number in the list.
Defines
Options Switch - OS 85, Pos 1
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDNumberLength
Identifier Sequence
Controls how Isogen sequences site assembly identifiers.
 Combined sequences all assembly identifiers.
 Category sequences assembly identifiers by category.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.AssemblyIDSequencing
Identifiers Per Drawing

Controls whether Isogen sequences site assemblies on a per drawing or per pipeline basis.
Select the check box to number flange assembly identification per drawing. To number
flange assembly identification per pipeline, clear the check box.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing

Welds and Joints
Site Identifier Style

Controls the enclosure style for site assemblies on the isometric drawing.
 None displays no box enclosure.
 Diamond Ended displays a diamond-ended box enclosure.
 Round Ended displays a round-ended box enclosure.
 Triangular displays a triangular-shaped enclosure.
 Rectangular displays a rectangular-shaped enclosure.

Welds and Joints
 Double Circle displays a circular-shaped enclosure inside another circle.
 The site assembly uses AText -478, default J--such as J1 or JA--to prefix the flange
assembly identification.
 The size that the circle, double circle, and ellipse is drawn at is controlled by the Site
Assembly Size setting (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the
enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically
adjusts to suit.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure

Welds and Joints
Enclosure Size
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle, and ellipse
enclosure style.
enclosure. The default setting is 2. The example below shows the default size used for a
circle style enclosure:
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize
Fabrication Identifier Style

Controls the enclosure style for fabrication assembly identifiers that Isogen outputs on the
isometric drawing.
another circle.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.FabricationAssemblyIDEnclosure

Welds and Joints
Offshore Identifier Style

Controls the enclosure style for Offshore assembly identifiers that Isogen outputs on the
isometric drawing.
another circle.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.OffshoreAssemblyIDEnclosure

Welds and Joints
User Defined Joints

Sets the accumulation of end connections and the properties that define the sequencing and the
types of enclosures that appear on the isometric drawing for user-defined end connection
identifiers.
Connection Identification Category

Controls to which category of end connections that Isogen assigns an identifier.
 All assigns an identifier to all end connections.
 Fabrication assigns an identifier only to Fabrication end connections.
 Erection assigns an identifier only to Erection end connections.
 Offshore assigns an identifier only to Offshore end connections.
 Erection and Offshore assigns an identifier only to Erection and Offshore end
connections.
Defines:
I-Configure - Drawing.Format.ConnectionIDCategory
User Defined End Connections

Defines the content, appearance, and sequencing of end connection identifiers. You enter
data using a grid. Each row defines the identifiers for one type of end connection. End
connection identifiers are not generated for connection types that are not specified.
Open the grid, and then define the properties listed below as needed.
 SKEY identifies the SKEY for the end connection type. Select one of the following:
 SW - Socket Weld
 SC- Screwed
 CP - Compression
 FL- Flanged
 PL - Plain End
 BW - Butt Weld
 CL - Clamped
 GL - Glued
 FA - Flared
 PF - Push Fit

Welds and Joints
 Group controls how Isogen sequences and handles this type of end connection
identifier on the isometric drawing.
 Individual sequences end connection identifiers for this type of end connection
separately.
 Assembly assigns end connection identifiers and treats them as assembly
identifiers.
 Weld assigns end connection identifiers and treats them as weld identifiers.
 Fab Group controls how Fabrication category end connection identifiers of this type are
sequenced and handled on the isometric drawing. This setting overrides the Group
setting for these end connections.
 Individual sequences end connection identifiers for Fabrication occurrences of the
specified end connection separately.
 Assembly assigns end connection identifiers to Fabrication connections and treast
them as assembly identifiers.
 Weld assigns end connection identifiers to Fabrication connections and treast them
as weld identifiers.
 Erection Group controls how Isogen sequences and handles Erection category end
connection identifiers of this type on the isometric drawing. This setting overrides the
Group setting for these end connections.
 Individual sequences end connection identifiers for Erection occurrences of the
 Assembly assigns end connection identifiers to Erection connections and treats
them as assembly identifiers.
 Weld assigns end connection identifiers to Erection connections and treats them as
weld identifiers.
 Offshore Group controls how Offshore category end connection identifiers of this type
are sequenced and handles on the isometric drawing. This setting overrides the Group
setting for these end connections.
 Individual sequences end connection identifiers for Offshore occurrences of the
 Assembly assigns end connection identifiers to Offshore connections and treats them
as assembly identifiers.
 Weld assigns identifiers to Offshore connections and treats them as weld identifiers.
 Format controls the format of the end connection identifiers that Isogen outputs on the
isometric drawing.
 Numeric assigns numeric values to end connection identifiers.
 Alphabetic assigns alphabetic characters to end connection identifiers.
This setting is relevant only if Group is set to Individual. In other cases, the
software uses the configured setting for assembly identifiers and weld identifiers.
 Prefix specifies the default prefix that Isogen uses when outputting end connection
identifiers of this type on the isometric drawing. You can override this setting using Fab
Prefix, Erection Prefix, and Offshore Prefix.

Welds and Joints
 Fab Prefix specifies the alternative prefix that Isogen uses when outputting Fabrication
end connection identifiers on the isometric drawing. This setting overrides the Prefix
Prefix setting for these end connections.
 Erection Prefix specifies the alternative prefix that Isogen uses when outputting
Erection category end connection identifiers on the isometric drawing. This setting
overrides the Prefix setting for these end connections.
 Offshore Prefix specifies the alternative prefix that Isogen uses when outputting
Offshore end connection identifiers on the isometric drawing. This setting overrides the
Prefix setting for these end connections.
 Origin controls the origin of sequencing of end connection identifiers.
 Pipeline sequences end connection identifiers on a per pipeline basis. This is the
default setting.
 Drawing -sequences end connection identifiers on a per drawing sheet basis.
This setting is relevant only if Group is set to Individual.
 Accumulation controls how Isogen sequences end connection identifiers.
 Combined sequences end connection identifiers all categories together. This is the
default setting.
 Category sequences end connection identifiers for each category separately.
This setting is relevant only if Group is set to Individual.
 Enclosure controls the default type of enclosure that Isogen uses for end connection
identifiers output on the isometric drawing. You can override this setting using the Fab
Style, Erection Style, and Offshore Style options.
 Circle displays end connection identifiers inside a circular enclosure.
 Circle Double displays end connection identifiers inside a circular-shaped
enclosure inside another circle.
 Diamond Double displays end connection identifiers inside a diamond-shaped
enclosure inside another diamond-shaped enclosure.
 Diamond Ended displays end connection identifiers inside a diamond-ended box
enclosure.
 Diamond Ended Double displays end connection identifiers inside a
diamond-ended box enclosure inside another diamond-ended enclosure.
 Ellipse displays end connection identifiers inside an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
 Ellipse Double displays end connection identifiers inside an elliptical-shaped
enclosure inside another ellipse.
 Round Double displays end connection identifiers inside a round-ended box
enclosure inside another round-ended enclosure.
 Round Ended displays end connection identifiers inside a round-ended box
enclosure.
 Square Ended displays end connection identifiers inside a square-ended box
enclosure.

Welds and Joints
 Square Ended Double displays end connection identifiers inside a square-ended

box enclosure inside another square-ended enclosure.
 Suppressed suppresses the display of an enclosure.
 Triangle displays end connection identifiers inside a triangular-shaped enclosure.
 Triangle Double displays end connection identifiers inside a triangular-shaped
enclosure inside another triangle.
 Unboxed displays end connection identifiers as unboxed.
 Fab Style - Specifies the type of enclosure that Isogen uses for Fabrication end
connection identifiers output on the isometric drawing. Overrides the Enclosure setting.
enclosure.
enclosure.
enclosure.
 Unboxed displays Fabrication end connection identifiers as unboxed.

Welds and Joints
 Erection Style specifies the type of enclosure that Isogen uses for Erection end
enclosure.
enclosure.
enclosure.
 Unboxed displays Erection end connection identifiers as unboxed.
 Offshore Style specifies the type of enclosure that Isogen uses for Offshore end
enclosure.

Welds and Joints

enclosure.
enclosure.
 Unboxed displays Offshore end connection identifiers as unboxed.
The value that displays on the User Defined End Connections icon is a count of
how many end connection types and identifiers you have defined. The example below
indicates that three columns three columns currently currently have identifiers defined.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - Drawing.EndConnections

Welds and Joints
Reports
Defines the content and format of the site weld information file and the weld summary file. The
collection of properties and attributes that appear in Welds > Reports is only a subset of
Drawing Manager > Reports, which includes all of the available Isogen reports and applicable
properties and attributes. For more information, see Reports (on page 49).

SECTION 10
Smart 3D
Sets Smart 3D-specific options that define drawing output.
 Unlike the Isogen options, the drawing preview provided by the software does not reflect
settings for Smart 3D-specific options. For more information, see Drawing Preview Panel in
the Isogen Isometric Drawings User's Guide. You can access this document using the Help
> Printable Guides command in the software.
The Smart 3D category may include any of the style groups listed below. Every style group is
 Drawing Creation sets Smart 3D-specific isometric drawing properties that impact the
whole drawing. For more information, see Drawing Creation (on page 535).
 Content sets Smart 3D-specific properties for the content of piping, cabletray, and HVAC
isometric drawings. For more information, see Content (on page 543).
 Label Mapping sets Smart 3D-specific drawing properties for labels on the isometric
drawing. You must have a Reports database and a schema to use labels on isometric
drawings. For more information, see Label Mapping (on page 560).
 Post Isogen sets properties that control additional steps that may occur after the isometric
drawing is generated. For more information, see Post Isogen (on page 576).

Smart 3D
Drawing Creation
Sets Smart 3D-specific isometric drawing properties that impact the whole isometric drawing.
The Drawing Creation style group contains the options groups listed below:
 Overview provides information and sets options that control extraction of drawing model
data. For more information, see Overview (on page 536).
 Symbol Map defines the symbol mapping between the software and Isogen. For more
information, see Symbol Map (on page 541).
 Units of Measure specifies the units for drawing frame report text. For more information,
see Units of Measure (on page 542).
The Units of Measure options group is not available in the Content style group
when you are viewing a Cabletray or HVAC isometric drawing style (for example, Iso_HVAC and
Iso_Cabletray).
Overview
Provides information and sets options that control drawing creation for extracted Smart 3D
model data.
Extraction Rule
Specifies the Iso style extraction catalog reference rule object ProgID. This option is fixed for
a given style.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Catalog.IJDPmfgRules.ExtractionRule
Description
Describes the Iso style extraction catalog reference rule object. This option is fixed for a
given style.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Catalog.IJDPmfgRules.Description
Type
Specifies the name of the isometric extraction rule. This option is not used in the current
version of the software.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Catalog.IJDPmfgRules.Type

Smart 3D
Border Template
Specifies the customized border template file to use. If you do not define this option, the
software uses the default backing sheet template from the Catalog. Click the Browse
button to display the Save As dialog box, and then navigate to and select the appropriate
.sha file.
To reference a path relative to the Smart 3D SharedContent folder, use the
$SYMBOLSHARE$ macro instead of a hard-coded path.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.BorderTemplate
Drawing Class
Specifies the type of drawing. Available options are Standard, Penetration, and System.
For Iso_Piperun and Iso_Pipeline isometrics, select the Standard option. For Penetration
Spool isometrics, select the Penetration option. For Iso_WBS and Iso_System, select the
System option.
 This property is not available when you are viewing a Cabletray or HVAC isometric
drawing style.
 If you set Drawing Class to System, the software ignores the Sort Input Parts setting
and automatically sorts parts by pipeline.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.DrawingClass

Smart 3D
Sort Input Parts

Controls the processing of drawing parts that are added. Select one of the values listed
below:
 Default suppresses additional processing of the parts that make up the drawing.
 Connected Sets organizes the parts into connected sets. Each set produces its own
drawing in the .sha file and is output to the PCF with its own header. This setting
enables support for multiple connected networks in the same drawing.
 Pipeline organizes the parts into pipelines. Each pipeline produces its own drawing in
the .sha file, and is output to the PCF with its own header. This setting enables support
for a multi-pipeline drawing.
 The software does not currently support column reference dimensions within a
multi-pipeline drawing.
 For more information about disconnected and multi-pipeline drawings, see Isometric
Drawing Types in the Isogen Isometric Drawings User's Guide. You can access this
document using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.SortInputParts

Smart 3D
Change Management Enabled

Turns Isogen isometric change management on and off. By default, the setting is turned off.
To turn on change management, select the check box.
If you select this option along with the Smart 3D > Label Mapping > Numbering > Enable
Material Part Numbers option, the software writes a warning message to the Drawing log if
there is a conflict in settings. For more information on the User Defined Material Part
Numbers Enabled option, see Material List.
To turn off change management, clear the check box.
 For more information about isometric drawing change management, see Change
Management in the Isogen Isometric Drawing Options User's Guide, which is available
from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
 You can also override this style option with the Change Management property on the
Isogen isometric drawing document. For more information, see Style Tab (Properties
Dialog Box) in the Isogen Isometric Drawings User's Guide.
 Even if Change Management Enabled is turned off in the isometric style, you can
enable it on an Isogen isometric drawing document by setting the document style
property for Change Management to Enabled. If a conflict occurs, the conflict warning
displays in the Drawings log. For more information, see Style Tab (Properties Dialog
Box) in the Isogen Isometric Drawings User's Guide.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.ChangeManagmentEnabled
PCF Output Only

Specifies that the software creates the Piping Component File (PCF) only.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Controls.PCFOutputOnly

Smart 3D
Comments
Allows you to add information to the isometric style file not included in the drawing
configuration or definition, such as date created and who created the style or modifications
and modification dates. This section of the isometric style file act as a history. It is not
included in the drawings generated using the style.
 Origin identifies the origin of the isometric style file comment. For example, if the file
originally was created by Intergraph, this field contains Intergraph as the origin.
 Date specifies the creation or modification date of the isometric style file.
 Initials identifies the initials of the person who typed the comment.
 Comment describes the modification or action that took place with regard to the
isometric style file.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Comments

Smart 3D
Symbol Map
Defines the symbol mapping between the software and Isogen. You define the symbol mapping
for each isometric style.
The content in this option category is similar to the PDS-to-ISOGEN map in PDS
(Plant Design System).
Allow Unmapped Symbols

Continues to extract the isometric pipeline if the software cannot find the SKEY of a
component. Select the check box to continue extraction of the isometric pipeline and create
the drawing with the token SKEY symbol replacement. To extract the pipeline data and
extraction log that contains information of unmapped symbol components, clear the check
box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Controls.NoSymbolMapOK
Symbol Map
Defines the symbol mapping between the software and Isogen. The symbol mapping is
defined for each isometric style.
The symbol map must contain all matching data for objects in the model. If the software fails
to find a matching symbol name for each object during the extraction process, a message
displays. Your system administrator then must update the symbol map accordingly.
The content in this option category is similar to the PDS-to-ISOGEN map in PDS
(Plant Design System).
 SP3DPartClass specifies the part class name for the component. The part class names
that display in this list correspond to the type of isometric drawing style. For example,
when Iso_Pipeline the active style, the software populates this list with only piping part
class names. If Iso_HVAC is active, only HVAC parts display.
The software uses sheet names from the corresponding reference data
workbook to populate the SP3DPartClass list (Piping.xls, for example).
 EndPrepCode specifies the codelist number for the end preparation of the component.
For more details about the End Preparation codelist, see the AllCodeLists.xls
workbook.
 IsoGenSkey specifies the Isogen symbol key for the component. Most components are
mapped to an SKEY using an end preparation of 0. You can specify a wildcard for the
end type. For example, when ** is specified for the end type, the software reads the End
Preparation from the part and assigns the correct Isogen end type.
An important exception is the nipple. You must map two different SKEYs and
associated component identifiers based on the end preparation of the nipple. In other
words, the SKEY mapping for nipples always requires end-prep information. For more
information, see Nipple Symbol Mapping.

Smart 3D
 ComponentClass specifies the Piping Component File (PCF) identification text for the
piping component. This ID must be a valid Isogen Component Type Identifier as
described in the Isogen documentation, which is accessible from the Help > Printable
Guides command.
 In the current version of the software, any part class that represents a spectacle blind,
slip ring, paddle spacer, or other part that needs to have a primary direction output on it
must be mapped to one of the following SKEYs: SP, SR, or SB. Likewise, it should be
mapped to the component class MISC-COMPONENT.
 Because these three SKEYs are user-definable, you can change the graphics of the
SKEYs if necessary, but the names of the SKEYs cannot be changed if the direction
output is needed.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.SymbolMAP
End Prep Map

Defines supplemental symbol mapping for end preparation codes.
 EndPrep1 provides a user reference for the symbol mapping.
 EndPrepCode specifies a numerical value from the EndPreparation 3D codelist.
 EndPrepMap specifies the Isogen allowable end condition code. For more information,
see the Symbol Keys Reference Guide available from Help > Printable Guides.
 Description provides a description of the end preparation mapping.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.SymbolMAP.Supplement

Smart 3D
Units of Measure
Specifies the unit of measure format for values given in the drawing frame.
This options group is not available when you are viewing a cable tray or HVAC
isometric drawing style (for example, Iso_HVAC and Iso_Cabletray).
Pressure
Specifies a label for the pressure units of measure. Click the Browse button to display
the Catalog Labels dialog box, and then select a label to use.
This property is not available when you are viewing a cable tray or HVAC
isometric drawing style.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.DrawingFrame.UnitsOfMeasure
Temperature
Specifies a label for the temperature units of measure. Click the Browse button to
display the Catalog Labels dialog box, and then select a label to use.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.DrawingFrame.UnitsOfMeasure

Smart 3D
Content
Sets Smart 3D-specific properties for that determine the content that appears on piping,
cabletray, and HVAC isometric drawings.
The Content style group contains the options group below.
 General sets Smart 3D-specific functions that controls the general content of the isometric
drawing, such as the generation of implied materials and the generation of BOP coordinates.
For more information, see General (on page 545).
 Components sets Smart 3D-specific component properties on isometric drawings. For
more information, see Components (on page 547).
 Material List controls the content of the material list on a piping isometric drawing. For more
information, see Material List (on page 551).
 Reference Dimensions sets Smart 3D-specific properties for isometric drawing reference
dimensions. For more information, see Reference Dimensions (on page 552).
 Dotted Symbology provides options for setting dotted symbology for specific isometric
parts on a Smart 3D piping isometric drawing. For more information, see Dotted Symbology
(on page 555).
 Detail Sketches sets properties for detail sketches on the Smart 3D piping isometric
drawing. For more information, see Detail Sketches (on page 558).
 Alternative Texts provides options for defining user-specified text strings that are output on
the isometric drawing. For more information, see Alternative Texts (on page 559).
The General, Material List, Dotted Symbology, and Detail Sketches options
groups are not available in the Content style group when you are viewing a Cabletray or HVAC

Smart 3D
General
Sets Smart 3D-specific functions that control the general content of the isometric drawing, such
as the generation of implied materials and and the generation of BOP coordinates.
This options group is not available hen you are viewing a Cabletray or HVAC
Exclude Continuation Parts

Controls the exclusion of continuation parts from drawing content. When you select the
check box, all continuation information (real and implied components, end connection data,
and so on), is omitted from the isometric drawing.
Only use Exclude Continutation Parts for Spool drawings.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.ExcludeContinuationParts
Generated Implied Materials

Controls the generation of implied materials, including bolts. The default setting is to
generate implied materials.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Controls.GenerateImpliedMaterial
Exclude Unconnected Taps

Specifies whether unconnected taps are excluded from drawing content. To exclude
unconnected taps, select the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.ExcludeUnconnectedTap
Honor Spool At Branch

Includes parts of other pipelines at branches in order to maintain spool continuity on the
isometric drawing. By default, this setting is turned off. For more information about using this
option, see Control drawing content in the Isogen Isometric Drawing Options User's Guide,
available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
When using Honor Spool At Branch, generate the spools with Include Stub-Ins
with Header Spool set to True. For more information, see the Piping User's Guide,
available from Help > Printable Guides command.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.HonorSpoolAtBranch

Smart 3D
Use Nozzle Tag Label

Uses the system-defined nozzle connection note. By default, this option is turned on for all
isometric drawing styles. To turn off the option, clear the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.NozzleTagLabel
Flow Arrow Placement

Controls flow arrow placement. Options are listed in order from placement of the fewest to
the most flow arrows.
 None suppresses placement of the flow arrow.
 Pipe Run places the flow arrow on the longest header pipe feature of the run.
 Branch places the flow arrow on the branch pipes connected to header pipes.

Smart 3D
 Pipe Feature places the flow arrow on each pipe feature in a run. Use this setting if a
drawing may be split into multiple sheets, such as from the creation of spool sheets in
Isogen. Flow arrows are then placed on each sheet.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.SegmentFlowArrowPlacement
Output BOP Coordinates

Controls the generation of BOP coordinates at changes in pipeline elevation. To generate
BOP coordinates, select the check box. By default, this option is turned off.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.CoordOutputBOP

Smart 3D
Components
Sets Smart 3D-specific component properties on isometric drawings.
The only properties that are available when you are viewing a Cabletray or
HVAC isometric drawing style are Include Pipe Support and Support Filter. All of the other
properties are specific to the Piping isometric drawing style and do not display in the software
otherwise.
Generated Reinforcement Pad Item Code

Specifies whether to generate an item code and a material description for reinforcement
pads on the material list. If you select the check box, the software generates an item code
and a material description for reinforcement pads on the material list, and plots the symbols
for reinforcement pads on the drawing. By default, this option is turned on.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.RPADItemCode
Show ComponentTags
Controls whether component tags or names are shown on graphics.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.ShowCptTags
Instrument Tag Line Length

Specifies the number of characters after which the software inserts a line feed in instrument
tag numbers for display in an instrument bubble. If you set this value to 1, the software
inserts a line feed after the first character. If you set this value to 10, the software replaces
the embedded dash within the tag number with a line feed.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.InstrumentTagLimit
Output Bend Angle

Writes the bend angle length to the PCF file. Select the check box to write the calculated
length for a bent pipe to the PCF file.
Use Dimensions > Display Format > Angles > Style to write the bend angle to
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.ShowBendAngle

Smart 3D
Output Bend Radius

Controls the display of the bend radius for pipe bends on the isometric drawing. To display
the bend radius, select the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.ShowBendRadius
Bend Radius Format

Controls the appearance of the bend radius for pipe bends on the isometric drawing.
 Absolute Length displays the length of the bend radius.
 Radius Multiplier displays the radius multiplier of the bend radius.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.BendRadiusFormat
Include Pipe Supports

Controls whether pipe supports are included in the material list.
To include pipe supports, select the check box. This is the default setting. Clear the check
box to exclude pipe supports.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Controls.IncludePipeSupport

Smart 3D
Support Filter
Specifies a user-defined filter that determines which supports are included in the isometric
drawing. If no filter is specified, all associated supports display on the drawing. Click the
Browse button to display the Select Filter dialog box, and then select the appropriate
filter.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.SupportFilter
Append Bolt Length

Determines whether the bolt length is appended to the description in the material list. By
default, this option is turned on.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Controls.AppendBoltLength
Output Secondary Valve Operator Orientation

Enables secondary orientation notes for valve operators. Only valves that have operators of
the following types will include the secondary operator orientation callouts in the drawings:
 Wrench, short (codelist 9)
 Wrench, long (codelist 11)
 Wrench, special (codelist 271)
 Lever (codelist 17)
 Lever, quick-action, (codelist 39)
 Gear, side mounted handwheel Type 1 (codelist 331)
 Gear, side mounted handwheel Type 5 (mirror of Type 1) (codelist 1035)
Gear, side mounted handwheel Type 6 (mirror of Type 2) (codelist 1040)
 Gear, side mounted inclined handwheel Type 1 (codelist 351)
 Gear, side mounted inclined handwheel Type 2 (mirror of Type 1) (codelist 1055)
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Controls.ValOpr2ndOrient

Smart 3D
Treat One Cut Mitre Bend As Mitre Weld

Controls the conversion of one cut mitre bends to mitre welds. If you select the check box,
Isogen treats one cut mitre bends as mitre welds. Although additional pipe sections are
added to the PCF to fill the gap, the overall pipe lengths remain the same. Cut piece lengths
are split between individual mitre welds.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Controls.TreatOneCutMitreBendAsMitreWeld

Smart 3D
Material List
Controls the content of the material list on a piping isometric drawing.
Exclude Weight Data

Specifies whether to exclude weight data from the material list and Supplementary reports.
Select the check box to exclude the component weight data extraction. To extract
component weight data and include it in the material list and supplementary reports, clear
the check box. This is the default setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.ExcludeWeightData
User Component Quantity Attribute

Specifies the user component quantity. Use the list to select a material attribute in which the
component quantity for piping components other than pipe is stored.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedComponentQTY
Exclude Nuts
Specifies whether to exclude nut data from the material list. To exclude nut data, select the
check box. If the check box ix cleared, Isogen excludes nut data and includes it in the
material list. This is the default setting.
You must also set nuts as To be reported. On the Occurrence tab of the
Properties dialog box for an item, set the Reporting Requirements property to To be
reported.
Exclude Washers
Specifies whether to exclude washer data from the material list. To exclude the washer data,
select the check box. If you clear the check box, Isogen extracts washer data and includes it
in the material list. This is the default setting.
You must also set washers as To be reported in the model. On the Occurrence
tab of the Properties dialog box for an item, set the Reporting Requirements property to
To be reported.

Smart 3D
Reference Dimensions
Sets Smart 3D-specific properties for isometric drawing reference dimensions.
Enable
Allows placement of reference dimensions from either a structural column or a grid line to
one item on the isometric drawing. If you select the check box, the placement occurs.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Dimensions.ColumnReference.Enable
Reference Location
Specifies the structural reference location as either a column on the object or a grid line.
Select Column or Grid Line.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Dimensions.ColumnReference.ReferenceLocation
Structure Reference Filter

Specifies a filter to use as the structural reference filter. Click the Browse button to
display the Select Filter dialog box, and then select the appropriate filter.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Dimensions.ColumnReference.StructureReferenceFilter
Use Maximum Distance

Controls whether Maximum Distance is enabled. To enable, select the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Dimensions.ColumnReference.UseMaximumDistance
Maximum Distance
Restricts the items that are considered by Structure Reference Filter to a cube that
surrounds the placement point. The value that you set for Maximum Distance determines
the distance between the reference point and the edges of the cube. You must also select
Use Maximum Distance.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Dimensions.ColumnReference.MaximumDistance

Smart 3D
Automatic Placement
Controls how the software determines the placement point location for the structural
reference. You can select Start Point, 1st Component, or Off. When you select Start
Point or 1st Component, the software automatically selects the location of the placement
point on the selected pipeline. When you select Off, the software considers the User
Defined Placement setting, which enables you to have full control regarding the precise
location of the of the reference dimension on the entire pipeline, as well as which reference
dimensions appear on the piping isometric drawing.
You can use Automatic Placement and User Defined Placement
cooperatively. For example, you can have Smart 3D place a start point reference dimension,
along with any user-defined reference dimensions that you have specified using the
Isometric Reference Dimension control point.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Dimensions.ColumnReference.Placement
User Defined Placement

Controls the use of user-specified Isometric Reference Dimension control points for
determining reference dimension placement locations on the pipeline. You can also specify
whether this property is used in conjunction with the Automatic Placement setting.
 On places user-defined reference dimensions on the pipeline as specified by the
Isometric Reference Dimension control point. You can place any number of Isometric
Reference Dimension control points.
 On -- Override Automatic prevents the software from placing an automatic reference
dimension regardless of the Automatic Placement setting.
 Off defers to the Automatic Placement setting.
 You must associate an Isometric Reference Dimension control point with a piping part.
The software does not detect this type of control point if it is associated with a pipe
feature or pipe run. In these instances, the software writes an error in the log file but still
produces the piping isometric drawing, minus the reference dimension.
 You can place an Isometric Reference Dimension control point anywhere along the
centerline of the associated part, including the end points. For more information, see
Control Point in the Common User's Guide, which is available with the Help > Printable
Guides command in the software.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Dimensions.ColumnReference.UserPlacement

Smart 3D
Dimension Type
Specifies the dimension type as either prime or skewed. Select Prime or Skew.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Dimensions.ColumnReference.DimensionType
Enclosure
Specifies the type of enclosure to use for the column name or grid callout. Select one of the
following: None, Square Ends, Round Ends, Diamond Ends, Circle, Double Circle, or
Ellipse.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Dimensions.ColumnReference.Enclosure

Smart 3D
Dotted Symbology
Provides options for setting dotted symbology for specific isometric parts on a Smart 3D piping
isometric drawing.
Enabled
Enables dotted symbology for parts specified by Dotted Dimensioned Filter or Dotted
UnDimensioned Filter. If both parts connected at a weld are dotted, the weld is dotted also.
If a part is returned by both filters, the part is dimensioned. Select this check box to enable
dotted symbology.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Format.DottedSymbology.Enabled
Dotted Dimensioned Filter

Specifies a user-defined filter that selects all the parts that need to be shown dotted and
dimensioned on the isometric drawing. Click the Browse button to display the Select
Filter dialog box, and then select the appropriate filter.
In many instances, using a label is faster than using a filter. To speed up
isometric drawing generation, set Dotted Dimensioned Label instead.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Format.DottedSymbology.DottedDimensionedFilter
Dotted Dimensioned Label

Specifies a label that selects all the parts that need to be shown dotted and dimensioned on
the isometric drawing. In many cases, using this option is faster than using Dotted
Dimensioned Filter. Click the Browse button to display the Catalog Label dialog box,
and then select the appropriate label.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Format.DottedSymbology.Label

Smart 3D
Dotted UnDimensioned Filter

Specifies a user-defined filter that selects all the parts that need to be shown dotted and
undimensioned on the isometric drawing. Click the Browse button to display the Select
Filter dialog box, and then select the appropriate filter.
For this option to be active, ensure that Dotted UnDimensioned Label is
not set.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Format.DottedSymbology.DottedUnDimensionedFilter
Dotted UnDimensioned Label

Specifies a label that selects all the parts that need to be shown dotted and undimensioned
on the isometric drawing. In many cases, using this option is faster than using Dotted
UnDimensioned Filter. Click the Browse button to display the Catalog Label dialog
box, and then select the appropriate label.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Format.DottedSymbology.DottedUnDimensionedLabel

Smart 3D
Detail Sketches
Sets properties for detail sketches on the Smart 3D piping isometric drawing.
This options group is not available when you are viewing a Cabletray or HVAC
Show Detail Sketch

Controls the display of detail sketches on the isometric drawing. Select the check box to
enable the display of detail sketches.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Supplementary.DetailSketches.ShowDetailSketch
Sketch Mapping
Maps part classes with symbol files for the purpose of defining detailed sketches.
You can map multiple symbol files to a given part class. The software places each symbol
as a detail sketch on the isometric drawing and prints the appropriate number of call-outs
adjacent to each occurrence of the part class. You can also specify a label and value. If the
value you specify matches the value returned by the label, the software generates a detail
on the drawing.
 SP3DPartClass specifies the name of a part class. Part classes and their associated
data are defined in the reference data. For information about creating or modifying part
classes, see the Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides
command.
 SketchSymbol specifies the name of a symbol file for the detail sketch. The software
checks to see if this file exists in the Supplementary.Detail Sketches.Path location.
 SketchChkLabel names the label, such as SupportPartName.
 SketchChkValue defines a value. If this value matches the value returned by the label,
then the software generates a detail on the drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Supplementary.DetailSketches.SketchMapping

Smart 3D
Alternative Texts
Sets the values of text strings on isometric drawings.
Smart 3D Alternative Texts

Provides options for defining user-specified text strings that are output on the isometric
drawing.
 TextPurpose provides a value corresponding to the text to replace. The values
provided are Smart 3D-specific. The table below lists the Intergraph Alternative Text
options that are currently supported by the software.
DEG_DEFAULT defines the text output on the drawing to denote degrees.
HOR_DEFAULT denotes the horizontal orientation angle.
IN_LENGTH_DEFAULT defines the text output on the drawing to denote length in

inches.
MM_DEFAULT defines the text output on the drawing to denote unit measurement
in millimeters.
NO_SPOOL_DEFAULT defines the text output on the drawing if there are no

spools in the drawing.
ORIENT_HANDLE_DEFAULT defines the text output on the drawing
UNDEFINED_INSULATION_SPEC_DEFAULT defines the text output on the

drawing to denote the insulation specification is undefined for a feature or a run.
UNDEFINED_PAINT_SPEC_DEFAULT defines the text output on the drawing to

denote the painting specification is undefined for a feature or a run.
UNDEFINED_TRACING_SPEC_DEFAULT defines the text output on the drawing

to denote the tracing specification is undefined for a feature or a run.
VOR_DEFAULT denotes the vertical orientation angle.

Smart 3D
The following AText options generate abbreviate direction strings, such as 35 N 45

E. Used when the orientation is non-orthogonal.
 D_DEFAULT
 E_DEFAULT
 N_DEFAULT
 S_DEFAULT
 U_DEFAULT
 W_DEFAULT
These AText options generate full text direction strings (such as EAST or SOUTH).
Used when the orientation is orthogonal.
 DOWN_DEFAULT
 EAST_DEFAULT
 NORTH_DEFAULT
 SOUTH_DEFAULT
 UP_DEFAULT
 WEST_DEFAULT
To override all direction settings, you must define the Smart 3D AText
option and the Isogen AText option
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.IntergraphAlternativeTexts

Smart 3D
Label Mapping
Sets Smart 3D-specific drawing properties for labels on the isometric drawing. You must have a
Reports database and Schema to use labels on isometric drawings.
The Label Mapping style group contains the options groups listed below:
 General allows you to turn on and off the generation of labels and define attribute mapping
between Isogen and the software. For more information, see General (on page 561).
 Attributes controls the generation of notes that point to specific component types of
attributes, such as component attributes or support attributes, on the isometric drawing. For
more information, see Attributes (on page 562).
 Notes generates notes that point to specific items, such as components, end connections,
and keypoints, on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Notes (on page 565).
 Specifications generates notes that correspond to items in a specification. For more
information, see Specifications (on page 567).
 User Defined Item Codes and Descriptions sets a user-specified item code for parts and
a user-specified item code and material description for pipe supports that display in the parts
list.For more information, see User Defined Item Codes and Descriptions (on page 569).
 Numbering controls and defines the numbering of part numbers in the material list. For
more information, see Numbering (on page 574).
The Numbering options group is not available when you are viewing a
Cabletray or HVAC isometric drawing style.
General
Controls the generation of labels on the isometric drawing and defines attribute mapping
between Isogen and the software
Enable Labels
Enables reporting labels. By default, this option is turned off. Select the check box to enable
reporting labels.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.EnableLabels

Smart 3D
Attribute Map
Maps a Smart 3D attribute to the corresponding Isogen attribute.
 Display Name specifies a text string for the attribute. You select this text string in the
Attributes folder under Drawing Frame.
The Display Name Drawing Number must be mapped to Isogen attribute
DRG as of Smart 3D version 6.0. In previous versions of the software, Drawing Number
was mapped to the Isogen attribute DRAWING-NUMBER.
 Name specifies an Isogen attribute.
You can customize the mapping of Isogen attributes ATTRIBUTE11 through
ATTRIBUTE99. ATTRIBUTE1 through ATTRIBUTE10 are reserved by Intergraph. We
recommend that you start adding your own attributes from ATTRIBUTE21. The
Intergraph-reserved attributes are defined as follows:
Attribute Name Definition
ATTRIBUTE1 Maximum Working Pressure
ATTRIBUTE2 Maximum Testing Temperature
ATTRIBUTE3 Maximum Testing Pressure
ATTRIBUTE4 Extracted By
ATTRIBUTE5 Checked By
ATTRIBUTE6 Approved By
ATTRIBUTE7 Parent Piping System
ATTRIBUTE8 Fluid Code
ATTRIBUTE9 Extraction Date
ATTRIBUTE10 Reserved for Future Use
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.AttributeMAP

Smart 3D
Attributes
Controls the generation of notes that point to specific component types of attributes, such as
component attributes or support attributes, on the isometric drawing. The report label definition
determines the different types of notes based on attributes.
Drawing Frame Attributes

Associates drawing frame formatted text with a report label definition. You can use this
option folder to specify labels for the drawing frame. For more information, see Attribute
Map.
 Attribute Name specifies the drawing frame attribute.
 Label Name identifies the name of the label. Click the ellipsis button in the Label Name
field to open the Catalog Labels dialog box, and then select a label to use.
 Object Type specifies the object type that can be associated with the drawing frame.
Available options are Default, Drawing Sheet, Pipe Run, and Pipeline.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.DrawingFrame
Generates notes that point to specific component attributes on the isometric drawing. The
report label definition determines the different types of notes based on attributes.
 Type specifies a component attribute type.
 Attribute Name specifies a component attribute.
 Label Name identifies a catalog label to use for the component attribute label. Click the
ellipsis in the Label Name field to open the Catalog Label dialog box and select a label.
 Object Type specifies a component object type. The Object Type is defined as Part by
default.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.ComponentAtts

Smart 3D
Weld Attributes
Generates notes that correspond to items in the weld list. Weld list attributes are applicable
only to piping isometric drawings.
 Attribute Name specifies an attribute. WELD-ATTRIBUTE5 through
WELD-ATTRIBUTE100 are user-specified weld properties reported in the weld box or
weld summary report.
 Label Name identifies the name of the label. Click the Browse button to open the
Catalog Labels dialog box, and then select a label to use.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.WeldList
Support Attributes
Generates notes in the Piping Component File (PCF) that point to specific support attributes
on the isometric drawing. The report label definition determines the different types of notes
based on attributes.
 Attribute Name specifies a support attribute. SUPPORT-ATTRIBUTE1 through
SUPPORT-ATTRIBUTE50 and COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 through
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE100 are user-specified attributes reported in the PCF.
 Label Name identifies a catalog label to use for the component attribute label. Click the
Browse button to open the Catalog Label dialog box, and then select a label
definition from the catalog.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.SupportAtts
Material List
Generates notes that correspond to items in the material list.
 Attribute Name selects an attribute. MATERIAL-USER0 through MATERIAL-USER99
are user-defined attributes reported in the material list.
 Label Name specifies the name of the label. Click the Browse button to open the
Catalog Label dialog box, and then select a label definition from the catalog.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.MaterialList

Smart 3D
Notes
Generates notes that point to specific items, such as components, end connections, and
keypoints, on the isometric drawing. The report label definition determines the different types of
notes.
Component Note
Generates notes that point to specific components on the isometric drawing.
 Part Type specifies a component type, such as PIPE, VALVE, or PIPE- SUPPORT.
 Label Name specifies the name of the label. Click the ellipsis in the Label Name field to
open the Catalog Label dialog box, and then select a label definition from the catalog.
Commonly, you will choose a label from the Iso category of labels.
 Message Enclosure specifies the type of enclosure for the label.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.ComponentNote
Conditional Component Notes

Generates notes that point to specific components on the isometric drawing. The report
label definition determines the different types of notes based on a test condition.
 Part Type specifies a component type, such as PIPE, VALVE, or PIPE-SUPPORT.
 Test Label Name identifies a catalog label to use for the test label. Click the ellipsis in
the Test Label Name field to open the Catalog Label dialog box, and then select a
label.
 Message Enclosure specifies the type of enclosure for the label. The types provided
are Message, Message-Square, Message-Pointed, Message-Round,
Message-Circle, Message-Triangle, and Message-Diamond.
 Test Values identifies the values to use in the test label.
 Output Label Name identifies a catalog label to use for the output label. Click the
ellipsis in the Output Label Name field to open the Catalog Label dialog box and
select a label.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.ComponentNoteConditional

Smart 3D
Keypoint Notes
Sets options to control how key point notes display on the isometric drawing. A key point
refers to a specific location on a component. Key point notes are associated with individual
component key points and contain user-specified text that provides special instructions or
requirements for a given component. The examples below show a key point note that has
been assigned to a valve in the model, followed by the resulting output on the isometric
drawing.

Smart 3D
 Part Type identifies the type of component to which the note applies. Available
component types are Instrument, Pipe, Pipe-Component, Pipe-Support, RPad,
Specialty, and Valve.
 Purpose indicates the reason for associating the note with the component. The items
that display in this list are defined on the NotePurpose sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls
workbook. For more information, see the Smart 3D Reference Data Guide delivered
with the software.
 Keypoint indicates the specific location on the component to which the note is
associated. The key point that you select determines where on the component the note
leader line points. Select Any, or select one of the key points that displays in the list.
 Message Enclosure indicates the shape of the enclosure used to contain the note that
Isogen outputs on the isometric drawing. Available options are Message,
Message-Circle, Message-Diamond, Message-Pointed, Message-Round,
Message-Square, and Message-Triangle.
The software displays the number of keypoint notes defined in the active style
and stored in the Key Points Notes collection. This is a system-generated value. The
example below shows that three keypoint notes are defined.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.KeypointNotes
End Connenction Notes

Associates a drawing end connection note with a catalog report label template.
 End Connection Type specifies an attribute for the label.
Commonly, you select a label from the Iso category.
 Message Enclosure provides the type of enclosure for the label.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.EndConnection

Smart 3D
Specifications
Generates notes that correspond to items in a specification.
Insulation Specification, Tracing Specification, and Painting Specific are
specific to piping isometric drawings and are not available when you are viewing a Cabletray or
HVAC isometric drawing style.
Insulation Spec
Generates notes that correspond to items in an insulation specification.
 Attribute Name specifies an attribute.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.InsulationSpec
Tracing Spec
Generates notes that correspond to items in a tracing specification.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.TracingSpec
Painting Spec
Generates notes that correspond to items in a painting specification.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.PaintingSpec

Smart 3D
Misc Spec
Generates notes that correspond to items in a miscellaneous specification.
 Label Name specifies the name of the label. Click the Browse button to open the
MISC-SPEC1 through MISC-SPEC5 are user-specified pipe run properties used to call
out attribute breaks in the isometric drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.MiscSpec

Smart 3D
User Defined Item Codes and Descriptions

Sets a user-specified item code for parts and a user-specified item code and material
description for pipe supports that display in the parts list.
Only the Item Code, Support Item Code, and Support Material
Descriptions properties are available for all Smart 3D isometric drawing styles. All of the other
properties are specific to piping isometric drawings.
Item Code
Specifies a user-defined item code to use in the material list. Click the Browse button
to open the Catalog Label dialog box, and then select a label to use in the material list.
When you set this option, the software uses the formatted label output value as the item
code of the isometric part. By default, the item code is the Contractor Commodity Code
property for the isometric part.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedItemCode
Pipe As Item Code

Specifies the pipe OID value to be used as the item code in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.PipeOIDAsItemCode
Pipe Material Description

Sets a material description for the pipes that display in the material list. Click the Browse
button to open the Catalog Label dialog box, and then select a label to use in the
material list. When you set this property, the software uses the value returned by the
associated reports label as the description for pipes in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedPipeMaterialDescription
Bolt Item Code

Specifies a user-defined item code for bolts in the material list. Click the Browse button
When you set this property, the software uses the value returned by the associated reports
label as the item code for bolts in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedBoltItemCode

Smart 3D
Bolt Material Description

Sets a material description for the bolts in the material list. Click the Browse button to
open the Catalog Label dialog box, and then select a label to use in the material list. When
you set this property, the software uses the value returned by the associated reports label
as the description for bolts in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedBoltMaterialDescription
Clamp Item Code

Specifies a user-defined item code for clamp parts in the material list. Click the Browse
button to open the Catalog Label dialog box, and then and select a label to use in the
material list. When you set this property, the item code for clamps in the material list is the
value returned by the associated reports label.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedClampItemCode
Clamp Material Description

Sets a material description for clamp parts in the material list. Click the Browse button
When you set this property, the item code for description in the material list is the value
returned by the associated reports label.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedClampMaterialDescription
Gasket Item Code

Specifies a user-defined item code for gaskets in the material list. Click the Browse
button to open the Catalog Label dialog box, and then select a label to use in the material
list. When you set this property, the software uses the value returned by the associated
reports label as the item code for gaskets in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedGasketItemCode

Smart 3D
Gasket Material Description

Sets a material description for the gaskets in the material list. Click the Browse button
label as the description for gaskets in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedGasketMaterialDescription
Instrument Specialty Item Code

Specifies the instrument specialty item code to use in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.InstrumentSpecialtyItemCode
Instrument Material Description

Sets a material description for the instruments in the material list. Click the Browse
list. When you set this property, the software uses the value returned by the associated
reports label as the description for instruments in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedInstrumentMaterialDescription
Specialty Material Description

Sets a material description for the specialty items that display in the material list. Click the
Browse button to open the Catalog Label dialog box, and then select a label to use in
the material list. When you set this property, the software uses the value returned by the
associated reports label as the description for specialty items in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedSpecialtyMaterialDescription
Support Item Code

Specifies a user-defined item code for pipe supports that display in the material list. Click the
the material list. When you set this property, the software uses the formatted label output
value as the item code for pipe supports in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedSupportItemCode

Smart 3D
Support Material Description

Sets a material description for the pipe supports that display in the material list. Click the
associated reports label as the description for pipe supports in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedSupportMaterialDescription
Nut Item Code

Specifies a user-defined item code for nuts in the material list. Click the Browse button
label as the item code for nuts in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedNutItemCode
Nut Material Description

Sets a material description for the nuts that display in the material list. Click the Browse
list. When you set this option, the software uses the value returned by the associated
reports label as the description for nuts in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedNutMaterialDescription
Washer Item Code

Specifies a user-defined item code for the washers that display in the material list. Click the
associated reports label as the item code for washers in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedWasherItemCode

Smart 3D
Washer Material Description

Sets a material description for the washers that display in the material list. Click the Browse
button to open the Catalog Label dialog box, and then select a label to use in the
material list. When you set this property, the software uses the value returned by the
associated reports label as the description for washers in the material list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedWasherMaterialDescription

Smart 3D
Numbering
Controls and defines the numbering of part numbers in the material list.
The Numbering options group is not available when you are viewing a
Cabletray or HVAC isometric drawing style (for example, Iso_HVAC and Iso_Cabletray).
Enable Material Part Numbers

Controls the display of the material part number label. When you select this option, the
software derives a part number from the model and uses it as the part number in the
material list callouts on the drawing. A label specified by the User Defined Material Part
Number option is used to create the callout from the part object in the drawing. For more
information on this using this option, see the description for the User Defined Material Part
Number option.
Selecting this property also overrides part number repeatability when Change
Management Enabled also selected. Any time you select this User Defined Part Numbers
Enabled and Change Management Enabled, Isogen Configuration displays a status
message notifying you of a conflict in settings. For more information on the Change
Management Enabled option, see Content.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedPartNumbersEnabled
Material Part Number

Defines a label to return the Sequence ID for a piping part. The value returned from this
label must be a positive integer. Isogen ignores any values returned that do not meet this
requirement, and automatically generates part numbers for the components. It is
recommended that you specify a label that returns the Sequence ID property for the piping
part. This option is only available if you select User Defined Material Part Numbers
Enabled.
Before using this option in combination with the User Defined Material Part Numbers
Enabled options:
 You must assign sequence IDs to the piping parts to use this option. It is recommended
that you use a custom command to assign the sequence IDs. Two piping parts cannot
have the same sequence ID number.
 This option is not available for multi-sheet Isogen isometric drawings. If you need to use
the User Defined Material Part Number option, it is recommended that you clear the
Drawing Manager > Drawing Generation > Drawing Splitting > Automatic Drawing
Splitting check box to force single sheet isometric drawings. Consider the implications
for Piping Component Files (PCF). When you select User Defined Material Part
Numbers Enabled, REPEAT-PART-NUMBER attributes are written to the PCF
components with the value returned by the label specified by User Defined Material
Part Number. A single HIGHEST-PART-NUMBER entry is made in the PCF heading for
Sheet1, with the value of the largest REPEAT-PART-NUMBER in the PCF. For more
information, see Automatic Drawing Splitting in Drawing Splitting.

Smart 3D
 The User Defined Material Part Number option overrides Isogen's accumulation of
parts in the material list. If Isogen accumulation options are enabled, Isogen attempts to
collect the components that do not have part numbers with those that have part
numbers. To avoid this problem, make sure the part number sequencing in the model is
correct or disable the Isogen Fabrication Accumulation options. For more information,
see Fab Items in Settings.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.MaterialList.UserDefinedMaterialPartNumber
Weld Number
Specifies a label to use with the weld number on the isometric drawing. Click the Browse
button to display the Catalog Labels dialog box, and then select a label. There are two
delivered weld number labels you can use with this option: Piping Isometric Weld
Sequence Number and Piping isometric Weld Type and Sequence Number.
 To use this option, you must also select Welds and Joints > Generation and Display
> Controls > Show Weld Numbers.
 The label you select for Weld Number Label cannot result in the generation of weld
identifiers with spaces. Intergraph does not support weld identifiers with spaces.

Smart 3D
Post Isogen
Sets properties that control additional steps that may occur after the isometric drawing is
generated.
The Post Isogen style group contains the options groups listed below.
 Pipeline List sets options regarding the Excel workbook object that communicates multiple
pipe run information on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Pipeline List (on
page 577).
 Drawing Frame sets Smart 3D-specific options for the drawing frame. For more information,
see Drawing Frame (on page 579).
 Enterprise Data sets parameters for publishing files other than .sha files. For more
information, see Enterprise Data (on page 580).
When you are viewing a Cabletray or HVAC isometric drawing style, the
Pipeline List options group is not available.
Pipeline List
Provides options regarding the Excel workbook object that communicates multiple pipe run
information on the isometric drawing.
The Pipeline List options group is not available when you are viewing a
Cabletray or HVAC isometric drawing style (for example, Iso_HVAC and Iso_Cabletray).
Show Pipeline List Box

Defines whether to display the pipeline summary list box in the drawing title block. The
pipeline summary contains all of the pipe run data that makes up the pipeline. To display the
list, select the check box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.DrawingFrame.PipeLineList
Box Origin
Defines the origin location of the pipeline list. Select Bottom Left, Bottom Right, Top Left
or Top Right.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Box Origin X
Defines the X-coordinate (value in millimeters) of the pipeline list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Smart 3D
Box Origin Y
Defines the Y-coordinate (value in millimeters) of the pipeline list.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Column
Defines the column format for the pipeline list.
 Sequence specifies the order of the columns from left to right.
 HeaderColumn sets the text heading of each column.
 PipelineData_ Att sets the contents of each column. For more information, see Pipeline
List Box.
The software displays the number of columns defined for the pipeline list. This is
a system-generated value. The example below shows that three columns are defined.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Layer
Specifies the layer for the pipeline list. This value (integer) is in the range 1 - 50.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Report Output Format

Specifies the report output format for the Pipeline List Report as Excel spreadsheet or native
text box format.
If you select Native text boxes, you must also add gridlines to the
template background sheet in the drawing.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A

Smart 3D
Use Report Template

Specifies whether to use a report template for the pipeline list format. When you select this
check box, the software generates the pipeline list using the standard report template. The
content is driven by the Model Extraction > Drawing Frame > Pipeline List > Template
Name setting.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Template Name
Specifies a report template to use for the pipeline list. This option is only available when you
select the Use Report Template check box. Click the Browse button to open the
Select Template dialog box, and then select the report template name.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
Pipeline List Box

Generates labels to use as part of the Pipeline List box.
 Label Attribute specifies the attribute.
 Label Name provides the name of the label. Click the Browse button to open a
dialog box, and then select a label definition from the catalog. The defined values show
up in Smart 3D > Post Isogen > Pipeline List > Columns so you can give the column
a name and the defined attributes that map to a label. For more information, see
PipeLine List (on page 577).
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Labels.PipelineListBox

Smart 3D
Drawing Frame
Sets Smart 3D-specific options for the drawing frame.
Preserve User Annotation

Preserves user annotation data during re-extraction. The user annotation layer name must
be PMFGUSER. By default, this option is turned off. To turn on the option, select the check
box.
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Drawing.Content.PreserveUserAnnotation

Smart 3D
Enterprise Data
Published Files
Defines options for publishing files that are not .sha files.
Specifies the additional file types that can be published to SmartPlant Foundation along with
the .sha drawing.
 File Type specifies the file type.
 SPF File Extension specifies the file extension to use when the file is published to
SmartPlant Foundation. If you do not define a setting, then Isogen uses the default file
extension as listed in the table below.
File Type Default SPF File Extension
PCF .pcf
POD .pod
ISOGEN-NEUTRAL-FILE .b
* Other ISOGEN files .txt
 If SmartPlant Foundation does not recognize the as a valid file type, then the publishing
fails.
 SmartPlant Foundation does not currently support .pcf format, but it can be added using
the SmartPlant Foundation Desktop Client. For more information, contact Intergraph
Support Services. You can find support information on our web site
http://support.intergraph.com (http://support.intergraph.com/).
Defines:
Option Switch - N/A
I-Configure - S3D.Supplementary.PublishedFiles

APPENDIX A
Appendix: Record Identification

Numbers
Spool and In-Line Fitting Records

Spool/Fitting Type In Leg First Second Branch Out Leg Remarks
Branch Leg
Leg
Bend 30 - - 31
Elbow 35 - - 36
Olet 40 41 - 42 Plus a 0 record
Tee 45 46 - 47 Plus a 0 record
Cross 50 51 52 53 Plus a 0 record
Reducer (Con/Ecc) 55 - - - Plus a 0 record
Tee Reducer 60 61 - 62 Plus a 0 record

(Con/Ecc)
Reducing Flange 65 - - - Plus a 0 record
Tee Bend/Elbow 70 71 - 72 Plus a 0 record
Angle Valve 75 - - 76 Plus a 0 record
3 Way Valve 80 81 - 82 Plus a 0 record
4 Way Valve 85 86 87 88 Plus a 0 record
Instrument 90 91 92 93 A straight through type

instrument has only 90 and 93
record ID numbers. Instrument
dials have only a 90 record.
Pcom (Misc. Pipe 95 - - 96

Component)
Pipe (Tube) 100 - - -
Fixed Length Pipe 101 - - -

Appendix: Record Identification Numbers
Spool/Fitting Type In Leg First Second Branch Out Leg Remarks

Branch Leg
Leg
Pipe Block (Fixed 102 - - -

Length)
Pipe Block (Variable 103 - - -

Length)
Flange 105 - - -
Lap Joint Stub End 106 - - -
Blank Flange (Blind) 107 - - -
Gasket 110 - - -
Bolt 115 - - -
Weld 120 - - -
Cap 125 - - -
Coupling 126 - - -
Union 127 - - -
Valve 130 - - -
Trap 132 - - -
Vent 134 - - -
Filter 136 - - -
User Positioned 149 - - - Used to define position

Comment
Pipe Hanger/Support 150 - - -
180 to 199 - - - Reserved for internal ISODAT

inclusive processing.
Bore Record 0 - - -
End of File Marker 999 - - -
Transfers Collection (Material List)

Appendix: Record Identification Numbers

Index
A D
Accumulation • 430 Data Files • 455
Actions • 36 Dates • 35
Additional • 205 Definitions • 196, 355
Additional Allowance • 265 Detail Sketches • 229, 558
Alternative Text • 434, 452, 499, 510 Diagnostics • 33
Alternative Texts • 81, 99, 129, 218, 237, Dimension Location • 263
247, 326, 340, 345, 351, 411, 471, 559 Dimension Style • 256
Angle / 3 / 4 Way Valves • 272, 300 Dimensions • 255, 331
Angles • 323 Display • 313
Appendix Display Format • 320
Record Identification Numbers • 582 Documentation Comments • 11
Attribute Display • 355 Dotted Symbology • 556
Attribute Table • 357 Drawing Area • 82
Attributes • 455, 563 Drawing Area Size • 38
Drawing Border • 354
B Drawing Creation • 536
Drawing Cut List • 462
Bends • 92, 137, 158 Drawing File • 37
Bends and Branches • 317 Drawing Frame • 580
Bolted Assemblies • 522 Drawing Generation • 16
Branches • 115, 142, 163, 461 Drawing Manager • 15
Drawing Material List • 368
C Drawing Splitting • 23
Cable Tray • 133 Drawing Weld List • 501
Cable Tray Components • 133 Dual Units • 264
Cable Tray Components and Features • Duct • 151
289 Duct Components • 151
Cable Tray Features • 142 Duct Components and Features • 298
Calculations • 521 Duct Features • 163
Callouts • 337 Dynamic Fonts • 246
Centre of Gravity • 29
Centreline Lengths • 36 E
Component Attributes • 66, 178 Elbows • 94, 139, 159
Component Specific • 481 Enclosure • 425
Component Tags • 179 Enclosures • 173, 448, 456, 492, 496
Components • 548 Enterprise Data • 581
Content • 207, 544
Continuations • 208
Controls • 480, 483, 492 F
Coordinates • 313 Falls and Slopes • 335
Costing • 521 File Formatting • 50
Curved Pipe • 288 Fixed • 405, 470, 509
Cut Length Calculations • 459 Flanges • 96
Cut Pieces • 188, 458 Flat Spools • 451
Flow Arrows • 216
format • 423

Index
G Nozzles • 128, 172

Numbering • 483, 575
Gaskets • 97, 161, 282, 311
General • 545, 561
Generation and Display • 480 O
Ghost Gap • 217 Output File • 40
Graphics • 196 Output Rules • 59
Grouping • 206 Overall Dimensions • 258
Overview • 17, 536
H
Hatching • 333 P
Header Attributes • 48 Part Numbers • 173, 423
Heat Tracing • 319 Penetration Plates • 286
Heat Treatment • 49 Pipe • 85
Pipeline Attributes • 47, 64
I Pipeline List • 577
Piping Components • 84
Identifier Table • 482 Piping Components and Features • 270
Identifiers • 242, 464 Piping Features • 115
Imperial Dimensions and Coordinates • 322 POD Attributes • 63
Input Files • 45 Post Isogen • 577
Instruments • 88, 154 Pre and Post Processors • 43
Insulation and Tracing • 214 Preface • 11
Isogen Configuration for Smart 3D • 13 Prefixes • 488
Pulled (Pipe) Bends • 281
J Pulled Bends • 297, 310
Jacketed Pipe • 287
Joints and Assemblies • 190 R
Joints and Bolted Assemblies • 522
Rarely Used • 491
Reference Dimensions • 342, 553
L Reference Planes • 348
Label Mapping • 561 Report Types • 50
Layers • 203 Reports • 50, 445, 457, 478, 534
Local Sketches • 236 Revision Clouds • 239
M S
Material Attributes • 72 Scale • 204
Material Group Transfers • 409 Sequences • 485
Material List • 552 Set on Tees and Tapped Branches • 293
Materials • 367, 446 Set on Tees and Tapped Branches in Duct •
Messages • 194 304
Metric Coordinates • 320 Set on Tees and Tapped Branches in Pipe •
Metric Dimensions • 321 276
Miscellaneous Attributes • 76 Settings • 43, 229, 239, 243, 342, 349, 369,
Multi-Port • 98, 141, 162 430, 447, 451, 462, 501
Sheet Size • 37
N Skews and Falls • 328
SKEYS Defined as Instruments • 410
Nominal Sizes • 211 Smart 3D • 535
North Arrow • 207 Spec Breaks • 215
Notes • 565 Specifications • 568

Index
Spool Attributes • 75 Weld Numbers • 182

Spool Breaks • 447 Welds • 284
Spool Identifiers • 185, 447 Welds and Joints • 479
Standard Dimensions • 257 What's New in Isometric Drawing Options
Standouts • 260 Reference Guide • 11
Static Fonts • 245
Style • 328
Summary • 45
Supports • 89, 134, 155, 273, 290, 301, 318
Suppress Branch Dimensions • 266
Symbol Map • 541
Symbol Table • 360
T
Table Display • 357
Tap Branches • 278, 294, 306
Tap Headers • 280, 296, 308
Taps • 122, 146, 167
Teed Bends and Elbows • 281, 309
Text • 243, 434
Title Texts • 366
Title Texts for Fixed Material List • 366
Tolerances • 31, 339
Traceability Columns • 429
Traceability Table • 427
U
Units • 21
Units of Measure • 543
User Defined • 379, 503
User Defined Columns • 391, 506
User Defined Item Codes and Descriptions
• 570
User Defined Joints • 528
User Defined Remarks • 392
User Defined Spool Table • 394
User-Defined • 465
User-Defined Columns • 469
V
Valves • 87, 153
Valves and Instruments • 271, 299
Variable • 399, 507
Variable Columns • 403, 508
Vertical Dimensions • 268
W
Weights • 28
Weld Allowances • 459
Weld Attributes • 74

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide (S3D)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide (S3D)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Isometric Drawing Options

Version 2016 (11.0)

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 2

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 3

Isogen Configuration for Smart 3D ........................................................................................................ 13

Drawing Manager .................................................................................................................................... 15

Drawing Area ........................................................................................................................................... 82

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 4

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 5

Grouping ..................................................................................................................................... 206

Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................ 255

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 6

Tap Branches ............................................................................................................................. 294

Drawing Border ..................................................................................................................................... 354

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 7

Materials ................................................................................................................................................. 367

Spools .................................................................................................................................................... 446

Cut Pieces .............................................................................................................................................. 458

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 8

Welds and Joints ................................................................................................................................... 479

Smart 3D................................................................................................................................................. 535

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 9

Post Isogen ....................................................................................................................................... 577

Appendix: Record Identification Numbers .......................................................................................... 582

Index ....................................................................................................................................................... 585

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 10

What's New in Isometric Drawing Options Reference

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 11

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 12

Isogen Configuration for Smart 3D

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 13

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 14

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 15

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 16

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 17

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 18

First Sheet Number

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 19

Display 1 of 1 on Single Sheet

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 20

Pipe and Fittings

The combination MM bore, FT-IN dimensions is invalid.

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 21

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 22

Automatic Drawing Splitting

Ignore User Split Points

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 23

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 24

Show Continuation at Split Points

 Show Continuation at Split Points works in conjunction with Show Coordinates at

Show Coordinates at Split Points

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 25

Drawing Splitting in Pipe

Drawing Splitting (%)

Overflow Sheet Numbering

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 26

Material List Splitting

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 27

Support Additional Material

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 28

Dry Pipe Calculations

Wet Pipe Calculations

Isometric Drawing Options Reference Guide 29